Control System PDF

www.alljntuworld.
in JNTU World
Control System Design
ld
or
W
TU
JN
Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

www.alljntuworld.in JNTU World
ld
or
W
Department of Automatic Control
Lund Institute of Technology
Box 118
SE-221 00 LUND
TU
Sweden
&
c 2002 by Karl Johan strm. All rights reserved.
JN

Contents
ld
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 A Brief History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4 Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5 Robotics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
or
1.6 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.7 Aeronautics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.8 Electronics and Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.9 Automotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.10 Computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.11 Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.12 Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
W
1.13 Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.14 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2. Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.2 Simple Forms of Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.3 Representation of Feedback Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4 Properties of Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.5 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
TU
2.6 Open and Closed Loop Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

2.7 Feedforward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3. Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2 Two Views on Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.3 Ordinary Differential Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.4 Laplace Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
JN

Contents
3.5 Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3.6 State Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.7 Linear Time-Invariant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4. Simple Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.3 Bicycle Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.4 Control of First Order Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.5 Control of Second Order Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.6 Control of Systems of High Order* . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5. Feedback Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ld
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.2 The Basic Feedback Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.3 The Gang of Six . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.4 Disturbance Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.5 Process Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.6 When are Two Processes Similar? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
or
5.7 The Sensitivity Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5.8 Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5.9 Fundamental Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.10 Electronic Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5.11 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
6. PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
W
6.2 The Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6.3 Filtering and Set Point Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.4 Different Parameterizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.5 Windup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.6 Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.7 Computer Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
TU
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

7.2 Stability and Robustness to Process Variations . . . . . 252
7.3 Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7.5 Specifications Based on Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.6 Properties of Simple Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.7 Poles and Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.8 Relations Between Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
JN

Contents
7.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

8. Feedforward Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.2 Disturbance attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.3 System inverses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.4 Response to Reference Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
8.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
9. State Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9.2 State Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9.3 Observers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
9.4 Output Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
9.5 Comparison with PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ld
9.6 Disturbance Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
9.8 An Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
9.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
or
W
TU
JN

Contents
ld
or
W
TU
JN

1
Introduction
ld
1.1 Introduction
Control systems are ubiquitous. They appear in our homes, in cars, in
industry and in systems for communication and transport, just to give a
few examples. Control is increasingly becoming mission critical, processes
or
will fail if the control does not work. Control has been important for design
of experimental equipment and instrumentation used in basic sciences
and will be even more so in the future. Principles of control also have an
impact on such diverse fields as economics, biology, and medicine.
Control, like many other branches of engineering science, has devel-
oped in the same pattern as natural science. Although there are strong
similarities between natural science and engineering science it is impor-
tant to realize that there are some fundamental differences. The inspi-
W
ration for natural science is to understand phenomena in nature. This
has led to a strong emphasis on analysis and isolation of specific phe-
nomena, so called reductionism. A key goal of natural science is to find
basic laws that describe nature. The inspiration of engineering science
is to understand, invent, and design man-made technical systems. This
places much more emphasis on interaction and design. Interaction is a
key feature of practically all man made systems. It is therefore essential
to replace reductionism with a holistic systems approach. The technical
TU
systems are now becoming so complex that they pose challenges compa-
rable to the natural systems. A fundamental goal of engineering science
is to find system principles that make it possible to effectively deal with
complex systems. Feedback, which is at the heart of automatic control, is
an example of such a principle.
A simple form of feedback consists of two dynamical systems connected
in a closed loop which creates an interaction between the systems. Simple
JN

Chapter 1. Introduction
causal reasoning about such a system is difficult because, the first system
influences the second and the second system influences the first, leading to
a circular argument. This makes reasoning based on cause and effect diffi-
cult and it is necessary to analyze the system as a whole. A consequence of
this is that the behavior of a feedback system is often counterintuitive. To
understand feedback systems it is therefore necessary to resort to formal
methods based on mathematics.
Feedback has many advantages. It is possible to create linear behavior
out of nonlinear components. Feedback can make a system very resilient
towards external influences. The total system can be made very insensi-
tive to external disturbances and to variations in its individual compo-
nents. Feedback has one major disadvantage, it may create instability,
which is intrinsically a dynamic phenomenon. To understand feedback
ld
systems it is therefore necessary to have a good insight into dynamics.
The wide applicability of control has many advantages. Since control
can be used in so many different fields, it is a very good vehicle for tech-
nology transfer. Ideas invented in one field can be applied to another
technical field.
Control is inherently multidisciplinary. A typical control system con-
tains sensors, actuators, computers and software. Analysis of design of
or
control systems require domain knowledge about the particular process to
be controlled, knowledge of the techniques of control and specific technol-
ogy used in sensors and actuators. Controllers are typically implemented
using digital computers. Knowledge about real time computing and soft-
ware is therefore also essential. Sensors and actuators are often often
connected by communication networks. This implies that knowledge about
communication is also important. In the future we can see a convergence
W
of the technologies of control, computing and communication.
Team work is essential in control because of the wide range of tech-
nologies and techniques involved. Education in control has proven to be
an excellent background when working with complex engineering sys-
tems. The interdisciplinary nature of control has created some difficulties
for educators. Education and research in engineering grew out of specific
technologies such as mining, building of roads and dams, construction of
machines, generation and transmission of electricity, and industrial use
TU
of chemistry. This led to an organization of engineering schools based on

departments of mining, civil engineering, mechanical engineering, elec-
trical engineering, and chemical engineering etc. This served very well
in the end of the 19th century and the beginning of the 20th century.
The situation changed significantly with the advent of fields like control,
that cut cross traditional department boundaries. Industry has adapted
quickly to the new demands but academia has not.
There are many reasons why an engineer should know control. First
JN

1.2 A Brief History
of all because practically all engineers will use control, and some will de-
sign control systems. But the most important reason is that control is an
essential element of practically all engineering systems. It happens too
often that systems perform poorly because they are designed from purely
static analysis with no consideration of dynamics and control. This can be
avoided by engineers being aware of control even if they are not special-
ists. Control can also give designers extra degrees of freedom. It is in fact
a very powerful tool for designers of all systems. Cars are typical exam-
ples. The stringent requirements on emission were solved by controlling
the combustion engines. Other examples are anti-lock braking systems
(ABS) and systems for traction control. Other reasons to study control
is that there are many beautiful theoretical results and some really neat
devices.
ld
Control has for a long time been confined to engineering but it is in-
creasingly clear that the ideas and concepts have a much wider use. The
concepts of feedback and control are thus essential in understanding bio-
logical and economical systems. We illustrate this with a quote from the
book Way Life Works : The Science Lovers Illustrated Guide to How Life
Grows, Develops, Reproduces, and Gets Along by Mahlon Hoagland,
Bert Dodson.
or
Feedback is a central feature of life: All organisms share the
ability to sense how they are doing and to make changes in
"mid-flight" if necessary. The process of feedback governs how
we grow, respond to stress and challenge, and regulate factors
such as body temperature, blood pressure and cholesterol level.
This apparent purposefulness, largely unconscious, operates at
W
every level - from the interaction of proteins in cells to the
interaction of organisms in complex ecologies.
It is thus reasonable to claim that control not only makes our lives
more comfortable it is also essential for our existence.
The rest of this chapter gives a brief history of the development of the
field of control. The richness of the field is then illustrated by a number
of examples from a wide range of applications ranging from industrial
applications to biology.
TU
1.2 A Brief History
Although there are early examples of the use of feedback in ancient his-
tory, the development of automatic control is strongly connected to the
industrial revolution and the development of modern technology. When
JN

new sources of power were discovered the need to control them immedi-
ately arose. When new production techniques were developed there were
needs to keep them operating smoothly with high quality.
The Centrifugal Governor

The centrifugal governor is one of the most celebrated early feedback sys-
tems. It was first used to control the speed of windmills. Later around
1788 it was used by James Watt to control the velocity of steam engines.
A textile mill is a typical application, one steam engine drives several spin-
ning wheels and looms. The power from the steam engine is transmitted
to the spinning wheels and looms via belt-drives. It is highly desirable
to keep the speed of the steam engine constant because changes in speed
ld
may cause thread breaks and require adjustments of the looms. It was
observed that engine speed changed with changes in the load, for example
when a loom was connected to the drive belt. The centrifugal governor was
introduced in order to keep the speed constant. Figure 1.1 shows a typical
system. It consists of two balls hinged on a rotating shaft which is con-
nected to the output shaft of the steam engine. When the speed increases,
the balls swing out. This motion is connected to the valve which admits
or
steam into the engine via mechanical links. The connection is made in
such a way that steam flow increases when the velocity decreases. The
system is a feedback system because changes in the velocity are fed back
to the steam valve. The feedback is negative because the the steam supply
is increased when the velocity decreases.
The improvement obtained when using a centrifugal governor is illus-
trated in Figure 1.2. The figure shows that the velocity drops when an
W
additional loom is connected to the drive belt. The figure also shows that
the velocity drop is significantly smaller when a centrifugal governor is
used.
It is possible to change the characteristics of the governor by changing
the mechanism that transmits the motion of the balls to the steam valve.
To describe this we introduce the notion of gain of the governor. This
is the ratio of the change in steam valve opening ( u) to the change
in the angle ( v) of the velocity. See Figure 1.2 which shows how the
velocity responds to changes in the load. The figure shows that the largest
TU
velocity error decreases with decreasing gain of the controller but also that
there is a tendency for oscillations that increases with increasing gain.
The centrifugal governor was a very successful device that drastically
simplified the operation of steam driven textile mills.
The action of the basic centrifugal governor can crudely be describe
with the equation
u = k( Vr V ) + b
JN
10

1.2 A Brief History
ld
Figure 1.1 The centrifugal governor, which has been used to control the speed of
engines since the beginning of the industrial revolution. When the axis spins faster
the balls move away from the axis. The motion is transfered to the engine to reduce
its power. The governor has also become an icon of the field of control.
or
Velocity
3
2.5
1.5
v
1
W
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
Load
2
TU
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 1.2 Response of the velocity to changes in the load of an engine controlled
by a governor with different values of the gain, k = 0 (dashed), k = 1 (full), k = 12
(dash-dotted).
JN
11

Velocity
3
2.5
1.5
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
Load
ld
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
or
Figure 1.3 Response of velocity to changes in the load of an engine controlled by
a governor having proportional control (dashed line) and PI control (full line).
where u is the opening of the steam valve, Vr is the desired speed, V

the actual speed and k and b are constants. This is called a proportional
controller because the control action u is proportional to the error. The
W
parameter b is a bias term that was adjusted manually to make sure that
the V was equal to Vr . Siemens made a clever invention which eliminated
the bias adjustment. His governor can mathematically be described by the
equation
Z t
u = k( Vr V ) + ki ( Vr ( ) V ( ))d (1.1)
0
the bias term was thus replaced by a term proportional to the integral of
TU
past errors. A controller described by (1.1) has the amazing property that
the velocity V is always equal to the desired velocity Vr in steady state.
This is illustrated by Figure 1.3 which shows the behavior of an engine
with control actions proportional to the integral of the error. In standard
terminology the Siemens governor is called a PI controller, indicating that
the control action is proportional to the error and the integral of the error.
Integral action has some amazing properties that will be discussed further
in Section 2.2.
JN
12

1.2 A Brief History
The Emergence of Control

Apart from the centrifugal governor the early applications of control in-
clude, autopilots for ships and aircrafts, the electronic feedback amplifier
and process control. The fundamental similarities between the different
systems were not noticed. Control emerged around 1945 as a result of
intensive military research in the period 1940-1945. During the Second
World War it became apparent that science and technology could have
a major impact on the war effort. Among the goals were development
of radar and fire control systems. Control was a central feature element
of these systems. In many countries groups of scientists and engineers
were gathered in research institutes. It was realized that feedback was
essential for such diverse systems as autopilots for ships and aircrafts,
electronic amplifiers, systems for orientation of radar antennas and guns,
ld
and industrial production of uranium. Control was born out of this multi-
disciplinary effort.
The first manifestation of control was called servo-mechanism theory.
This theory used block diagrams as a tool for abstraction. This clearly
showed the similarity between the widely different systems. The math-
ematical tools were Laplace transforms and the theory of complex vari-
or
ables. Analog computers were used for simulation and controllers were
implemented as analog computers. It is significant that one of the first
books was edited by three persons, a mathematician, a physicist and and
engineer from a control company.
One factor that strongly contributed to the emergence of control was
that many of the results from the military efforts were disseminated very
quickly. After the war it became apparent that control was very useful in
practically all branches of engineering and the ideas spread like wild fire
W
around the world. One result was that education in control was introduced
as an essential element of engineering education practically all over the
world. A characteristic feature of control is that it is not confined to a
particular branch of engineering such as mechanical, electrical, chemical,
aeronautical, and computer. Control appears in all disciplines, it is in fact
the first systems science.
In the late 1950s there were organizational activities which created
meeting places for researchers and practitioners of control. Conferences
TU
were organized and journals on control started to appear. The Interna-

tional Federation of Automatic Control (IFAC) was the key organization
but the traditional engineering organization also introduced special inter-
est groups on control. The first World Congress of IFAC in Moscow in 1960,
where control engineers and scientists from all over the world met for the
first time, was a landmark. Another effect was the industrialization of
control which created companies specializing in control equipment.
JN
13

The Second Wave

Any field could have been proud of the development that took place from
1940 to 1960, a second wave of development starting in the late 1950s.
The driving forces were new challenging applications and a strong stimu-
lation from mathematics. The major drivers for the development were the
space race and the use of digital computers for industrial process control.
Notice that Sputnik was launched in 1957 and the first computer installed
to control an oil refinery started on-line control in 1959. There was a very
vigorous development of both theory and practice of control. Digital com-
puters replaced analog computers both for simulation and implementation
of controllers. A number of subspecialities of control were also developed.
It turned out that a wide range of mathematics fitted the control prob-
lems very well, and a tradition of a high respect for mathematical rigor
ld
emerged.
Today control is a well established field with a solid body of theory and
very wide applications. Practically all controllers are today implemented
in digital computers. There are also many challenges. Control is increas-
ingly becoming mission critical which means that great attention has to
be given to safety and reliability. The complexity of the control systems
or
are also increasing substantially.
There are tremendous challenges in the future when we can visualize a
convergence of control, computing and communication which will result in
large interconnected systems. It is also reasonable to guess that a deeper
understanding of control in the field of biology will be very exciting. In
this sections we will present a number of applications together with some
historical notes. The idea is to illustrates the broad applicability of control
and the way it has impacted on many different fields.
W
1.3 Process Control
Many products that are essential for us in daily life are manufactured
by the process industries. Typical examples are oil, petrochemical, pa-
per, pharmaceuticals. These industries use continuous manufacturing pro-
TU
cesses. Process control is an essential part of these industries, the pro-

cesses can not be run without control systems. We will start by discussing
the centrifugal governor.
Advances in Process Control

Key issues in process control are to:
Keep essential quality variables at specified values.

JN
14

1.3 Process Control
ld
Figure 1.4 Microprocessor based single loop controller. By courtesy of ABB In-
dustrial Systems.
Minimize use of energy and raw material.

Make rapid changes of production or grades.
or
The control systems are key factors to obtain these goals. There have been
major advances since the centrifugal governor appeared.
In the centrifugal governors the actions of sensing, computing and ac-
tuation were executed by purely mechanical devices. A lot of ingenuity
went into the designs which were often patented. Feedback actually had
W
a crucial role in the design of the controllers. By using feedback it was pos-
sible to construct controllers that had a stable well defined behavior from
components with a large variability. The technology of controlling engine
speed by governors was applied to all types of engines. When electricity
emerged in the end of the 19th century there was a similar need to control
the speed of generator for hydroelectric generators. Since there was lit-
tle communication between different fields ideas like integral action were
reinvented several times. Major advances were made in the 1930s and 40s.
TU
Controllers then appeared as special devices separated from sensors and

actuators. New industries , such as Fisher Control, Foxboro, Honeywell,
Leeds and Northrup, Taylor Instruments, which supplied sensors, actu-
ators, controller and complete system emerged. The controllers were im-
plemented in different technologies, mechanic, pneumatic and electronic.
Controllers for many loops were located in central control rooms. The
technology of using digital computers for process control emerged in the
1960s. Computer control is the standard technology for process control.
JN
15

Plant
manager
Order Production Financial

Purchaser
handler manager manager
Lab Process
assistant Plant network operator
ld
Lab Admin. Information Operator
computer computer station station
Control network
Process Process Process

station station station
Field
bus
or
Process
Figure 1.5 Modern industrial systems for process control, like the Advant OCS
tie computers together and help create a common uniform computer environment
supporting all industrial activities, from input to output, from top to bottom. (By
courtesy of ABB Industrial System, Vsters, Sweden.).
W
New companies have often emerged when major technology changes oc-
curred, there have also been many mergers. Today there are a few large
companies that supply control world wide, ABB, Honeywell, Siemens and
Toshiba.
The processes vary significantly in scale, a small process unit may have
20-100 control loops but a complete paper mill may have up to several
TU
thousand control loops. A wide variety of systems are used for control.
There are microprocessor based controllers for single or multiple loops, see
Figure 1.4, systems based on personal computers (PC), programmable
logic controllers (PLCs) and distributed control systems consisting of
many computers connected in a network, see Figure 1.5 Large plants may
have 5000-10000 control loops, organized in an hierarchical structure.
Most (about 90%) of the lower level control loops are still PID control,
which is implemented in the digital computer.
JN
16

1.4 Manufacturing
The Role of Sensors

Sensors are key elements of control systems because they provide infor-
mation about the process. The variables of primary interest in process
control are closely related to product quality. Unfortunately it is very dif-
ficult to measure such variables on-line. Control is therefore often done
indirectly by controlling secondary variables such as level, temperature
and pressure. The on-line measurements are often augmented by labora-
tory analysis of samples of the product.
There are interesting synergies between development of sensors and
control. Feedback is often used in sensors. When new sensors become
available there are opportunities to develop new control systems. One
example is the emergence of sensors for on-line measurement of basis
weight and moisture in the 1960s which led to emergence of two new
ld
companies Accuray and Measurex which specialized in control of paper
machines. There is a similar window of opportunity today because new
sensors for measuring composition and surface structure based on infrared
and near infrared spectroscopy are available.
or
1.4 Manufacturing
Process control is continuous manufacturing. Feedback has also had a
major impact on manufacturing of discrete parts. Numerically controlled
machine tools developed at the Control Systems Laboratory at MIT in
the 1950s was a first step where control was used to improve precision
of mechanical machining. Welding is highly automated using control and
W
vision systems. Machines for manufacturing systems based on machining
with lasers and electrical arcs depend heavily on use of control.
Large manufacturing operations are made on transfer lines, where
the parts are moved along a line to stations which perform the opera-
tions. The individual stations do operations such as drilling, machining
and polishing. A line for making car engines has 10 to 20 machines, which
are separated by buffers. Each machine has around 10 stations. The there
are simple continuous control systems in each station for tasks such as
TU
positioning. A complete transfer line has a few hundred feedback loops.

The major control problem is, however, the safe control of the whole op-
eration, for example, to determine when a part should be moved, when a
drilling operation should start, when a tool should be removed. This is a
discrete control problem where the information comes from on-off signals
such as limit switches. The control actions are also discrete, to start a
motor, to start drilling, to stop drilling, to change a tool. The systems are
very complex because of the large number of signals involved. A single
JN
17

Manufacturer Supplier Wholesaler Retailer
Figure 1.6 Schematic diagram of a simple supply chain consisting of manufactur-

ing, suppliers, wholesaler and retailer, with delays between the different operations.
station in a transfer line may have 5 to 10 000 discrete inputs and output
and 10 to 20 continuous control loops. Logic control was originally done
by relay systems. When microprocessors were developed in the 1970s the
relays were replaced by programmable logic controllers (PLCs). Design
of the discrete control system is typically done in an ad hoc manner based
ld
on past experience. A general solution is still missing.
Supply Chains
There are also other uses of control in manufacturing, namely control of
the complete business operation and complete supply chains. Manufac-
turing and distribution involve large flows of materials. Raw materials
have to be supplied to the manufacturer, the products have to be supplied
or
to the consumers. This is illustrated in Figure 1.6 which shows a simple
supply chain. The diagram shows only a few levels, in practice a system
may contain thousands of outlets and storages and it may deal with a
very large number of products. Several important functions in the system
like quality control, sales, and production management are not shown in
the figure.
Manufacturing facilities and sales operations have traditionally been
W
quite inflexible in the sense that it is difficult to change products and
production rates. In such a system it is necessary to have many buffer
storages to match production rates to fluctuating sales and supplies of
raw materials and parts from sub-contractors. Production rate is largely
determined in an open loop manner based on prediction of sales. An elab-
orate bookkeeping system is also required to keep inventories of parts.
A different system is obtained if the production time can be reduced
and if the production can be made so flexible that products can be changed
TU
rapidly. It is then possible to produce a part when an order is obtained.

Such a system may be regarded as a closed loop system where production
is determined by feedback from sales. An advantage of such a system is
that inventories can be vastly reduced. Administration of the system is
also greatly simplified because it is no longer necessary to keep track of
many products and parts in storage. A system of this type contributed
significantly to the efficiency of Walmart. They relied on human sensors
in the form of managers who analyzed the sales when the shops were
JN
18

1.5 Robotics
Figure 1.7 Remote robot surgery using the ZEUS system from Computer Motion
Inc. The doctors on the left are in New York and the patient and the robots are in
ld
Strasbourg, France. Courtesy of Computer Motion Inc. Goleta
closed every evening to make new orders.
or
1.5 Robotics
The origin of the industrial robot is a patent application for a device called
Programmed Article Transfer submitted in 1956 by the engineer George
Devol. The robotics industry was created when Devol met Joseph En-
gelberger and they founded the company Unimation. The first industrial
robot, Unimate, was developed by in 1961. A major breakthrough occurred
W
in 1964 when General Motors ordered 66 machines Unimate robots from
Unimation. In 1998 there were about 720 000 robots installed. The ma-
jority of them, 412 000 are in Japan. Robots are used for a wide range
of tasks: welding, painting, grinding, assembly and transfer of parts in
a production line or between production lines. Robots that are used ex-
tensively in manufacturing of cars, and electronics. There are emerging
applications in the food industry and in packaging. Robots for vacuum-
ing and lawn moving as well as more advanced service robots are also
TU
appearing.
Robots are also started to be used used in medical applications. This
is illustrated in Figure 1.7 which shows robots that are used for an endo-
scopic operation. One advantage of the system is that it permits doctors
to work much more ergonomically. Another advantage is that operations
can be done remotely. The system in the figure is from a robot operation,
where the patient was in Strasbourg, France and the doctors in New York.
JN
19

Another aspect of robots

The word robota is a Slavic word that means work, often meaning of slave
work. It came into prominence in a novel from 1918 and a play from 1921
by the check author Karel Capek called Rossums Universal Robots. The
play is about robot workers who revolt and kill their human ruler. Another
literary aspect of robot is the famous robot trilogy by Isaac Asimov from
1940 who introduced the three laws of robotics
First Law: A robot may not injure a human being, or, through inaction,
allow a human being to come to harm.
Second Law: A robot must obey orders given it by human beings, except
where such orders would conflict with the First Law.
ld
Third Law: A robot must protect its own existence as long as such pro-
tection does not conflict with the First or Second Law.
Asimovs book captured the imagination of many and there is clear evi-
dence that Engelberger was inspired by Asimovs writing. Other examples
or
about imaginative speculations about robots are found in Arthur Clarkes
book 2001 A Space Odyssey where the robot HAL takes over the operation
of a space ship and R2- D2 in the Star Wars series.
There are currently some very interesting developments in robotics.
Particularly in Japan there is much research on humanoid and animaloid
robots. There are very advanced humanoid robots in research laboratories,
there are also robots that mimic snakes, cats, birds and fish. A robot dog
AIBO and a service robot have been commercialized by Sony.
W
Design Issues - Task Based Control and Automomy
Design of robots is a typical multidisciplinary task which is a mixture
of mechanical engineering, electronics, computer science, artificial intelli-
gence, and control. It is a typical example of the challenges posed by new
industries. Control systems are essential parts of a robot.
The control problems for industrial robots are servo problems, typically
TU
to control position of an arm or the force exerted by a tool. There are also
other forms of feedback based on force sensors and vision.
Humanoid robots require a much more advanced task based control. It
is necessary to provide them with functions for obstacle avoidance, path
planning, navigation and map making. Since the robots have to be highly
autonomous they must also have capabilities for learning, reasoning and
decision making. Development of systems with such capabilities is a chal-
lenging research task.
JN
20

1.6 Power
1.6 Power
The power industry started to develop in the end of the 19the century and
accelerated rapidly in the 20th century. Availability of power has improved
quality of life tremendously. In 2000 the total amount of electric energy
generated in the world was about about 15 000 TWh. It is expected to
grow by a factor of 3 in 60 years where the main growth is outside the
OECD countries.
Control is an essential element in all systems for generation and trans-
mission of electricity. Many central ideas in control were developed in this
context. When electricity emerged in the end of the 19th century the gen-
erators were typically driven by water turbines. Since alternating current
(AC) was the preferred means for transmission there was immediately a
ld
need to control the speed of the generators to maintain constant frequency.
Derivative and integral control appeared early as did stability critiera.
The development paralleled the work on centrifugal governors but it was
done independently and it had a stronger engineering flavor. One of the
earliest books on control, with the title Die Regelung der Kraftmaschinen,
was published by Tolle as early as 1905. It was discovered that the perfor-
mance of hydroelectric power stations was severely limited by dynamics
or
of the water duct. The power decreased rapidly initially when the valve
was opened and then increased slowly. This property made the systems
difficult to control. It is an example of what is now call a non-minimum
phase dynamics.
As the demand for electricity grew many generators were connected in
a network. These networks became larger and larger as more generators
and consumers were connected. Figure 1.8, which is a schematic picture
W
of the network for the Scandinavian countries, is an example of a network
of moderate size. Sweden, Norway and Finland has much hydroelectric
power, Sweden and Finland has nuclear power and Denmark has wind
and thermal power. In Sweden the hydroelectric power is generated in
the north, but most of the consumption is in the south. Power thus has to
be transmitted over long lines. The system in the different countries are
connected via AC and DC lines. There are also connections to Germany
and Poland.
TU
It is difficult to store energy and it is therefore necessary that pro-

duction and consumption are well balanced. This is a difficult problem
because consumption can change rapidly in a way that is difficult to pre-
dict. Generators for AC can only deliver power if the generators are syn-
chronized to the voltage variations in the network. This means that the
rotors of all generators in a network must line up. Synchronism is lost
when the angles deviate too much.
Matching production and consumption is a simple regulation problem
JN
21

ld
or
W
TU
Figure 1.8 The Nordel power grid which supplies electric energy for the Scan-
dinavian countries. The squares represent hydroelectric stations and the triangles
represent thermal stations, both nuclear and conventional, and circles denote trans-
formers. The lines denote major power lines. Only the major components are shown
in the system.
JN
22

1.6 Power
DC line
Rectifier Inverter
Figure 1.9 Schematic diagram of an HVDC transmission link. The system is fed
from the right by AC which is converted to DC by the rectifier and transmitted over
a DC line to the inverter which converts it to AC.
for one generator and one consumer, but it is a more difficult problem
in a highly distributed system with long distances between consumption
ld
and generation. To have a reliable system it is highly desirable to avoid
transmission of information over long distances. Control should therefore
be done locally at each station based on the information available at the
station. Several interesting control principles have been developed to do
this. Control of each generator must be based on information that is locally
available. Because of reliability requirements it is not possible to rely on
or
information that is transmitted over wide distances.
High Voltage DC Transmission Systems

Even if most of the electricity is transmitted as AC there are some sit-
uation where it is advantageous to transmit direct current (DC). One
example is when electric power has to be transmitted using under wa-
ter cables. DC links can also be used to connect two asynchronous power
W
grids. The systems for transmission of high voltage DC (HVDC systems)
have many interesting properties. A schematic picture of such a system
is shown in Figure 1.9. The AC is rectified to generate DC which is trans-
mitted and converted to AC by the inverter. The rectifier and the inverter
consists of semiconductor switches that permit very rapid changes of the
power. It is possible to switch the direction of 600MW in fractions of a sec-
ond. Control of such a system in a safe precise way is a great challenge.
TU
Control of Networked Power Systems

An interconnected power system of the type shown in Figure 1.8 is a
complicated system. The behavior of such systems is not easy to predict.
Problems when interconnecting two systems were encountered by Edison.
He found that it was not possible to connect two turbine driven generators
when both generators had controllers with integral action. The system
will drift so that one generator takes all the load. This was one of the
JN
23

1
10
0
10
-1
10
-2
10
10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7
Figure 1.10 Power outages in the US 1984-97. The horizontal axis shows the
ld
number of persons N affected by the outages and the vertical axis shows the yearly
frequency of outages that influence more than N persons. Notice that the scales on
both axes are logarithmic.
first observations that problems may occur when several regulators are
connected to an integrated system.
or
Edisons observation led to interesting developments of control theory.
In current practice one large generator in the network controls the fre-
quency using a controller with integral action. The other generators use
proportional control. The amount of power delivered by each generator is
set by the gain of the proportional controller. Each generator has separate
voltage control.
There have been many other surprises in interconnected systems. In
W
the Nordel system it has been observed that a moderated increase of
power load in the north could result in large oscillations in the power
transmission between Sweden and Denmark in the south. Oscillations
have been observed when modern trains with switched power electronics
have put in operation. An understanding of such phenomena and solutions
require knowledge about dynamics and control.
Safety and Reliability

TU
The power systems are generally very reliable. Customers will have power
even when generators and lines fail. This is achieved by good engineering
of the system based on redundancies. Networked generators contribute
significantly to the reliability of the system because it is possible for a
large number of generators to take up the load if one generator fails. The
drawback is however that there may be massive failures in the system
which also has occurred. This is illustrated in Figure 1.10 which shows
the statistics of power failures.
JN
24

1.7 Aeronautics
1.7 Aeronautics
Control has often emerged jointly with new technology. It has often been
an enabler but in some cases it has had a much more profound impact.
This has been the case in aeronautics and astronautics as will be discussed
in this section.
Emergence of Flight
The fact that the ideas of control has contribute to development of new
technology is very nicely illustrated by the following quote from a lecture
by Wilbur Wright to the Western Society of Engineers in 1901:
Men already know how to construct wings or airplanes, which
ld
when driven through the air at sufficient speed, will not only
sustain the weight of the wings themselves, but also that of
the engine, and of the engineer as well. Men also know how to
build engines and screws of sufficient lightness and power to
drive these planes at sustaining speed ... Inability to balance
and steer still confronts students of the flying problem. ... When
this one feature has been worked out, the age of flying will have
or
arrived, for all other difficulties are of minor importance.
The Wright brothers thus realized that control was a key issue to enable
flight. They resolved compromise between stability and maneuverability
by building an airplane, Kitty Hawk, that was unstable but maneuverable.
The pioneering flight was in 1905. Kitty Hawk had a rudder in the front of
the airplane, which made the plane very maneuverable. A disadvantage
W
was the necessity for the pilot to keep adjusting the rudder to fly the
plane. If the pilot let go of the stick the plane would crash. Other early
aviators tried to build stable airplanes. These would have been easier to
fly, but because of their poor maneuverability they could not be brought
up into the air. By using their insight and skillful experiments the Wright
brothers made the first successful flight with Kitty Hawk in 1905. The fact
that this plane was unstable was a strong impetus for the development
of autopilots based on feedback.
TU
Autopilots
Since it was quite tiresome to fly an unstable aircraft, there was strong
motivation to find a mechanism that would stabilize an aircraft. Such a
device, invented by Sperry, was based on the concept of feedback. Sperry
used a gyro-stabilized pendulum to provide an indication of the vertical.
He then arranged a feedback mechanism that would pull the stick to
make the plane go up if it was pointing down and vice versa. The Sperry
JN
25

ld
Figure 1.11 Picture from Sperrys contest in Paris. Sperrys son is at the stick and
or
the mechanic walks on the wings to introduce disturbances. Notice the proximity to
the ground.
autopilot is the first use of feedback in aeronautical engineering. Sperry

won a prize in a competition for the safest airplane in Paris in 1912.
Figure 1.11 is a picture from the event. The autopilot is a good example
W
of how feedback can be used to stabilize an unstable system.
Autonomous Systems
Fully automatic flight including take off and landing is a development
that naturally follows autopilots. It is quite surprising that this was done
as early as 1947, see Figure 1.12. The flight was manually supervised but
the complete flight was done without manual interaction.
Autonomous flight is a challenging problem because it requires auto-
TU
matic handling of a wide variety of tasks, landing, flying to the normal

flight altitude, navigation, approaching the airfield, and landing. This re-
quires a combination of continuous control and logic, so called hybrid
control. In the flight by Robert E. Lee the logic required was provided by
an IBM computer with punch cards. The theory of hybrid systems is still
in its infancy. There are many similarities with the problem of design-
ing humanoid robots. They require facilities for navigation, map making,
adaptation, learning, reasoning. There are many unsolved research prob-
JN
26

1.7 Aeronautics
ld
Figure 1.12 Excerpt from article in New York Times on September 23, 1947,
or
describing the first fully automatic transatlantic flight.
lems in this field.

The use of autonomous systems is rapidly increasing. The Boeing 777
and the Airbus are modern examples of systems with a high degree of
autonomy. There have also been extensive developments of Unmanned
Air Vehicles (UAV).
W
Integrated Process and Control Design
Flight control is a good illustration of the value of integrated process and
control design. The Wright brothers succeeded where others failed, be-
cause they made an unstable airplane that was maneuverable. Aircrafts
that were both stable and maneuverable were built later. There are still
substantial advantages in having unstable aircrafts that rely on a con-
trol system for stabilization. Modern fighters obtain their performance in
TU
this way. A schematic picture of two modern jet fighters are shown in Fig-
ure 1.13. The positions of the center of mass CM and the center of pressure
are key elements. To be stable the center of pressure must be behind of
the center of mass. The center of pressure of an aircraft shifts backwards
when a plane goes supersonic. If the plane is stable at sub-sonic speeds
it becomes even more stable at supersonic speeds. Very large forces and
large control surfaces are then required to maneuver the airplane. A more
balanced design is obtained by placing the center of pressure in front of
JN
27

CM
CP
CP
CM
Figure 1.13 Schematic digram of two aircrafts. The aircraft above is stable be-
cause it has the center of pressure behind the center of mass. The aircraft below is
ld
unstable.
the center of mass at sub-sonic speeds. Such a plane will however by

unstable at sub-sonic speeds, i.e. at take off and landing. This imposes
severe constraints on the safety and robustness of the control system, but
or
the aircraft will have superior performance. When the automatic control
system becomes a critical part of the process it may also become mission
critical which means that the system will fail if the controls fails. This
induces strong demands on the reliability of the control system.
The development of aeronautical and aerospace engineering has often
gone hand in hand with the development of feedback control. It was real-
ized that control has to be considered up front in the design at the same
W
time as, structures, engines, aerodynamics. A very interesting illustration
of this is the recent development of high performance military aircrafts.
Most aircrafts built today are designed to be stable.
Control is also mission critical for rockets and satellites.
1.8 Electronics and Communication

TU
Electronics emerged in the in 1906 with the invention of the audion, a

prototype of the vacuum tube, by Le De Forest. This was the start of the
revolutionary development of the electronics industry which has had a
big impact on the way we live. Control has had a major impact on this
industry as well. The first application of feedback in electronics was a
patent on vacuum tube amplifiers by the rocket pioneer Robert Goddard
in 1912, but the most influential development is undoubtedly the nega-
tive feedback amplifier. Before dealing with this we will, however, briefly
JN
28

R2
R1
I
+
V

V1 V2
Figure 1.14 Schematic diagram of Armstrongs super-regenerative receiver.
ld
discuss an application of positive feedback.
The Super-regenerative Amplifier - Positive Feedback

Vacuum tubes were expensive and it was highly desirable to use as few
amplifiers as possible. In 1915 Armstrong suggested to use positive feed-
back to obtain a high amplification. A schematic of Armstrongs amplifier
or
is shown in Figure 1.14.
Assume that the current I into the amplifier is zero, then the current
through the resistors R1 and R2 are the same. It then follows from Ohms
Law that
V1 V V V2
= (1.2)
R1 R2
Let G be the open loop gain of the amplifier, it then follows that
W
V2 = GV (1.3)
Eliminating the variable V between Equations (1.2) and (1.3) gives the
following equation for the ratio of the output and input voltages
V2 R1
=G (1.4)
V1 R1 + R2 G R2
TU
This equation gives the gain of the amplifier with positive feedback. The
gain is very large if the resistors are chosen so that R1 + R2 G R2 is
small. Assume for example that R1 = 100k , R1 = 24k , and G = 5.
The formula above shows that the gain of the feedback system is 25. With
R2 = 24.5k the gain will be 50, and with R1 = 25k the gain is infinite.
Regeneration was the word used for feedback at the time, and Arm-
strongs amplifier was called a super-regenerative amplifier because it
obtained high gain by positive feedback. Armstrongs invention made it
JN
29

R2
R1
I

V
+
V1 V2
Figure 1.15 An amplifier with negative feedback.
ld
possible to build inexpensive amplifiers with very high gain. The ampli-
fiers were, however, extremely sensitive and they could easily start to
oscillate. Prices of vacuum tubes also dropped and the interest in the
amplifier dwindled. Next we will discuss another use of feedback in an
amplifier which still has profound consequences.
or
The Negative Feedback Amplifier
When telephone communications were developed, amplifiers were used to
compensate for signal attenuation in long lines. The vacuum tube was a
component that could be used to build amplifiers. Distortion caused by
the nonlinear characteristics of the tube amplifier together with amplifier
drift were obstacles that prevented development of line amplifiers for a
long time. A major breakthrough was Blacks invention of the feedback
W
amplifier in 1927. Black used negative feedback which reduces the gain
but makes the amplifier very insensitive to variations in tube character-
istics. Blacks invention made it possible to build stable amplifiers with
linear characteristics despite nonlinearities of the vacuum tube amplifier.
A schematic diagram of a feedback amplifier is shown in Figure 1.15.
Assume that the current I into the amplifier is zero, the current through
the resistors R1 and R2 are then the same and it follows from Ohms Law
that Equation (1.2) holds. Let the gain of the amplifier be G it follows
TU
that
V2 = GV (1.5)
Eliminating the variable V between Equations (1.2) and (1.5) gives the
following equation for the ratio of the output and input voltages
V2 R2 1
= (1.6)
V1 R1 1 + G (1
1
+ R1 )
R2
JN
30

This equation gives the gain of the amplifier with negative feedback. Since
the gain G is a very large number, typically of the order of 105 or 108 , it
follows from this equation that the input-output property of the amplifier
is essentially determined by resistors R1 and R2 . These are passive com-
ponents which are very stable. The properties of the active components
appear in parameter G. Even if G changes significantly, the input-output
gain remains constant. Also notice that the relation between Vout and Vin
is very close to linear even if the relation between Vout and V , equation
1.5, is strongly nonlinear.
Like many clever ideas the idea of the feedback amplifier seems almost
trivial when it is described. It took, however, six years of hard work for
Black to come up with it. The invention and development of the feedback
amplifier was a key step in the development of long distance communi-
ld
cations. The following quote from the presentation of the IEEE Lamme
Medal to Black in 1957 gives a perspective on the importance of Blacks
invention of the feedback amplifier:
It is no exaggeration to say that without Blacks invention, the
present long-distance telephone and television networks which
cover our entire country and the transoceanic telephone cables
or
would not exist. The application of Blacks principle of negative
feedback has not been limited to telecommunications. Many of
the industrial and military amplifiers would not be possible
except for its use. ... Thus, the entire explosive extension of
the area of control, both electrical and mechanical, grew out of
an understanding of the feedback principle. The principle also
sheds light in psychology and physiology on the nature of the
W
mechanisms that control the operation of animals, including
humans, that is, on how the brain and senses operate.
It is interesting to observe that while Armstrong used positive feedback
Black was using negative feedback.
Feedback quickly became an indispensable companion of electronics
and communication. The applications are abundant. Today we find inter-
esting use of feedback in power control in system for cellular telephony.
A handset must naturally use enough power to transmit so that it can be
TU
heard by the nearest station, using too much power will increase interfer-
ence with other handsets, necessitating use of even more power. Keeping
the power at the correct level gives a large pay-off because the batteries
will last longer.
Hewletts Stabilized Oscillator

Many control problems are solved by linear systems. There are, however,
problems where nonlinearities are essential. One of them is the design of
JN
31

Figure 1.16 Circuit diagram of William Hewletts oscillator that gives a stable
ld
oscillation through nonlinear feedback using a lamp.
an oscillator that gives a signal with a constant amplitude. This problem

was solved very elegantly by William Hewlett in his PhD thesis at Stan-
ford University in 1939. Hewlett simply introduced a nonlinear element
in the form of a lamp in the circuit, see Figure 1.16. Hewletts oscillator
or
was the beginning of a very successful company HP, that Hewlett founded
with David Packard.
CD Players and Optical Memories

The CD player is an interesting device which critically depends on several
high performance control loops. The yearly sales of CD players was about
100 million units in the year 2000. That makes it one of the most common
W
control systems.
A schematic picture of the main components of a CD player is shown in
Figure 1.17. The information on the disc is read by light from a laser diode
that is reflected by the disc to an optical assembly with photo transistors.
Processing of the signals from the transistors gives the radial track error
and a a focus signal. The laser diode, the optical assembly and the actuator
are mounted on a sled which can be moved precisely over a small range.
The sled is moved by another servo which permits large motions.
TU
A block diagram of the major servos are shown in Figure 1.18. There
are three critical servo loops. The focus servo concentrates the laser spot
in the disc information layer. The tracking servo positions the laser spot
on the track. The sled servo moves the sled so that the tracking system
is in operating range. The tracking and the sled servos are also used to
switch between tracks. The servos are all based on error feedback since
only the error signal is available from the sensors. The major disturbance
is due to misalignment of the track. In a CD player this is due to an
JN
32

ld
Figure 1.17 Schematic picture of a CD player.
or
W
Figure 1.18 Block diagram of the major servos in a CD player.
off set of the center both due to manufacturing variations and errors in
TU
centering of the CD. The disturbance is approximately sinusoidal. The

tracking accuracy of the systems is quite remarkable. For a typical CD
player, which stores 650 M-bytes, the variations in a track are typically
200 m, the track width is 1.6 m and the tracking accuracy is 0.1 m.
The tracking speed varies from 1.2 to 1.4m/ s. The servos used in the
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) and in optical memories are very similar to
the servos in a CD but the precision is higher. For a Digital Versatile Disc
(DVD) the variations in a track are typically 100 m, the track width is
JN
33

1.6 m and the tracking accuracy is 0.022 m. The tracking speed varies
in the range 3.5m/ s. The quality of the major servo loops have a direct
impact on the performanc of the storage system. A better tracking servo
permits a higher storage density in an optical drive. An improved servo for
switching tracks is immediately reflected in the search time in an optical
memory.
1.9 Automotive
Cars are increasingly being provided with more and more control systems.
The possibility of doing this are due to availability of cheap microproces-
sors and sensors and good control technology. The automotive industry has
ld
also been a strong driving force for the development of micro-controllers
and sensors.
Reducing Emissions
California introduced a standard that required a substantial reduction of
emissions for internal combustion engines. To achieve this it was neces-
or
sary to introduce feedback in the engine based on measurement of the
oxygen in the exhaust. The following quote from a plenary lecture by
William E. Powers a former vice president of Ford at the 1999 World
Congress of IFAC is illuminating.
The automobiles of the 1990s are at least 10 times cleaner and

twice as fuel efficient as the vehicles of the 1970s. These ad-
vancements were due in large part to distributed microprocessor-
W
based control systems. Furthermore the resultant vehicles are
safer, more comfortable and more maneuverable.
Cruise and Traction Control

Most new cars are provided with a system for cruise control that keeps the
speed constant. This is a common control system that practically everyone
comes in contact with. More advanced systems, called adaptive cruise
control, are now appearing. The system is called adaptive even if it is
TU
a regular servo system that keeps the distance to the car in front at
a constant value. The distance is measured by radar. In this context it
is interesting to note that in 1995 Dickmanns modified a Mercedes to
make it fully autonomous. The system had vision sensors and could make
automatic lane changes. The car has been tested with human supervision
at high speed in Germany and France.
Systems for anti-lock braking and traction control have also been intro-
duced. These systems were used in an unexpected fashion in the Mercedes
JN
34

1.9 Automotive
ld
Figure 1.19 Some of the control systems in a car.
or
W
Figure 1.20 The Mercedes A-class is a small car where control helped to solve a
serious problem.
TU
A class, see Figure 1.20. This is a small car which achieves a high degree
of safety through a thick floor that can be deformed in case of an accident.
A consequence of this is that the center of gravity is high. When the car
was introduced it was discovered that the car had a tendency to fall over
in sharp turns. This difficult problem was solved by providing the car with
the most sophisticated traction control system available in the company
at the time. Together with minor changes of tires a severe difficulty was
overcome.
JN
35

Technology Drivers
The automotive industry is an important driver for technology because of
the large number of produced parts and hard requirements for low cost.
Several interesting developments took place when computers started to be
used for computer control of engines. To save costs the microcomputer and
input-output devices that connect sensors and actuators were merged on
one chip, so called micro controllers. These devices made computer control
cost effective in many other fields. The total number of micro-controllers
for embedded systems now far exceed the number of microprocessors man-
ufactured each year. The automotive applications also required new sen-
sors and actuators. New accelerometers and gyros based on MEMS devices
were developed, electric actuators based on new magnetic materials have
also been developed. The sensors and actuators use feedback internally
ld
to obtain robustness and performance.
Autonomous Driving
There have been several attempts at developing autonomous vehicles. In
1995 Dickmanns demonstrated a fully autonomous Mercedes Benz with
vision sensors. Under human supervision the car drove autonomously
or
on the Autobahn from Munich to Copenhagen. Experiments with au-
tonomous driving have also been done in California in the Path program.
1.10 Computing
W
There has been a strong symbiosis between control and computing. Com-
puting devices are integral parts of a controller and computing and sim-
ulation are used extensively in design and validation of a control system.
Analog Computing
Early controllers, such as the centrifugal governor, were implemented
using mechanical devices. Integral action was implemented using the ball
and disc integrator invented by Lord Kelvin. In the process industries
TU
analog computing was instead done using pneumatic devices. The key
elements were pneumatic amplifiers, restrictions and volumes. Feedback
was used extensively to obtain linear behavior from the nonlinear devices.
The early development of control was severely hampered by the lack of
computing, many clever graphical methods were developed to obtain in-
sight and understanding using modest computing. The situation is sum-
marized very clearly in the following quote from Vannevar Bush from
1923.
JN
36

1.10 Computing
Engineering can proceed no faster than the mathematical

analysis on which it is based. Formal mathematics is frequently
inadequate for numerous problems pressing for solution, and
in the absence of radically new mathematics, a mechanical so-
lution offers the most promising and powerful attack wherever
a solution in graphical form is adequate for the purpose. This
is usually the case in engineering problems.
Bush later built the the first mechanical differential analyzer. The key
elements were the ball and disc integrator and the torque amplifier. It
could be used to integrate a handful of differential equations. This com-
puter was used by Ziegler and Nichols to devise tuning rules for PID
controllers.
Bushs work laid the foundation for analog computing which developed
ld
rapidly when cheap electronic amplifiers became available. This coincided
with the emergence of control and analog computing became the standard
tool for simulation of control systems. The analog computers were however
large expensive systems that required a large staff to maintain. The use
of analog computing was thus limited to persons with access to these rare
resources. Analog computing was also used to implement the controllers
or
in the servomechanism era and through the 1960s. Controllers were also
implemented as small dedicated analog computers.
Even if computer control is the dominating technology for implement-
ing controllers there are still niches where analog computing is used ex-
tensively. One area is micro-mechanical systems (MEMS) where mechan-
ics and control are integrated on the same chip. Analog computing is also
used for systems with extremely fast response time.
W
Computer Control
When digital computers became available they were first used for comput-
ing and simulation. The early computers were large and expensive and
not suitable to be embedded in controllers. The first computer controlled
systems was installed by TRW at the Port Arthur refinery in Texas in
1959. This initiated a development which started slowly and accelerated
rapidly with the advances in computing. Today practically all controllers
TU
are implemented as computer controlled systems.
Real Time Computing

Use of computers for in control systems imposes demands on the architec-
ture of systems and software, because of the requirement of fast response
to external events. It turns out that the features that were useful for
control were also useful for other purposes. There are in particular se-
vere requirements on the operating system to provide rapid response to
JN
37

external events. It is also necessary to make sure that the system oper-
ates without interruptions. Special real time operating systems therefore
emerged. When implementing control systems there is a clear need to
understand both control algorithms and software. It is also necessary to
have systems with a high degree of reliability. The luxury of restarting
the computer (CTRL+ALT+DEL) if something strange happens is not a
feasible solution for computer control.
Simulation
Simulation is an indispensable tool for the control engineer. Even if sys-
tems can be designed based on relatively simple models it is essential to
verify that the system works in a wide range of operations. This is typi-
cally done by simulating the closed loop system. To be reliable the simu-
ld
lation requires a high fidelity model of the system, sometimes parts of the
real system is actually interfaced with the simulator, so called hardware
in the loop simulation. If a controller is build using a dedicated computer
it can also be verified against the simulation. Simulation can also be used
for many other purposes, to explore different systems configurations, for
operator training and for diagnostics. Because of the advances in com-
or
puters and software simulation is now easily available at every engineers
desk top. Development of a suitable model for the process requires a major
effort.
The Internet
The Internet was designed to be an extremely robust communication net-
work. It achieves robustness by being distributed and by using feedback.
W
The key function of the system is to transmit messages from a sender to
a receiver. The system has a large number of nodes connected with links.
At each node there are routers that receives messages and sends them
out to links. The routers have buffers that can store messages. It is desir-
able to operate the system to exploit capacity by maximizing throughput
subject to the constraint that all users are treated fairly. There are large
variations in traffic and in the lengths of the messages. Routers and links
can also fail so the system may also be changing. The Internet depends
TU
critically on feedback to deal with uncertainty and variations. All control

is decentralized
The routers receive messages on the incoming lines and distributes
them to the outgoing lines. Messages are stored in a buffer if the router
can not handle the incoming traffic. In the simplest scheme a router that
has a full buffer will simply drop the incoming messages. Information
about congestion is propagated to the sender indirectly through the lost
messages.
JN
38

1.11 Mathematics
Flow control is done by the senders. When a message is received by a

receiver it sends an acknowledgment to the sender. The sender can detect
lost messages because the messages are tagged. A very simple algorithm
for traffic control was proposed by Jacobson 1990. This algorithm is called
Additive Increase Multiplicative Decrease (AIMD) works as follows. The
transmission rate is increased by additively as long as no messages are
lost. When a message is lost the transmission rate is reduced by a factor
of 2.
The Internet is a nice illustration that a very large distributed system
can be controlled effectively by reasonably simple control schemes. There
are many variations of the basic scheme described above. Many technical
details have also been omitted. One drawback with the current scheme
is that the control mechanism creates large variations in traffic which is
ld
undesirable. There are many proposals for modifications of the system.
1.11 Mathematics
There has always been a strong interplay between mathematics and con-
trol. This has undoubtedly contributed to the success of control. The the-
or
ory of governors were developed by James Clarke Maxwell in a paper
from 1868, about 100 years after James Watt had developed the governor.
Maxwell realized that stability was connected to the algebraic problem
of determining if an algebraic equation has roots in the right half plane.
Maxwell turned to the mathematician Routh to get help. An analogous
situation occurred in the development of water turbines where Stodola
turned to the mathematician Hurwitz for assistance.
W
Mathematics played a major role in the development of servomecha-
nism theory in the 1940s. There were a number of outstanding mathemati-
cians at the Radiation Laboratory at MIT, there were also outstanding
mathematicians at Bell Laboratories at the time. An interesting perspec-
tive can be obtained by comparing the major advances in the theory of
feedback amplifiers with the meager advances in process control and to
speculate what could have happened if there had been mathematicians
working on the process control problems.
TU
There was a very fruitful interaction between mathematics and control

in the 1960s in connection with the space race when optimal control was
developed. The Russian mathematician Pontryagin and his coworkers de-
veloped the maximum principle, which can be viewed as an extension of
the Euler-Lagrange theory in calculus of variations. The American math-
ematician Richard Bellman developed dynamic programming, which can
be regarded as an extension of the Hamilton-Jacobi theory in calculus of
variations. In both cases the developments were directly inspired by the
JN
39

control problems.
In the US the eminent topologist and past President of the American
Mathematical Society argued for a strong effort in applied mathematics.
With support form the Office of Naval Research he established a research
center devoted to nonlinear ordinary differential equations and dynamics
at Princeton. The center was later moved to RIAS and later to Brown
University where it became the Lefschetz Center for Dynamical Systems.
Later centers were also created at the University of Minnesota.
The Russian activity was centered in Moscow at the famous Institute
of Automatic Control and Telemechanics and in smaller institutes in St
Petersburg and Sverdlovsk. In Peking a strong center was established
under the supervision of the Academy of Sciences. A very strong center
INRIA was also created in Paris under Professor Jean Jacques Lions.
ld
A wide range of mathematics such as dynamical systems, differential
geometry and algebra has been important for the development of control
theory after 1960.
Numerical Mathematics
A standard computational problem is to solve ordinary differential equa-
or
tions by time-stepping methods. As solutions often vary significantly over
the range of integration, efficient computation requires step length con-
trol. This is done by estimating the local error and adjusting the step
length to make this error sufficiently small. Most solvers for differential
equations have carried out the correction in a simplistic fashion, and the
adjustment has often been mixed with other algorithmic elements.
Recently a drastic improvement has been made by viewing step length
W
adjustment as a feedback problem. Substantial improvements of perfor-
mance can be obtained by replacing the heuristic schemes for step length
adjustment, that were used traditionally, with a scheme based on a PID
controller. These advantages are achieved without incurring additional
computational costs. This has resulted in more reliable software, as well as
software with much better structure. Knowledge of basic control schemes
has thus proven very beneficial. It is likely that the same idea can be
applied to other numerical problems.
TU
1.12 Physics
Feedback has always had a central role in scientific instruments. An early
example is the development of the mass spectrometer. In a paper from
1935 by Nier it is observed that the deflection of the ions depend on both
the magnetic and the electric fields. Instead of keeping both fields constant
JN
40

1.12 Physics
Nier let the magnetic field fluctuate and the electric field was controlled to
keep the ratio of the fields constant. The feedback was implemented using
vacuum tube amplifiers. The scheme was crucial for the development of
mass spectroscopy.
Another example is the work by the Dutch Engineer van der Meer.
He invented a clever way to use feedback to maintain a high density
and good quality of the beam of a particle accelerator. The scheme, called
stochastic cooling, was awarded the Nobel prize in Physics in 1984. The
method was essential for the successful experiments in CERN when the
existence of the the particles W and Z was first demonstrated. Another use
of feedback called repetitive control was developed by Nakano for particle
accelerators. The key idea was to obtain very precise control by exploiting
the fact the particles move in circular orbits.
ld
The atomic force microscope is a more recent example. The key idea
is to move a narrow tip on a cantilever beam across the surface and to
register the forces on the tip. Such systems rely on feedback systems for
precise motion and precise measurement of the forces.
Adaptive Optics
A severe problem in astronomy is that turbulence in the atmosphere blurs
or
images in telescopes because of variations in diffraction of light in the at-
mosphere. The blur is of the order of an arc-second in a good telescope.
One way to eliminate the blur is to move the telescope outside the Earths
atmosphere as is done with the Hubble telescope. Another way is to use
feedback to eliminate the effects of the variations in a telescope on the
Earth. This is the idea of adaptive optics. A schematic picture of a sys-
tem for adaptive optics is shown in Figure 1.21. The reference signal is
W
a bright star or an artificial laser beam projected into the atmosphere.
The actuator which is shown simply as a box in the figure is obtained
by reflecting the light on a mirror that can be deformed selectively. The
mirror can have from 13 to 1000 elements. The error signal is formed by
analyzing the shape of the distorted wave form from the reference. This
signal is sent to the controller which adjusts the deformable mirror. The
light from the observed star is compensated because it is also reflected in
the deformable mirror before it is sent to the detector. The wave lengths
TU
used for observation and control are often different. Since diffraction in
the atmosphere changes quite rapidly the response time of the control
system must be of the order of milliseconds.
In normal feedback terminology adaptive optics is a regular feedback
system, feedback is used to compensate for variations in diffraction in
the atmosphere. The word adaptive is used in because it can also be said
that the system adapts for variations in the atmosphere. In the control
community the word adaptive is often used with a different meaning.
JN
41

ld
Figure 1.21 Schematic diagram of a system for adaptive optics.
Quantum Systems
Control of quantum systems is currently receiving a lot of interest. Molec-
ular dynamics is a very spectacular application. The idea is to use modu-
or
lated laser light to break up bonds in molecules to obtain ions which can
react with other ions to form new molecules. This is done by tailoring the
laser pulses so that they will break specific bonds between atoms. This is
precision surgery at the molecular level, quite different from the methods
used in conventional chemistry.
W
1.13 Biology
It was mentioned already in Section 1.1 that feedback is an essential
mechanism in biology. Here are a few examples.
The Pupillary Reflex

The human eye has an effective system to control the amount of light that
is let into the eye. The light intensity is measured and the pupil opening
TU
is adjusted. This control systems is easily accessible for experimentation.

Extensive investigations have been made by changing the light intensity
and measuring the pupil opening. The results show that it is a very ef-
fective feedback system.
Human Posture
The human body hasmany feedback systems. They allow us to stand up-
right, to walk, jump and balance on ropes. They also adjust the sensitivity
JN
42

1.13 Biology
of our eyes and ears, enabling us to see and hear over a wide range of
intensity levels. They maintain a constant body temperature and a del-
icate balance of chemical substances in our body. As an illustration we
will discuss the system that allows us to stand upright. The key features
of the system are known although several details are poorly understood.
The primary sensors are the semicircular canals located in the mastoid
bone close to the ear. The sensors consist of toroidal canals that are filled
with liquid. Neurons connected to hairs in the canals give signals related
to the motion of the head. The major actuators are muscles in feet, legs,
knees, hips and arms. There are also sensory neurons in the feet and the
muscles. There is local feedback from pressure sensors in the feet and
sensors in the muscles to the actuating muscles. This loop has a reaction
time of about 20 ms. The interconnection between sensors and actuators
ld
is made in the spinal cord. These interconnections are responsible for fast
feedback like reflexes. The reaction time is of the order of 100 ms. There is
also a high level feedback loop that receives information from the vestibu-
lar system, which gives information about the position and orientation of
our body parts in space. The sensory information is processed in the cere-
bellum and transmitted to the muscle neurons in the spinal cord. This
feedback has a reaction time of about 250 ms.
or
This system for control of posture illustrates that feedback can be used
to stabilize an unstable system. It also shows that there are very reliable
biological feedback systems which are essential to everyday life. A par-
ticularly interesting feature is that the system has learning capabilities.
Think about a child learning to stand up and walk or learning to bicycle.
These functions are far superior to those of any technical system.
W
A Simple Experiment
A simple experiment on one of the systems in the body can be executed
manually with very modest equipment. Take a book with text and hold it
in front of you. Move the text sideways back and forth and increase the
speed of motion until the text is blurred. Next hold the text in front of you
and move the head instead. Notice the difference in the speeds when the
text gets blurred. You will observe that higher speeds are possible when
you move your head. The reason for this is that when you move the text,
TU
the information about the motion comes via the processing of the image
at your retina, but when you move your head the information comes from
the semicircular canals. The feedback from the visual processing is much
slower because it uses higher functions in the brain.
There are many other nice control systems in the human body. Top
performing athletes such as tennis players have interesting abilities for
very advanced motion control that involves much interaction with vision.
Humans also have interesting learning abilities.
JN
43

1.14 Summary
This chapter has given glimpses of how control and feedback have influ-
enced the development of technology and how control is used. The ex-
amples show that control has emerged concurrently with new technology,
that it has had a major influence on technology and that it sometimes has
been an enabler. A large number of control systems ranging from small
micro devices to large global systems for generation and distribution of
electricity and large communication systems have also been given. The
wide range of uses of control also point to some difficulties. The ideas of
control and feedback are abstract which makes them less obvious. It is
therefore common that the ideas are neglected in favor of hardware which
is much easier to talk about.
ld
or
W
TU
JN
44

2
Feedback
ld
2.1 Introduction
Feedback is a powerful idea, which is used extensively in natural and
technical systems. The principle of feedback is very simple: base correct-
ing actions on the difference between desired and actual performance.
or
In engineering feedback has been rediscovered and patented many times
in many different contexts. Use of feedback has often resulted in vast
improvements in system capability, sometimes they have even be revolu-
tionary as discussed in Chapter 1. The reason for this is that feedback
has some truly remarkable properties. In this chapter we will discuss
some of the properties of feedback that can be understood intuitively. The
benefits of feedback can often be obtained using simple forms of feedback
such as on-off control and PID control, which are discussed in Section 2.2.
W
Particular attention is given to integral action which is has truly remark-
able properties. Feedback systems may appear complicated because they
involve many different subsystems and many different technologies. To
reduce the complexity it is necessary to have abstractions that makes it
possible to have an overview of the systems. Section 2.3 presents differ-
ent ways to describe feedback systems. The block diagram is the most
important representation because it is a uniform description that can be
adapted to many different purposes. The remarkable properties of feed-
TU
back are presented in Section 2.4. It is shown that feedback can reduce the
effects of disturbances and process variations, it can create well defined
relations between variables, it makes it possible to modify the properties
of a system, e.g. stabilize a unstable system. The discussion is based on
block diagrams and simple static mathematical models. The major draw-
back is that feedback can create instability. This is discussed briefly in
Section 2.5. To understand stability it is necessary to have knowledge of
JN
45

Chapter 2. Feedback
A u B u C u
e e e
Figure 2.1 Controller characteristics for ideal on-off control (A), and modifications
with dead zone (B) and hysteresis (C).
dynamical systems which is the topic of Chapter 3. Feedback systems

are also called closed loop systems. Section 2.6 compares closed loop sys-
ld
tems with their opposite, open loop systems. Feedback is reactive because
actions are based on deviations. Feedforward, which is proactive, is the
opposite of feedback. Since feedback and feedforward have complementary
properties they are often combined.
or
2.2 Simple Forms of Feedback
Some properties of feedback were illustrated in Chapter 1. Many of the

nice properties of feedback can be obtained with simple controllers. In
this section we will discuss some simple forms of feedback namely, on-off
control, proportional control and PID control.
On-Off Control
W
The feedback can be arranged in many different ways. A simple feedback
mechanism can be described as follows:
(
umax , if e > 0
u= (2.1)
umin , if e < 0
where e = r y is the control error which is the difference between the

reference signal and the output of the system. Figure 2.1 shows the rela-
TU
tion between error and control. This control law implies that maximum
corrective action is always used. This type of feedback is called on-off con-
trol. It is simple and there are no parameters to choose. On-off control
often succeeds in keeping the process variable close to the reference, but
it will typically result in a system where the variables oscillate. Notice
that in (2.1) the control variable is not defined when the error is zero. It
is common to have some modifications either by introducing hysteresis or
a dead zone (see Figure 2.1).
JN
46

2.2 Simple Forms of Feedback
PID Control
The reason why on-off control often gives rise to oscillations is that the
system over reacts since a small change in the error will make the ma-
nipulated variable change over the full range. This effect is avoided in
proportional control where the characteristic of the controller is propor-
tional to the control error for small errors. This can be achieved by making
the control signal proportional to the error
u = k(r y) = ke (2.2)
where k is the controller gain.
Integral Action Proportional control has has the drawback that the
ld
process variable often deviates from its reference value. This can be avoided
by making the control action proportional to the integral of the error
Zt
u(t) = ki e( )d (2.3)
0
or
where ki is the integral gain. This control form is called integral control. It
follows from this equation that if there is a steady state where the control
signal and the error are constant, i.e. u(t) = u0 and e(t) = e0 respectively
then
u0 = ki e0 t
This equation is a contradiction unless e0 = 0. It has thus demonstrated
W
that there will be no steady state error with a controller that has integral
action. Notice that the argument also holds for any process and any con-
troller that has integral action. The catch is that there may not always be
a steady state because the system may be oscillating. This amazing prop-
erty which we call the Magic of Integral Control has been rediscovered
many times. It is one of the properties that have strongly contributed to
the wide applicability of PID control.
TU
Derivative Action An additional refinement is to provide the controller

with an anticipative ability by using a prediction of the error. A simple
prediction is given by the linear extrapolation
de(t)
e(t + Td ) e(t) + Td ,
dt
which predicts the error Td time units ahead, see Figure 2.2. Combining
JN
47

Chapter 2. Feedback
ld
Figure 2.2 A PID controller takes control action based on past, present and future
control errors.
proportional, integral and derivative control we obtain a controller that

can be expressed mathematically as follows:
or
Zt
de(t)
u(t) = ke(t) + ki e( )d + kd
dt
0
(2.4)
Zt
1 de(t)
= k e(t) + e( )d + Td
Ti dt
0
W
The control action is thus a sum of three terms representing the past by
the integral of the error (the I-term ), the present (the P-term ) and the
future by a linear extrapolation of the error ( the D-term ). The term
e + Td de/ dt is a linear prediction of the error Td time units in the future.
Notice that the controller can be parameterized in different ways. The
second parameterization is commonly used in industry. The parameters
of the controller are called: are proportional gain k, integral time Ti , and
TU
derivative time Td .
The PID controller is very useful. It is capabable of solving a wide
range of control problems. The PI controller is the most common con-
troller. It is quoted that about 90% of all control problems can be solved by
PID control, many of these controllers are actually PI controller because
derivative action is not so common. There are more advanced controllers
which differ from the PID controller by using more sophisticated methods
for prediction.
JN
48

2.3 Representation of Feedback Systems

Feedback systems are often large and complex. It is therefore a major
challenge to understand, analyze and design them. This is illustrated by
the fact that the idea of feedback was developed independently in many
different application areas. It took a long time before it was found that the
systems were based on the same idea. The similarities became apparent
when proper abstractions were made. In this section we will develop some
ideas that are used to describe feedback systems. The descriptions we are
looking for should capture the essential features of the systems and hide
unnecessary details. They should be applicable to many different systems.
Schematic Diagrams
ld
In all branches of engineering, it is common practice to use some graphical
description of systems. They can range from stylistic pictures to drasti-
cally simplified standard symbols. These pictures make it possible to get
an overall view of the system and to identify the physical components.
Examples of such diagrams are shown in Figure 2.3
Block Diagrams
or
The schematic diagrams are useful because they give an overall picture of
a system. They show the different physical processes and their intercon-
nection, and they indicate variables that can be manipulated and signals
that can be measured.
A special graphical representation called block diagrams has been de-
veloped in control engineering. The purpose of block diagrams is to empha-
size the information flow and to hide technological details of the system.
W
It is natural to look for such representations in control because of its mul-
tidisciplinary nature. In a block diagram, different process elements are
shown as boxes. Each box has inputs denoted by lines with arrows point-
ing toward the box and outputs denoted by lines with arrows going out of
the box. The inputs denote the variables that influence a process and the
outputs denote some consequences of the inputs that are relevant to the
feedback system.
Figure 2.4 illustrates how the principle of information hiding is used
TU
to derive an abstract representation of a system. The upper part of the

picture shows a photo of a physical system which a small desk-top process
in a control laboratory. It consists of two tanks, a pump that pumps wa-
ter to the tanks, sensors, and a computer which implements the control
algorithm and provides the user interface. The purpose of the system is
to maintain a specified level in the lower tank. To do so, it is necessary
to measure the level. The level can be influenced by changing the speed
of the motor that pumps water into the upper tank. The voltage to the
JN
49

Chapter 2. Feedback
ld
or
Figure 2.3 Examples of schematic descriptions: a schematic picture of an inertial
navigation system (upper left), a neuron network for respiratory control (upper
right), a process and instrumentation diagram (lower left) and a power system
(lower right).
amplifier that drives the pump is selected as the control variable. The
W
controller receives information about the desired level in the tank and
the actual tank level. This is accomplished using an AD converter to con-
vert the analog signal to a number in the computer. The control algorithm
in the computer then computes a numerical value of the control variable.
This is converted to a voltage using a DA converter. The DA converter is
connected to an amplifier for the motor that drives the pump.
The first step in making a block diagram is to identify the impor-
tant signals: the control variable, the measured signals, disturbances and
TU
goals. Information hiding is illustrated in the figure by covering systems

by a cloth as shown in the lower part of Figure 2.4. The block diagram is
simply a stylized picture of the systems hidden by the cloth.
In Figure 2.4, we have chosen to represent the system by two blocks
only. This granularity is often sufficient. It is easy to show more details
simply by introducing more subsystems, as indicated in Figure 2.5 where
we show the drive amplifier, motor, pump, and tanks, the sensors with
electronics, the AD converter, the computer and the DA converter. The
JN
50

ld
or
Figure 2.4 Illustrates the process of information hiding used to obtain a block
diagram. The top figure is a picture of the physical system, the middle figure is
obtained by hiding many details about the system and the bottom figure is the
W
block diagram.
C A Pump Tanks Sensor
Figure 2.5 A more detailed block diagram of the system in Figure 2.4 showing
controller C, amplifier A, pump, tanks and sensor.
TU
detail chosen depends on the aspects of the system we are interested

in and the taste of the person doing the investigation. Remember that
parsimony is a trademark of good engineering. Very powerful tools for
design, analysis and simulation were developed when the block diagrams
were complemented with descriptions of the blocks in terms of transfer
functions.
JN
51

Chapter 2. Feedback
A B
C D
Figure 2.6 A simple hydraulic system with an inflow and a free outflow is shown
ld
in A. The block diagram representation of the system is shown in B. The system
obtained by connecting two hydraulic systems is shown in C. This system cannot be
represented by the series connection of the block diagrams in B.
Causality
or
The arrows in a block diagram indicate causality because the output of
a block is caused by the input. To use the block diagram representation,
it is therefore necessary that a system can be partitioned into subsys-
tems with causal dependence. Great care must be exercised when using
block diagrams for detailed physical modeling as is illustrated in Fig-
ure 2.6. The tank system in Figure 2.6B is a cascade combination of the
two tanks shown in Figure 2.6B. It cannot be represented by cascading
the block diagram representations because the level in the second tank
W
influences the flow between the tanks and thus also the level in the first
tank. When using block diagrams it is therefore necessary to choose blocks
to represent units which can be represented by causal interactions. We
can thus conclude that even if block diagrams are useful for control they
also have serious limitation. In particular they are not useful for serious
physical modeling which has to be dealt with by other tools which permit
bidirectional connections.
TU
Examples
An important consequence of using block diagrams is that they clearly
show that control systems from widely different domains have common
features because their block diagrams are identical. This observation was
one of the key factors that contributed to the emergence of the discipline
of automatic control in the 1940s. We will illustrate this by showing the
block diagrams of some of the systems discussed in Chapter 1.
JN
52

Centrifugal governor
Desired Valve Angular

velocity position velocity
Controller Steam
engine
Figure 2.7 Block diagram of a steam engine with a centrifugal governor.
EXAMPLE 2.1A STEAM ENGINE WITH A CENTRIFUGAL GOVERNOR
ld
The steam engine with the centrifugal governor in Example 2.1 can be
represented with the block diagram shown in Figure 2.7. In this block
diagram we have chosen to represent the steam engine with one block.
This block has two inputs: the position of the steam valve and the load
torque of the systems that the engine is driving. The system has one
output which is engine speed. The controller is a box with two inputs:
or
the engine speed and desired engine speed. The output of the controller
is the steam valve position. There is some two-way interaction between
the controller and the valve position but with appropriate gearing and
heavy balls in the governor it may be assumed that the force exerted by
the valve on the governor is negligible.
EXAMPLE 2.2AN AIRCRAFT STABILIZER

W
To develop a block diagram for an airplane with the Sperry stabilizer, we
first introduce suitable variables and describe the system briefly. The pitch
angle that describes how the airplane is pointing is an important variable
and is measured by the gyro-stabilized pendulum. The pitch angle is influ-
enced by changing the rudder. We choose to represent the airplane by one
box whose input is the rudder angle and whose output is the pitch angle.
There is another input representing the forces on the airplane from wind
gusts. The stabilizer attempts to keep the pitch angle small by appro-
TU
priate changes in the rudder. This is accomplished by wires that connect

the rudder to the gyro-stabilized pendulum. There is also a mechanism
enabling the pilot to choose a desired value of the pitch angle if he wants
the airplane to ascend or descend. In the block diagram we represent the
controller with one block where the difference between desired and actual
pitch angles is the input and the rudder angle is the output. Figure 2.8
shows the block diagram obtained.
JN
53

Chapter 2. Feedback
Autopilot
Aileron Pitch angle

Desired Controller Aircraft
pitch angle
Figure 2.8 Block diagram of an airplane with the Sperry autopilot.
R2
ld
R1
I

V
+
V1 V2
or
Figure 2.9 A feedback amplifier.
Even if block diagrams are simple, it is not always entirely trivial to obtain
them. It happens frequently that individual physical components to not
necessarily correspond to specific blocks and that it may be necessary to
use mathematics to obtain the block. We illustrate this by an example.
W
EXAMPLE 2.3A FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER
An electronic amplifier with negative feedback was discussed in Sec-
tion 1.8. A schematic diagram of the amplifier is shown in Figure 2.9.
To develop a block diagram we first decide to represent the pure amplifier
as one block. This has input V and output V2 . The input-output relation
is
TU
V2 = GV
where G is the gain of the amplifier and the negative sign indicates neg-
ative feedback. If the current I into the amplifier is negligible the current
through resistors R1 and R2 are the same and we get
V1 V V V2
=
R1 R2
JN
54

V1 e V V2
R1
R 1 + R2 G
R1
R2
V1 e
R1
V V2
R 1 + R2 G
RR12
V1 V V2
R1
R1
R2
R 1 + R2 G
ld
1
Figure 2.10 Three block diagrams of the feedback amplifier in Figure 2.9.
or
Solving this equation for the input voltage V to the amplifier we get
R2 V1 + R1 V2 R2 R1
V = = V1 + V2
R1 + R2 R1 + R2 R2
This equation can be represented by one block with gain R2 /( R1 + R2 )
and the input V1 + R1 V2 / R1 and we obtain the block diagram shown in
W
Figure 2.10. The lower representation where the process has positive gain
and the feedback gain is negative has become the standard of represent-
ing feedback systems. Notice that the individual resistors do not appear
as individual blocks, they actually appear in various combinations in dif-
ferent blocks. This is one of the difficulties in drawing block diagrams.
Also notice that the diagrams can be drawn in many different ways. The
middle diagram in Figure 2.10 is obtained by viewing V2 as the output
of the amplifier. This is the standard convention where the process gain
is positive and the feedback gain is negative. The lowest diagram in Fig-
TU
ure 2.10 is yet another version, where the ratio R1 / R2 is brought outside
the loop. In all three diagrams the gain around the loop is R2 G /( R1 + R2 ),
this is one of the invariants of a feedback system.
A Generic Control System with Error Feedback

Although the centrifugal governor, the autopilot and the feedback ampli-
fier in Examples 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 represent very different physical sys-
JN
55

Chapter 2. Feedback
d n
r e u v x y
C P
Controller Process
Figure 2.11 Generic control system with error feedback.
ld
tems, their block diagrams are identical apart from the labeling of blocks
and signals, compare Figures 2.7, 2.8 and 2.10. This illustrates the uni-
versality of control. A generic representation of the systems is shown in
Figure 2.11. The system has two blocks. One block P represents the pro-
or
cess and the other C represents the controller. Notice negative sign of the
feedback. The signal r is the reference signal which represents the desired
behavior of the process variable x.
Disturbances are an important aspect of control systems. In fact if
there were no disturbances there is no reason to use feedback. In Fig-
ure 2.11 there are two types of disturbances, labeled d and n. The distur-
bance labeled d is called a load disturbance and the disturbance labeled
W
n is called measurement noise. Load disturbances drive the system away
from its desired behavior. In Figure 2.11 it is assumed that there is only
one disturbance that enters at the system input. This is called an input
disturbance. In practice there may be many different disturbances that
enter the system in many different ways. Measurement noise corrupts the
information about the process variable obtained from the measurements.
In Figure 2.11 it is assumed that the measured signal y is the sum of the
process variable x and measurement noise. In practice the measurement
TU
noise may appear in many other ways.

The system in Figure 2.11 is said to have error feedback, because the
control actions are based on the error which is the difference between
the reference r and the output y. In some cases like a CD player there
is no explicit information about the reference signal because the only
information available is the error signal. In such case the system shown
in Figure 2.11 is the only possibility but if the reference signal is available
there are other alternatives that may give better performance.
JN
56

d n
r s e u v x y
F C P
1
Controller Process
Figure 2.12 Block diagram of a generic feedback system with two degrees of
freedom.
ld
A Generic Control Loop Two Degrees of Freedom
In Figure 2.11 the control actions are based on the error e. When both the
reference signal r and the measured output y are available it is possible
to obtain improved control. Such a system is shown in Figure 2.12. This
system is similar to the one in Figure 2.11 but the controller now has
two blocks, the feedback C and the feedforward block F. This means
that the signal path from y to u is different from that from r to u. Such
or
controllers are said to have two degrees of freedom. The extra freedom
gives substantial advantages.
A Qualitative Understanding of Feedback Systems - Cherchez lerreur

The block diagram is very useful to get an overview of a system. It allows
you to see the wood in spite of the trees. A simple way to understand how
W
a system works is to assume that the feedback works so well that the
error is zero. We illustrate this with a few examples.
EXAMPLE 2.4THE GENERIC CONTROL SYSTEM

Consider the system in Figure 2.12. If the error is zero we find that the
output y is equal to the signal s, which is the output of the block F.
TU
EXAMPLE 2.5THE FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER

Consider the block diagram of the feedback amplifier in the top of Fig-
ure 2.10. If the system works well the error is close to zero which means
that
R1
V2 =
R2
JN
57

Chapter 2. Feedback
r e R y

y2
Figure 2.13 Block diagram of a nonlinear system.
EXAMPLE 2.6A NONLINEAR SYSTEM

Consider a nonlinear system with the block diagram shown in Figure 2.13.
Assume that r is positive
and the error is zero, it follows that r = y2 , which
implies that y = r. The output is thus the positive square root of the
ld
input. Notice, that since the feedback loop contains an integrator the error
will always be zero if a steady state exists.
This example illustrates the fact that if a component for generating a func-
tion is available, it is easy to generate the inverse function by an amplifier
with feedback. This idea has been much applied in analog computing and
in instrumentation.
2.4 Properties of Feedback
or
To understand the behavior of a feedback system it is necessary to de-
scribe the behavior of the process and the controller. A full understanding
requires a description of the dynamic properties of the process and the
W
controller. Some properties can however be understood by describing the
behaviors by static models. This will be developed in this Section.
Mathematical Models
A block diagram gives an overview of a system but more details are re-
quired to obtain a more complete description of a system. In particular it is
necessary to describe the behavior of each individual block. This requires
mathematical models. A function
TU
y = f (u)
is a simple way to characterized the relation between input and output in

a block. This is called a static model because a change in the input gives
an instantaneous change of the output. The function can be represented
by a graph as in Figure 2.14. For small perturbations around a given
operating point, the curve can be approximated by its tangent. The slope
JN
58

10
5
y
0
5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
u
Figure 2.14 Static input-output function for a system and the linear approxima-
tion around the operating point u0 = 3.5. The slope of the curve at the operating
point is the gain of the system.
ld
of the tangent is called the gain of the system at the operating point.
Assume that the control variable at the operating point has the value u0 .
The corresponding value of the output is then y0 = f (u0 ). For values of the
control variable close to the operating point the system can approximately
be described by the model
or
y y0 = f (u) f (u0 ) f P (u0 )(u u0 )
where f P denotes the derivative of f . The approximation which is obtained

by making a Taylor series expansion of the function and neglecting higher
order terms is called linearization. The constant K = f u (u0 ) is called
the gain of the system at the operating point. To simplify notation it is
W
customary to choose the variables so that they are zero at the operating
point of interest. The system can then be described by
y = Ku
which we call a linear static model. Static models of control systems have
severe limitations, because many of the properties of feedback systems
rely on dynamic effects. A major part of this book will be devoted to this
beginning with next chapter which deals with dynamics. Control is thus
TU
intimately connected with dynamics.
Static Analysis
We will start by a very simplistic analysis of a system with error feedback.
Consider the system in Figure 2.11. Assume that the variables r, d and n
are constants and that the process and the controller can be described by
linear static models. Let kp be the process gain and kc the controller gain.
JN
59

Chapter 2. Feedback
The following equations are obtained for the process and the controller.
y=x+n
x = kp (u + d) (2.5)
u = kc (r y)
Solving these equations for y and u gives

kp kc kp kp kc
x= r+ d n
1 + kp kc 1 + kp kc 1 + kp kc
kp kc kp 1
y= r+ d+ n (2.6)
kc kp kc kc
u= r d n
ld
The product L = kp kc is called the loop gain. It is the total gain around the
feedback loop. It is an important system property which is dimension-free.
Several interesting conclusions can be drawn from (2.6). First we ob-
serve that since the equation is linear we can discuss the effects of refer-
ence values r, load disturbances d and measurement noise n separately.
or
It follows from (2.6) that the output will be very close to the reference
value if the loop gain L = kp kc is large. It also follows from (2.6) that the
effect of the load disturbances will be small if the controller gain is large.
We will now take a closer look at some of the responses.
Assuming that r = 0 and n = 0 we find that the process variable is
given by
kp
x= d
W
1 + kp kc
The influence of the load disturbance on the output can be reduced sig-
nificantly by having a controller with high gain.
If the disturbances are zero, i.e. d = n = 0 the response to reference
signals is given by
kp kc
x= r (2.7)
1 + kp kc
By having a controller with high gain the process variable will be very
TU
close to the reference value. For example if kp kc = 100 the deviation

between x and r is less than 1%
The properties of the process are seldom constant. To investigate the
effects of process variations we differentiate (2.7) with respect to the pro-
cess gain kp . This gives
dx kc kc 1 x 1
= r= r=
dkp (1 + kp kc )2 1 + kp kc 1 + kp kc kp 1 + kp kc
JN
60

r e u y
C P
1

k
Figure 2.15 This feedback system has the input output relation y = kr even if
the process P is highly nonlinear.
Hence
d log x dx/ x 1
= = (2.8)
d log kp dkp / kp 1 + kp kc
ld
The relative variation in the process variable caused by process variations
will thus be very small if the loop gain is high. For example if the loop
gain is kp kc = 100 it follows from (2.8) that a 10% variation in the process
gives only a variation of 0.1% in the relation between the process variable
and the reference. This was the idea used by Black when he invented the
feedback amplifier, (2.8) was actually part of Blacks patent application.
or
The simple analysis above captures several properties of feedback. The
analysis can however be misleading because it does not consider the dy-
namics of the process and the controller. The most serious drawback is
that most systems will become unstable when the loop gain is large. An-
other factor is that the trade-off between reduction of load disturbances
and injection of measurement noise is not represented well. In practice
the load disturbances are often dominated by components having low fre-
W
quencies while measurement noise often has high frequencies.
Using Feedback to Obtain Linear Behavior

Another nice feature of feedback is that it can be used to obtain precise
linear relations between the reference and the output even if the process is
nonlinear and time-variable. Consider the system in Figure 2.15. Assume
that the process P is modeled as a nonlinear static system
y = f (u)
TU
Let the controller C be a proportional controller with gain k, i.e.
u = k(r y)
Eliminating u between these equations we find that the closed loop system
is then described by
1
y + f 1 ( y) = r
k
JN
61

Chapter 2. Feedback
0.8
0.6
y
0.4
0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
u, r
Figure 2.16 Input output relations for the process y = u5 (solid lines) and for the
feedback system in Figure 2.15 (dashed lines) when the controller gain k is 100.
ld
xr vr Ir I v x
Cp Cv CI
or
Controller Motor
Figure 2.17 An hierarchical control system for a motor drive.
where f 1 is the inverse of the function f . If the controller gain k is

W
large we have y r, i.e. a linear relation. This is illustrated in Fig-
ure 2.16 which shows that strongly nonlinear relations can be made linear
by feedback. Because of (2.8) the linear relation is also very insensitive
to variations in the nonlinearity.
The scheme in Figure 2.15 is routinely used in many practical control
systems. This is also very useful in order to structure complex systems.
We illustrate the idea with a few examples.
TU
EXAMPLE 2.7ELECTRICAL MOTOR DRIVES

An electrical motor drive consists of a motor with a drive amplifier and
possible also gear boxes. The primary control signal is the input voltage
to the drive amplifier and the primary output is the motor angle. It is cus-
tomary to have a control system with the hierarchical structure indicated
in Figure 2.17. The controller thus consist of three cascaded controllers.
The inner loop is a current controller CI , based on measurement of the
current through the rotor. Since the drive torque of the motor is propor-
JN
62

tional to current the inner loop is essentially controlling motor torque.

The next loop with the controller Cv controls the motor velocity by adjust-
ing the reference value Ir to the current controller. The velocity signal
is either created by differentiating the angle measurements or it is ob-
tained from a special sensor. The outermost loop controls the position by
adjusting the reference value of the velocity loop. In a configuration like
the one in Figure 2.17 the innermost loop is typically the fastest and the
outermost loop is the slowest.
EXAMPLE 2.8PROCESS CONTROL

A large industrial process such as a refinery or a paper mill has thousands
of control loops. Most variables are primarily influenced by valves, which
ld
have nonlinear characteristics. The model of the system can be simplified
by using local feedback, because it can be assumed that the flows can
be regarded as the inputs to the system. It is then sufficient to find the
relations between flows and the interesting physical quantities.
We have shown how feedback can be used to obtain linear behavior. By

a small modification of the scheme in Figure 2.15 it is also possible to
or
use feedback to obtain well defined nonlinear relations. It can also be
used to obtain well defined dynamic relations. We illustrate this by a few
examples.
EXAMPLE 2.9FLIGHT CONTROL

An airplane is primarily influence by changing rudders and engine speed.
The relation between these actuators and the motion of the airplane is
W
quite complicated and it also changes with flight conditions such as speed
and height. Consider for example the rolling motion of the airplane. By
providing the aircraft with sensors and feedback it is possible to make the
relation between the sideways stick motion and the roll angle look like an
integrator which is easy to control manually. The output remains constant
if the input is zero and the rate of change of the output is proportional to
the input.
TU
EXAMPLE 2.10A TRAINER FOR SHIPS STEERING

Large ships like tankers are difficult to maneuver. It is possible to have a
small boat and use feedback to make it behave like a large tanker. This
is very convenient for training situations because if the helmsman does
mistakes it is easy to switch off the control system thus giving a small
boat that can easily be maneuvered to recover to a safe situation.
JN
63

Chapter 2. Feedback
EXAMPLE 2.11COMPLIANCE CONTROL

Consider a tool for grinding that is mounted on an industrial robot. The
robot can apply a force in an arbitrary direction, if the robot is also pro-
vided with force sensors it is possible to arrange a feedback so that the
force is a function of the position of the tool and the its orientation. In
this way it is possible to constrain the tool to be orthogonal to a specified
surface. When forcing the tool away from the surface it will exert a force
that drives it to the surface.
EXAMPLE 2.12HAPTICS
There are special types of joy sticks which are provided with motors so
that the joy stick can generate forces that give additional information to
ld
the user. With these joy sticks it is possible to use feedback to generate
forces when the cursor approaches given regions. In this way it is possible
to simulate things like pushing on soft objects.
The possibility of using feedback to modify the behavior of systems is an
idea that has very wide applicability.
2.5 Stability
or
Static analysis of feedback systems is based on the assumption that a con-
trol action is immediately manifested by a change in system output. This
is a strong simplification because systems are typically dynamic which
means that changes in the input do not immediately give rise to changes
W
in the output. A major effort of control theory is actually devoted to finding
appropriate ways to describe dynamical phenomena.
One consequence of the systems being dynamic is that feedback may
give rise to oscillations. The risk for instability is the major drawback of
using feedback. The static analysis resulting in (2.6) has indicated that
it is advantageous to have controllers with high gain. It is a common
practical experience that feedback systems will oscillate if the feedback
gain is too high. After a perturbation the control error typically has one
TU
of the following behaviors:
S1: The error may decrease monotonously
U1: The error may grow monotonously
S2: The error may be oscillatory with decaying amplitude
U2: The error may be oscillatory with increasing amplitude

JN
64

2.5 Stability
Stable Unstable
1 1
0.5 0.5
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50
Stable Unstable
1 1
0 0
ld
1 1
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50
Figure 2.18 Illustration of different system behaviors used to define stability.
or
This is illustrated in Figure 2.18, the behaviors S1 and S2 are called stable
the ones labeled U1 and U2 are unstable. There are also intermediate
situations where the error remains constant or oscillates with constant
amplitude.
In a paper from 1868 Maxwell made the important observation that
stability was related to properties of the roots of an algebraic equation. In
W
particular he established the following relations between the behaviors in
Figure 2.18 and the properties of the roots.
U1: Corresponds to real roots with positive real part
S1: Corresponds to real roots with negative real part

TU
U2: Corresponds to complex roots with positive real part
S2: Corresponds to complex roots with negative real part
Stability analysis of a feedback system can thus be done simply by in-

vestigating if the roots of an algebraic equation have negative real parts.
This will be discussed in detail in Chapter 3.
JN
65

Chapter 2. Feedback
vr u v
Contr Engine Car
vr u v
Contr Engine Car

ld
Figure 2.19 Open and closed loop systems for cruise control. The disturbance is
the slope of the road.
2.6 Open and Closed Loop Systems
or
Using block diagrams a feedback system can be defined as a system where
there is a loop in the block diagram. For that reason feedback systems are
also called closed loop systems. The opposite of feedback systems are open
loop systems, which have block diagrams which simply are a sequence of
connected blocks.
Open loop systems are easy to understand because we can explain
W
them by causal reasoning. Consider two blocks connected in series. The
blocks can be investigated one at a time. The output of one block will
be the input to the other and we can use cause and effect reasoning.
This becomes complicated when the blocks are connected in a feedback
loop because the interactions between the blocks. To understand feedback
systems it is therefore necessary to use abstractions and mathematical
reasoning. Open and closed loop systems have very different properties
as is illustrated by the following example.
TU
EXAMPLE 2.13CRUISE CONTROL

Consider a system for cruise control. The system to be controlled is a car.
The major disturbance is the slope of the road. The input to the system
is the fuel flow into the engine. Block diagrams an open and closed loop
systems is shown in Figure 2.19. The reference signal is fed to the con-
troller which influences the fuel flow. To analyze the differences between
the open and closed loop systems we will use simple static models. The
JN
66

2.6 Open and Closed Loop Systems
car can be described by

v = kp (u d) (2.9)
where v is the velocity, u is the force generated by the car engine and d
is the gravity force due to the slope of the road. The parameter kp is a
constant that relates the velocity to the total force acting on the car. With
open loop control we have the following relation between the force of the
car and the reference signal.
u = kc vr
where kc is the controller gain and vr is the desired velocity. Eliminating

u between the equations and introducing the velocity error we find
ld
e = vr v = (1 kp kc )vr + kp d (2.10)
The error is equal to zero if the slope is zero and if kc = 1/ kp.

For closed loop system with error feedback the controller can be
described by
u = kc (vr v)
equation for the velocity error
e = vr v =
kp kc
1 + kp kc
vr +
or
Combining this with the process model given by (2.9) gives the following
1
1 + kp kc
d (2.11)
W
Some interesting conclusions can be made by comparing Equations (2.10)
and (2.11). First consider the situation when there are no disturbances,
d = 0. With open loop control, (2.10), the velocity error can be made small
by matching the controller gain to be the inverse of the process gain. With
feedback control, (2.11), the velocity error will be small if the controller
gain is large, no matching is required.
Next we will investigate the effect of disturbances. For the open loop
system the effect of a disturbance on the velocity is proportional to the
process gain kp , but for the closed loop system the effect is proportional to
TU
kp /(1 + kp kc ). We thus find that with closed loop control the disturbances
are reduced by the factor
1
1 + kp kc
compared with open loop control. Notice that this factor is the same as
the factor encountered in (2.6).
JN
67

Chapter 2. Feedback
d
F
u y
P1 P2
Figure 2.20 Illustration of the concept of feedforward.
d
F
ld
r u y
C P1 P2
surable disturbance.
2.7 Feedforward
or
Figure 2.21 Control system that combines feedback and feedforward from a mea-
W
Despite all the nice properties of feedback, it also has some limitations.
When using feedback, an error must occur before the control system will
act. This means that there must be an error before corrective actions are
taken. Feedback is thus reactive. In some circumstances it is possible to
measure a disturbance before it enters the system. It then appears natu-
ral to use the information about the disturbance to take corrective action
before the disturbance has influenced the system. This way of controlling
a system is called feedforward. The concept of feedforward is illustrated
TU
in Figure 2.20. The effect of the measured signal is reduced by measuring

it and generating a control signal that counteracts it. Since feedforward
attempts to match two signals it requires good process models, otherwise
the corrections may have the wrong size or it may be badly timed. Feed-
forward is often combined with feedback as is illustrated in Figure 2.21.
Such a system combines the good features of feedback and feedforward.
The system with a controller having two degrees of freedom shown in
Figure 2.12 can also be interpreted as a system that used feedforward to
JN
68

2.8 Summary
Table 2.1 Properties of Feedback and Feedforward.
Feedback Feedforward
Closed loop Open loop
Market driven Planning
Reactive Pro-active
Robust to modeling errors Sensitive to modeling errors
Risk for instability No risk for instability
obtain a good response to reference signals.
ld
The ideas of feedback and feedforward are very general and appear in
many different fields. We illustrate this with an example from economics.
EXAMPLE 2.14FEEDBACK AND FEEDFORWARD IN ECONOMICS

In economics feedforward corresponds to a planned economy while feed-
back corresponds to a market economy. In this case the discussion of
feedback versus feedforward has risen to ideological heights. In business
or
administration a pure feedforward strategy corresponds to running a com-
pany based on extensive strategic planning while a feedback strategy cor-
responds to a pure reactive approach.
The empirical of control systems indicate that it is often advantageous
to combine feedback and feedforward. Feedforward is particularly useful
when disturbances can be measured or predicted. A typical example is in
W
process control where disturbances in one process may be due to processes
upstream. It is an educated guess that the experience in control that
it is useful to combine feedback and feedforward can also be extended
to other fields. The correct balance of the approaches requires insight
and understanding of their properties. A summary of the properties of
feedback and feedforward are given in the Table 2.1.
2.8 Summary
TU
The idea of feedback has been discussed in this section. It has been shown
that feedback is a powerful concept that has played a major role in the
development of many areas of engineering, e.g. process control, telecom-
munications, instrumentation and computer engineering. This widespread
use of feedback derives from its interesting properties.
Feedback can reduce effects of disturbances
JN
69

Chapter 2. Feedback
Feedback can make a system insensitive to process variations

Feedback can make a system follow reference values faithfully
Feedback can create well defined relations between variables in a
system
Feedback can create desired behavior of a system
Feedback can stabilize an unstable system
Feedback can create instabilities
The first six features are the main reasons why control is so useful and so
widely used, we summarize them in the catch phrase the magic of feed-
back. The main drawback of feedback is that it may cause instabilities.
ld
This is one reason why it is necessary to have some knowledge of con-
trol. Some special forms of feedback, on-off control and PID control have
also been discussed. Most benefits of feedback can actually be obtained
by PI or PID control. Integral action is very useful because it will give
zero steady state error whenever there is a steady state. Different ways to
describe feedback systems have been introduced, including the notion of
block diagrams which is a powerful method of information hiding. Math-
or
ematical models in terms of static models have also been introduced and
used to derive some properties of feedback systems. A deeper analysis
requires other tools that take dynamics into account. This is necessary
to describe stability and instability. The chapter ended with a discussion
of another control principle, feedforward, which has properties that are
complementary to feedback.
W
TU
JN
70

3
Dynamics
ld
3.1 Introduction
From the perspective of control a dynamical system is such that the ef-
fects of actions do not occur immediately. Typical examples are: The ve-
locity of a car does not change immediately when the gas pedal is pushed.
or
The temperature in a room does not rise immediately when an air condi-
tioner is switched on. Dynamical systems are also common in daily life. An
headache does not vanish immediately when an aspirin is taken. Knowl-
edge of school children do not improve immediately after an increase of a
school budget. Training in sports does not immediately improve results.
Increased funding for a development project does not increase revenues
in the short term.
Dynamics is a key element of control because both processes and con-
W
trollers are dynamical systems. Concepts, ideas and theories of dynamics
are part of the foundation of control theory. Dynamics is also a topic of its
own that is closely tied to the development of natural science and math-
ematics. There has been an amazing development due to contributions
from intellectual giants like Newton, Euler, Lagrange and Poincare.
Dynamics is a very rich field that is partly highly technical. In this
section we have collected a number of results that are relevant for under-
standing the basic ideas of control. The chapter is organized in separate
TU
sections which can be read independently. For a first time reader we rec-
ommend to read this section section-wise as they are needed for the other
chapters of the book. To make this possible there is a bit of overlap be-
tween the different sections. in connection with the other chapters. There
is a bit of overlap so that the different sections can be read independently.
Section 3.2 gives an overview of dynamics and how it is used in con-
trol which has inherited ideas both from mechanics and from electrical
JN
71

Chapter 3. Dynamics
engineering. It also introduces the standard models that are discussed in

the following sections. In Section 3.3 we introduce a model for dynamics
in terms of linear, time-invariant differential equations. This material is
sufficient for analysis and design of simple control systems of the type dis-
cussed in the beginning of Chapter 5. The concepts of transfer function,
poles and zeros are also introduced in Section 3.3. Another view of lin-
ear, time-invariant systems is given in Section 3.4 introduces the Laplace
transform which is a good formalism for linear systems. This also gives
another view on transfer functions. Combining the block diagrams intro-
duced in Chapter 2 with the transfer functions gives a simple way to
model and analyze feedback systems. The material Section 3.4 gives a
good theoretical base for Chapters 4 and 5. Frequency response is yet an-
other useful way of describing dynamics that provides additional insight.
ld
The key idea is to investigate how sine waves are propagating through
a dynamical system. This is one of the contributions from electrical en-
gineering discussed in Section 3.5. This section together with Section 3.4
gives the basis for reading Chapters 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the book.
Section 3.6 presents the idea of state models which has its origin in
Newtonian mechanics. The problems of control have added richness by
the necessity to include the effect of external inputs and the information
or
obtained from sensors. In Section 3.6 we also discuss how to obtain models
from physics and how nonlinear systems can be approximated by linear
systems, so called linearization. In
The main part of this chapter deals with linear time invariant systems.
We will frequently only consider systems with one input and one output.
This is true for Sections 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5. The state models in Section 3.5
can however be nonlinear and have many inputs and outputs.
W
3.2 Two Views on Dynamics
Dynamical systems can be viewed from two different ways: the internal
view or the external views. The internal view which attempts to describe
the internal workings of the system originates from classical mechanics.
The prototype problem was the problem to describe the motion of the plan-
TU
ets. For this problem it was natural to give a complete characterization

of the motion of all planets. The other view on dynamics originated in
electrical engineering. The prototype problem was to describe electronic
amplifiers. It was natural to view an amplifier as a device that transforms
input voltages to output voltages and disregard the internal detail of the
amplifier. This resulted in the input-output view of systems. The two dif-
ferent views have been amalgamated in control theory. Models based on
the internal view are called internal descriptions, state models or white
JN
72

box models. The external view is associated with names such as external
descriptions, input-output models or black box models. In this book we
will mostly use the words state models and input-output models.
The Heritage of Mechanics

Dynamics originated in the attempts to describe planetary motion. The
basis was detailed observations of the planets by Tycho Brahe and the
results of Kepler who found empirically that the orbits could be well de-
scribed by ellipses. Newton embarked on an ambitious program to try to
explain why the planets move in ellipses and he found that the motion
could be explained by his law of gravitation and the formula that force
equals mass times acceleration. In the process he also invented calculus
and differential equations. Newtons results was the first example of the
ld
idea of reductionism, i.e. that seemingly complicated natural phenomena
can be explained by simple physical laws. This became the paradigm of
natural science for many centuries.
One of the triumphs of Newtons mechanics was the observation that
the motion of the planets could be predicted based on the current posi-
tions and velocities of all planets. It was not necessary to know the past
or
motion. The state of a dynamical system is a collection of variables that
characterize the motion of a system completely for the purpose of pre-
dicting future motion. For a system of planets the state is simply the
positions and the velocities of the planets. A mathematical model simply
gives the rate of change of the state as a function of the state itself, i.e. a
differential equation.
dx
= f ( x) (3.1)
dt
W
This is illustrated in Figure 3.1 for a system with two state variables. The
particular system represented in the figure is the van der Pol equation
dx1
= x1 x13 x2
dt
dx2
= x1
dt
TU
which is a model of an electronic oscillator. The model (3.1) gives the ve-
locity of the state vector for each value of the state. These are represented
by the arrows in the figure. The figure gives a strong intuitive represen-
tation of the equation as a vector field or a flow. Systems of second order
can be represented in this way. It is unfortunately difficult to visualize
equations of higher order in this way.
The ideas of dynamics and state have had a profound influence on
philosophy where it inspired the idea of predestination. If the state of a
JN
73

Chapter 3. Dynamics
3 M=1
x=Mxyx
y=x
1.5
0.5
0
y
0.5
1.5
ld
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
Figure 3.1 Illustration of a state model. A state model gives the rate of change of
the state as a function of the state. The velocity of the state are denoted by arrows.
natural system is known ant some time its future development is complete
or
determined. The vital development of dynamics has continued in the 20th
century. One of the interesting outcomes is chaos theory. It was discovered
that there are simple dynamical systems that are extremely sensitive
to initial conditions, small perturbations may lead to drastic changes in
the behavior of the system. The behavior of the system could also be
extremely complicated. The emergence of chaos also resolved the problem
of determinism, even if the solution is uniquely determined by the initial
W
conditions it is in practice impossible to make predictions because of the
sensitivity of initial conditions.
The Heritage of Electrical Engineering

A very different view of dynamics emerged from electrical engineering.
The prototype problem was design of electronic amplifiers. Since an am-
plifier is a device for amplification of signals it is natural to focus on the
input-output behavior. A system was considered as a device that trans-
TU
formed inputs to outputs, see Figure 3.2. Conceptually an input-output

model can be viewed as a giant table of inputs and outputs. The input-
output view is particularly useful for the special class of linear systems. To
define linearity we let (u1 , y1 ) och (u2 , y2 ) denote two input-output pairs,
and a and b be real numbers. A system is linear if (au1 + bu2 , a y1 + a y2 ) is
also an input-output pair (superposition). A nice property of control prob-
lems is that they can often be modeled by linear, time-invariant systems.
Time invariance is another concept. It means that the behavior of the
JN
74

Input Output
System
Figure 3.2 Illustration of the input-output view of a dynamical system.
system at one time is equivalent to the behavior at another time. It can be

expressed as follows. Let (u, y) be an input-output pair and let ut denote
the signal obtained by shifting the signal u, t units forward. A system
is called time-invariant if (ut , yt ) is also an input-output pair. This view
point has been very useful, particularly for linear, time-invariant systems,
whose input output relation can be described by
ld
Z t
y(t) = g(t )u( )d . (3.2)
0
where g is the impulse response of the system. If the input u is a unit

step the output becomes
or
Z t Z t
y(t) = h(t) = g(t )d = g( )u( )d (3.3)
0 0
The function h is called the step response of the system. Notice that the
impulse response is the derivative of the step response.
Another possibility to describe a linear, time-invariant system is to
W
represent a system by its response to sinusoidal signals, this is called fre-
quency response. A rich powerful theory with many concepts and strong,
useful results have emerged. The results are based on the theory of com-
plex variables and Laplace transforms. The input-output view lends it
naturally to experimental determination of system dynamics, where a
system is characterized by recording its response to a particular input,
e.g. a step.
The words input-output models, external descriptions, black boxes are
synonyms for input-output descriptions.
TU
The Control View

When control emerged in the 1940s the approach to dynamics was strongly
influenced by the Electrical Engineering view. The second wave of devel-
opments starting in the late 1950s was inspired by the mechanics and the
two different views were merged. Systems like planets are autonomous
and cannot easily be influenced from the outside. Much of the classical
JN
75

Chapter 3. Dynamics
development of dynamical systems therefore focused on autonomous sys-

tems. In control it is of course essential that systems can have external
influences. The emergence of space flight is a typical example where pre-
cise control of the orbit is essential. Information also plays an important
role in control because it is essential to know the information about a
system that is provided by available sensors. The models from mechan-
ics were thus modified to include external control forces and sensors. In
control the model given by (3.4) is thus replaced by
dx
= f ( x, u)
dt (3.4)
y = g( x, u)
where u is a vector of control signal and y a vector of measurements. This
ld
viewpoint has added to the richness of the classical problems and led to
new important concepts. For example it is natural to ask if all points
in the state space can be reached (reachability) and if the measurement
contains enough information to reconstruct the state.
The input-output approach was also strengthened by using ideas from
functional analysis to deal with nonlinear systems. Relations between
or
the state view and the input output view were also established. Current
control theory presents a rich view of dynamics based on good classical
traditions.
The importance of disturbances and model uncertainty are critical el-
ements of control because these are the main reasons for using feedback.
To model disturbances and model uncertainty is therefore essential. One
approach is to describe a model by a nominal system and some character-
ization of the model uncertainty. The dual views on dynamics is essential
W
in this context. State models are very convenient to describe a nominal
model but uncertainties are easier to describe using frequency response.
Standard Models
Standard models are very useful for structuring our knowledge. It also
simplifies problem solving. Learn the standard models, transform the
problem to a standard form and you are on familiar grounds. We will
discuss four standard forms
TU
Ordinary differential equations

Transfer functions
Frequency responses
State equations
The first two standard forms are primarily used for linear time-invariant
systems. The state equations also apply to nonlinear systems.
JN
76

3.3 Ordinary Differential Equations

Consider the following description of a linear time-invariant dynamical
system
dn y dn1 y dn1 u dn2 u
n
+ a1 n1 + . . . + an y = b1 n1 + b2 n2 + . . . + bn u, (3.5)
dt dt dt dt
where u is the input and y the output. The system is of order n order,
where n is the highest derivative of y. The ordinary differential equations
is a standard topic in mathematics. In mathematics it is common practice
to have bn = 1 and b1 = b2 = . . . = bn1 = 0 in (3.5). The form (3.5) adds
richness and is much more relevant to control. The equation is sometimes
called a controlled differential equation.
ld
The Homogeneous Equation
If the input u to the system (3.5) is zero, we obtain the equation
dn y dn1 y dn2 y
+ a1 + a2 + . . . + an y = 0, (3.6)
dtn dtn1 dtn2
which is called the homogeneous equation associated with equation (3.5).
or
The characteristic polynomial of Equations (3.5) and (3.6) is
A(s) = sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an (3.7)
The roots of the characteristic equation determine the properties of the
solution. If A( ) = 0, then y(t) = Ce t is a solution to Equation (3.6).
If the characteristic equation has distinct roots k the solution is
W
X
n
y(t) = Ck e k t , (3.8)
k=1
where Ck are arbitrary constants. The Equation (3.6) thus has n free
parameters.
Roots of the Characteristic Equation give Insight

A real root s = correspond to ordinary exponential functions e t . These
are monotone functions that decrease if is negative and increase if is
TU
positive as is shown in Figure 3.3. Notice that the linear approximations

shown in dashed lines change by one unit for one unit of t. Complex
roots s = i correspond to the time functions.
e t sin t, e t cos t
which have oscillatory behavior, see Figure 3.4. The distance between zero
crossings is / and corresponding amplitude change is e / .
JN
77

Chapter 3. Dynamics
<0 3
>0
1
2.5
0.8
2
0.6
y
y
1.5
0.4 1
0.2 0.5
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
t t
Figure 3.3 The exponential function y(t) = e t . The linear approximations of of

the functions for small t are shown in dashed lines. The parameter T = 1/ is
the time constant of the system.
ld
= 0.25 40
= 0.25
0.6
30
0.4 20
0.2
y
10
0 0
or
0.2 10
0.4 20
0 5 10 15 0 5 10 15
t t
Figure 3.4 The exponential function y(t) = e t sin t. The linear approximations
of of the functions for small t are shown in dashed lines. The dashed line corre-
sponds to a first order system with time constant T = 1/ . The distance between
W
zero crossings is / .
Multiple Roots
When there are multiple roots the solution to Equation (3.6) has the form
X
n
y(t) = Ck (t) e k t , (3.9)
k=1
TU
Where Ck (t) is a polynomial with degree less than the multiplicity of the
root k . The solution (3.9) thus has n free parameters.
The Inhomogeneous Equation A Special Case

The equation
dn y dn1 y dn2 y
+ a1 + a2 + . . . + an y = u(t) (3.10)
dtn dtn1 dtn2
JN
78

has the solution
X
n Z t
y(t) = Ck1 (t) e k t + h(t )u( )d , (3.11)
k=1 0
where f is the solution to the homogeneous equation
dn f dn1 f
+ a1 + . . . + an f = 0
dtn dtn1
with initial conditions
f (0) = 0, f P (0) = 0, . . . , f (n2) (0) = 0, f (n1) (0) = 1. (3.12)
ld
The solution (3.11) is thus a sum of two terms, the general solution to
the homogeneous equation and a particular solution which depends on
the input u. The solution has n free parameters which can be determined
from initial conditions.
The Inhomogeneous Equation - The General Case
or
The Equation (3.5) has the solution
X
n Z t
y(t) = Ck1 (t) e k t + g(t )u( )d , (3.13)
k=1 0
where the function g, called the impulse response, is given by

W
g(t) = b1 f (n1) (t) + b2 f (n2) (t) + . . . + bn f (t). (3.14)
The solution is thus the sum of two terms, the general solution to the ho-
mogeneous equation and a particular solution. The general solution to the
homogeneous equation does not depend on the input and the particular
solution depends on the input.
Notice that the impulse response has the form
TU
X
n
g(t) = ck (t) e k t . (3.15)
k=1
It thus has the same form as the general solution to the homogeneous
equation (3.9). The coefficients ck are given by the conditions (3.12).
The impulse response is also called the weighting function because the
second term of (3.13) can be interpreted as a weighted sum of past inputs.
JN
79

Chapter 3. Dynamics
The Step Response

Consider (3.13) and assume that all initial conditions are zero. The output
is then given by Z t
y(t) = g(t )u( )d , (3.16)
0
If the input is constant u(t) = 1 we get
Z t Z t
y(t) = g(t )d = g( )d = H (t), (3.17)
0 0
The function H is called the unit step response or the step response for
short. It follows from the above equation that
ld
dh(t)
g(t) = (3.18)
dt
The step response can easily be determined experimentally by waiting
for the system to come to rest and applying a constant input. In process
engineering the experiment is called a bump test. The impulse response
can then be determined by differentiating the step response.
Stability
or
The solution of system is described by the ordinary differential equation
(3.5) is given by (3.9). The solution is stable if all solutions go to zero. A
system is thus stable if the real parts of all i are negative, or equivalently
that all the roots of the characteristic polynomial (3.7) have negative real
parts.
W
Stability can be determined simply by finding the roots of the charac-
teristic polynomial of a system. This is easily done in Matlab.
The Routh-Hurwitz Stability Criterion

When control started to be used for steam engines and electric generators
computational tools were not available and it was it was a major effort to
find roots of an algebraic equation. Much intellectual activity was devoted
to the problem of investigating if an algebraic equation have all its roots
TU
in the left half plane without solving the equation resulting in the Routh-
Hurwitz criterion. Some simple special cases of this criterion are given
below.
The polynomial A(s) = s + a1 has its zero in the left half plane if
a1 > 0.
The polynomial A(s) = s2 + a1 s + a2 has all its zeros in the left half
plane if all coefficients are positive.
JN
80

The polynomial A(s) = s3 + a2 s2 + a3 has all its zeros in the left half
plane if all coefficients are positive and if a1 a2 > a 3.
Transfer Functions, Poles and Zeros

The model (3.5) is characterized by two polynomials
A(s) = sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an1 s + an

B (s) = b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn1 s + bn
The rational function

B ( s)
G ( s) = (3.19)
A( s )
is called the transfer function of the system.
ld
Consider a system described by (3.5) assume that the input and the
output have constant values u0 and y0 respectively. It then follows from
(3.5) that
an y0 = bn u0
which implies that
y0 bn
or
= = G (0)
u0 an
The number G (0) is called the static gain of the system because it tells
the ratio of the output and the input under steady state condition. If the
input is constant u = u0 and the system is stable then the output will
reach the steady state value y0 = G (0)u0 . The transfer function can thus
be viewed as a generalization of the concept of gain.
W
Notice the symmetry between y and u. The inverse system is obtained
by reversing the roles of input and output. The transfer function of the
B ( s) A(s)
system is and the inverse system has the transfer function .
A( s ) B ( s)
The roots of A(s) are called poles of the system. The roots of B (s)
are called zeros of the system. The poles of the system are the roots
of the characteristic equation, they characterize the general solution to
to the homogeneous equation and the impulse response. A pole s =
corresponds to the component e t of the solution, also called a mode. If
TU
A( ) = 0, then y(t) = e t is a solution to the homogeneous equation (3.6).

Differentiation gives
dk y
= k y(t)
dtk
and we find
dn y dn1 y dn2 y
+ a1 + a2 + . . . + an y = A( ) y(t) = 0
dtn dtn1 dtn2
JN
81

Chapter 3. Dynamics
The modes thus correspond to the terms of the solution to the homoge-
neous equation (3.6) and the terms of the impulse response (3.15) and
the step response.
If s = is a zero of B (s) and u(t) = Ce t , then it follows that
dn1 u dn2 u
b1 + b2 . . . + bn u = B ( ) Ce t = 0.
dtn1 dtn2
A zero of B (s) at s = blocks the transmission of the signal u(t) = Ce t .
3.4 Laplace Transforms
ld
The Laplace transform is very convenient for dealing with linear time-
invariant system. The reason is that it simplifies manipulations of linear
systems to pure algebra. It also a natural way to introduce transfer func-
tions and it also opens the road for using the powerful tools of the theory
of complex variables. The Laplace transform is an essential element of
the language of control.
or
The Laplace Transform
Consider a function f defined on 0 t < and a real number > 0.
Assume that f grows slower than e t for large t. The Laplace transform
F = L f of f is defined as
Z
L f = F ( s) = est f (t)dt
0
W
We will illustrate computation of Laplace transforms with a few examples
Transforms of Simple Function The transform of the function f 1 (t) =

eat is given by
Z
1 st 1
F1 (s) = e(s+a)t dt = e =
0 s + a 0 s + a
TU
Differentiating the above equation we find that the transform of the func-
tion f 2 (t) = te at is
1
F2 (s) =
(s + a)2
Repeated differentiation shows that the transform of the function f 3 (t) =
tn eat is
(n 1)!
F3 (s) =
(s + a)n
JN
82

Setting a = 0 in f 1 we find that the transform of the unit step function

f 4 (t) = 1 is
1
F4 (s) =
s
Similarly we find by setting a = 0 in f 3 that the transform of f 5 = tn is
n!
F5 (s) =
sn+1
Setting a = ib in f 1 we find that the transform of f (t) = eibt = cos bt

i sin bt is
1 s ib s b
F ( s) = = 2 = 2 i 2
ld
s + ib s +b 2 s +b 2 s + b2
Separating real and imaginary parts we find that the transform of f 6 (t) =
sin bt and f 7 (t) = cos bt are
b s
F6 (t) = , F7 (t) =
s2 + b2 s2 + b2
Proceeding in this way it is possible to build up tables of transforms that

are useful for hand calculations.
Properties of Laplace Transforms The Laplace transform also has

many useful properties. First we observe that the transform is linear
because or
W
Z Z
L (a f + bg) = aF (s) + bF (s) = a est f (t)dt + b est g(t)dt
0 0
Z
st
= e (a f (t) + bg(t))dt = aL f + bL g
0
Next we will calculate the transform of the derivative of a function, i.e.

f ( t)
f P (t) = d dt . We have
TU
Z Z
df
L = est f P (t)dt = est f (t) + s est f (t)dt = f (0) + sL f
dt 0 0 0
where the second equality is obtained by integration by parts. This for-

mula is very useful because it implies that differentiation of a time func-
tion corresponds to multiplication of the transform by s provided that the
JN
83

Chapter 3. Dynamics
initial value f (0) is zero. We will consider the transform of an integral

Z t Z Z t
L f ( )d = est f ( )d
0 0 0
Z Z es
est t s P
= e f ( )d + f ( )d
s 0 0 0 s
Z
1 s
= e f ( )d = L f
s 0
The relation between the input u and the output y of a linear time-
invariant system is given by the convolution integral
Z
g(t )u( )d
ld
y(t) =
0
see (3.18). We will now consider the Laplace transform of such an expres-
sion. We have
Z Z Z
Y ( s) = est y(t)dt = est g(t )u( )d dt
or
0 0 0
Z Z t
= es(t ) es g(t )u( )d dt
0 0
Z Z
= es u( )d est g(t)dt = G (s) U (s)
0 0
The description of a linear time-invariant systems thus becomes very sim-

W
ple when working with Laplace transforms.
Next we will consider the effect of a time shift. Let the number a be
positive and let the function f a be a time shift of the function f , i.e.
(
0 for PI t < 0
f a (t) =
f (t a) for t 0
The Laplace transform of f a is given by

TU
Z Z
Fa (s) = est f (t a)dt =
est f (t a)dt
Z0 a
Z
as s(ta)
= e e f (t a)dt = eas est f (t)dt = eas F (s)
a 0
(3.20)
Delaying a signal by a time units thus correspond to multiplication of its
Laplace transform by eas .
JN
84

The behavior of time functions for small arguments is governed by the

behavior of the Laplace transform for large arguments. This is expressed
by the so called initial value theorem.
Z Z
st v
lim sF (s) = lim se f (t)dt = lim ev f ( )dv = f (0)
s s 0 s 0 s
This holds provided that the limit exists.

The converse is also true which means that the behavior of time func-
tions for large arguments is governed by the behavior of the Laplace trans-
form for small arguments. Final value theorem. Hence
Z Z
v
lim sF (s) = lim sest f (t)dt = lim ev f ( )dv = f ()
s0 s0 0 s0 0 s
ld
These properties are very useful for qualitative assessment of a time func-
tions and Laplace transforms.
Linear Differential Equations

The differentiation property L ddtf = sL f f (0) makes the Laplace trans-
or
form very convenient for dealing with linear differential equations. Con-
sider for example the system
dy
= a y + bu
dt
Taking Laplace transforms of both sides give
sY (s) y(0) = aY (s) + bU (s)

W
Solving this linear equation for Y (s) gives
y(0) b
Y ( s) = + U ( s)
sa sa
Transforming back to time function we find
Z t
y(t) = e y(0) + b
at
ea(t ) u( ]d
TU
To convert the transforms to time functions we have used the fact that
the transform
1
sa
corresponds to the time function eat and we have also used the rule for
transforms of convolution.
JN
85

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Inverse Transforms
A simple way to find time functions corresponding to a rational Laplace
transform. Write F (s) in a partial fraction expansion
B (s) B (s) C1 C2 Cn
F (s) = = = + + ... +
A(s) (s 1 )(s 2 ) . . . (s n ) s 1 s 2 s n
B ( k )
Ck = lim (s k ) F (s) =
s k ( k 1 ) . . . ( k k1)(s k+1) . . . ( k n )
The time function corresponding to the transform is
f (t) = C1 e 1 t + C2 e 2 t + . . . + Cn e n t
Parameters k give shape and numbers Ck give magnitudes.
ld
Notice that k may be complex numbers. With multiple roots the con-
stants Ck are instead polynomials.
The Transfer Function

The transfer function of an LTI system was introduced in Section 3.3 when
dealing with differential equations. Using Laplace transforms it can also
or
be defined as follows. Consider an LTI system with input u and output y.
The transfer function is the ratio of the transform of the output and the
input where the Laplace transforms are calculated under the assumption
that all initial values are zero.
Y ( s) Ly
G ( s) = =
U ( s) Lu
W
The fact that all initial values are assumed to be zero has some conse-
quences that will be discussed later.
EXAMPLE 3.1LINEAR TIME-INVARIANT SYSTEMS

Consider a system described by the ordinary differential equation (3.5),
i.e

TU
+ a1 + . . . + a n y = b1 + b2 + . . . + bn u,
dtn dtn1 dtn1 dtn2
Taking Laplace transforms under the assumption that all initial values
are zero we get.
(sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an1 s + an ) Y (s)

= (b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn1 s + bn ) U (s)
JN
86

The transfer function of the system is thus given by

Y ( s) b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn1 s + bn B ( s)
G ( s) = = n = (3.21)
U ( s) s + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an1 s + an A( s )
EXAMPLE 3.2A TIME DELAY

Consider a system which simply delays the input T time units. It follows
from 3.20 that the input output relation is
Y (s) = esT U (s)
The transfer function of a time delay is thus

Y ( s)
ld
G ( s) = = esT
U ( s)
It is also possible to calculate the transfer functions for systems de-

scribed by partial differential equations.
or
EXAMPLE 3.3THE HEAT EQUATION

G (s) = e sT
1
G ( s) =
cosh sT
Transfer functions and Laplace transforms are ideal to deal with block
W
diagrams for linear time-invariant systems. We have already shown that
a block is simply characterized by
Y ( s) = G ( s) U ( s)
The transform of the output of a block is simply the product of the transfer
function of the block and the transform of the input system. Algebraically
this is equivalent to multiplication with a constant. This makes it easy
to find relations between the signals that appear in a block diagram.
TU
The combination of block diagrams and transfer functions is a very nice

combination because they make it possible both to obtain an overview of
a system and to guide the derivation of equations for the system. This is
one of the reasons why block diagrams are so widely used in control.
Notice that it also follows from the above equation that signals and
systems have the same representations. In the formula we can thus con-
sider g as the input and u as the transfer function.
To illustrate the idea we will consider an example.
JN
87

Chapter 3. Dynamics
d n
r e u x y
C P
Figure 3.5 Block diagram of a feedback system.
EXAMPLE 3.4RELATIONS BETWEEN SIGNALS IN A BLOCK DIAGRAM

Consider the system in Figure 3.5. The system has two blocks representing
the process P and the controller C. There are three external signals, the
ld
reference r, the load disturbance d and the measurement noise n. A typical
problem is to find out how the error e related to the signals r d and
n? Introduce Laplace transforms and transfer functions. To obtain the
desired relation we simply trace the signals around the loop. Starting
with the signal e and tracing backwards in the loop we find that e is the
difference between r and y, hence E = R Y. The signal y in turn is the
or
sum of n and the output of the block P, hence Y = N + P( D + V ). Finally
the signal v is the output of the controller which is given by V = PE.
Combining the results we get

E = R N + P( D + C E )
With a little practice this equation can be written directly. Solving for E
gives
W
1 1 P
E= R N D
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
Notice the form of the equations and the use of superposition.
Simulating LTI Systems

Linear time-invariant systems can be conveniently simulated using Mat-
lab. For example a system with the transfer function
TU
5s + 2
G ( s) =
s2 + 3s + 2
is introduced in matlab as
G=tf([5 2],[1 3 2])
The command step(G) gives the step response of the system.
JN
88

Transfer Functions
The transfer function of a linear system is defined as
Y ( s) Ly
G ( s) = = (3.22)
U ( s) Lu
where U (s) = L u is the Laplace transform of the input u and Y (s) = L y
is the Laplace transform of the output y. The Laplace transforms are
computed under the assumption that all initial conditions are zero.
Circuit Analysis
Laplace transforms are very useful for circuit analysis. A resistor is de-
scribed by the algebraic equation
ld
V = RI
but inductors and capacitors are describe by the linear differential equa-
tions
Z t
CV = I ( ]d
or
0
dI
L =V
dt
Taking Laplace transforms we get
L V = RI
1
LV = LI
W
sC
L V = sLL I
The transformed equations for all components thus look identical, the
transformed voltage L V is a generalized impedance Z multiplied by the
transformed current L I. The impedance is
Z (s) = R for a resistor
1
Z ( s) =
TU
for a capacitor
sC
Z (s) = sL for an inductor
Operating with the transforms we can thus pretend that all elements of
a circuit is a resistor which means that circuit analysis is reduced to pure
algebra. This is just another illustration of the fact that differential equa-
tions are transformed to algebraic equations. We illustrate the procedure
by an example.
JN
89

Chapter 3. Dynamics
R C
R1
I
+
V

V1 V2
Figure 3.6 Schematic diagram of an electric circuit.
EXAMPLE 3.5OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
ld
Consider the electric circuit shown in Figure 3.6. Assume that the problem
is to find the relation between the input voltage V1 and the output voltage
V2 . Assuming that the gain of the amplifier is very high, say around 106 ,
then the voltage V is negligible and the current I0 is zero. The currents
I1 and I2 then are the same which gives
L V1 L V2
or
=
Z 1 ( s) Z 2 ( s)
It now remains to determine the generalized impedances Z1 and Z2 . The

impedance Z2 is a regular resistor. To determine Z1 we use the simple
rule for combining resistors which gives
1
Z 1 ( s) = R +
W
sC
Hence
L V2 Z 1 ( s) R 1
= =
L V2 Z 2 ( s) R2 R2 Cs
Converting to the time domain we find
Z t
R 1
V2 (t) = V1 ( )d
R2 R2 C 0
TU
The circuit is thus a PI controller.
3.5 Frequency Response

The idea of frequency response is to characterize linear time-invariant
systems by their response to sinusoidal signals. The idea goes back to
JN
90

0.2
0.15
Output
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.1
0 5 10 15
0.5
Input
ld
0.5
1
0 5 10 15
Time
Figure 3.7 Response of a linear time-invariant system to a sinusoidal input (full
or
lines). The dashed line shows the steady state output calculated from (3.23).
Fourier, who introduced the method to investigate propagation of heat in

metals. Figure 3.7 shows the response of a linear time-invariant system to
a sinusoidal input. The figure indicates that after a transient the output
is a sinusoid with the same frequency as the input. The steady state
response to a sinusoidal input of a stable linear system is in fact given by
W
G (i ). Hence if the input is
u(t) = a sin t = a ei t
the output is
y(t) = ah G (i )h sin ( t + arg G (i )) = a ei t G (i ) (3.23)
The dashed line in Figure 3.7 shows the output calculated by this for-
TU
mula. It follows from this equation that the transfer function G has the
interesting property that its value for s = i describes the steady state
response to sinusoidal signals. The function G (i ) is therefore called the
frequency response. The argument of the function is frequency and the
function takes complex values. The magnitude gives the magnitude of the
steady state output for a unit amplitude sinusoidal input and the argu-
ment gives the phase shift between the input and the output. Notice that
the system must be stable for the steady state output to exist.
JN
91

Chapter 3. Dynamics
The frequency response can be determined experimentally by analyz-

ing how a system responds to sinusoidal signals. It is possible to make
very accurate measurements by using correlation techniques.
To derive the formula we will first calculate the response of a system
with the transfer function G (s) to the signal eat where all poles of the
transfer function have the property pk < < a. The Laplace transform
of the output is
1
Y ( s) = G ( s)
sa
Making a partial fraction expansion we get
G (a) X Rk
Y ( s) = +
sa (s pk )( pk a)
ld
It follows the output has the property

y(t) G (a) eat < ce t
where c is a constant. Asymptotically we thus find that the output ap-

proaches G (a) eat . Setting a = ib we find that the response to the input
will approach
y(t) = G (ib) eibt = h G (ib)h ei(b+arg G(ib))

or
u(t) = eibt = cos bt + i sin bt
= h G (ib)h cos (bt + arg arg G (ib)) + ih G (ib)h sin (bt + arg arg G (ib))
W
Separation of real and imaginary parts give the result.
Nyquist Plots
The response of a system to sinusoids is given by the the frequency re-
sponse G (i ). This function can be represented graphically by plotting
the magnitude and phase of G (i ) for all frequencies, see Figure 3.8. The
magnitude a = h G (i )h represents the amplitude of the output and the
TU
angle = arg G (i ) represents the phase shift. The phase shift is typi-
cally negative which implies that the output will lag the input. The angle
in the figure is therefore called phase lag. One reason why the Nyquist
curve is important is that it gives a totally new way of looking at stabil-
ity of a feedback system. Consider the feedback system in Figure 3.9. To
investigate stability of a the system we have to derive the characteristic
equation of the closed loop system and determine if all its roots are in
the left half plane. Even if it easy to determine the roots of the equation
JN
92

Im G(i )
Ultimate point
1 Re G(i )
a
ld
Figure 3.8 The Nyquist plot of a transfer function G (i ).
B A
L( s )
Figure 3.9
1
or
Block diagram of a simple feedback system.
W
numerically it is not easy to determine how the roots are influenced by
the properties of the controller. It is for example not easy to see how to
modify the controller if the closed loop system is stable. We have also de-
fined stability as a binary property, a system is either stable or unstable.
In practice it is useful to be able to talk about degrees of stability. All
of these issues are addressed by Nyquists stability criterion. This result
has a strong intuitive component which we will discuss first. There is also
some beautiful mathematics associated with it that will be discussed in a
TU
separate section.
Consider the feedback system in Figure 3.9. Let the transfer functions
of the process and the controller be P(s) and C (s) respectively. Introduce
the loop transfer function
L( s) = P ( s) C ( s) (3.24)
To get insight into the problem of stability we will start by investigating

JN
93

Chapter 3. Dynamics
the conditions for oscillation. For that purpose we cut the feedback loop
as indicated in the figure and we inject a sinusoid at point A. In steady
state the signal at point B will also be a sinusoid with the same frequency.
It seems reasonable that an oscillation can be maintained if the signal at
B has the same amplitude and phase as the injected signal because we
could then connect A to B. Tracing signals around the loop we find that
the condition that the signal at B is identical to the signal at A is that
L(i 0 ) = 1 (3.25)
which we call the condition for oscillation. This condition means that the
Nyquist curve of L(i ) intersects the negative real axis at the point -1.
Intuitively it seems reasonable that the system would be stable if the
Nyquist curve intersects to the right of the point -1 as indicated in Fig-
ld
ure 3.9. This is essentially true, but there are several subtleties that are
revealed by the proper theory.
Stability Margins
In practice it is not enough to require that the system is stable. There
must also be some margins of stability. There are many ways to express
or
this. Many of the criteria are based on Nyquists stability criterion. They
are based on the fact that it is easy to see the effects of changes of the
gain and the phase of the controller in the Nyquist diagram of the loop
transfer function L(s). An increase of controller gain simply expands the
Nyquist curve radially. An increase of the phase of the controller twists the
Nyquist curve clockwise, see Figure 3.10. The gain margin gm tells how
much the controller gain can be increased before reaching the stability
limit. Let 180 be the smallest frequency where the phase lag of the loop
W
transfer function L(s) is 180 . The gain margin is defined as
1
gm = (3.26)
h L(i 180 )h
The stability margin is a closely related concept which is defined as
1
sm = 1 + h L(i 180 )h = 1 (3.27)
gm
TU
A nice feature of the stability margin is that it is a number between 0

and 1. Values close to zero imply a small margin.
The phase margin m is the amount of phase lag required to reach the
stability limit. Let gc denote the lowest frequency where the loop transfer
function L(s) has unit magnitude. The phase margin is then given by
m = + arg L(i gc ) (3.28)

JN
94

ld
Figure 3.10 Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function L with indication of gain,
phase and stability margins.
or
The margins have simple geometric interpretations in the Nyquist dia-
gram of the loop transfer function as is shown in Figure 3.10. The stability
margin sm is the distance between the critical point and the intersection
of the Nyquist curve with the negative real axis.
One possibility to characterize the stability margin with a single num-
W
ber is to choose the shortest distance d to the critical point. This is also
shown in Figure 3.10.
Reasonable values of the margins are phase margin m = 30 60 ,
gain margin gm = 2 5, stability margin sm = 0.5 0.8, and shortest
distance to the critical point d = 0.5 0.8.
The gain and phase margins were originally conceived for the case
when the Nyquist curve only intersects the unit circle and the negative
real axis once. For more complicated systems there may be many inter-
TU
sections and it is then necessary to consider the intersections that are

closest to the critical point. For more complicated systems there is also
another number that is highly relevant namely the delay margin. The
delay margin is defined as the smallest time delay required to make the
system unstable. For loop transfer functions that decay quickly the delay
margin is closely related to the phase margin but for systems where the
amplitude ratio of the loop transfer function has several peaks at high
frequencies the delay margin is a much more relevant measure.
JN
95

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Nyquists Stability Theorem*

We will now prove the Nyquist stability theorem. This will require more
results from the theory of complex variables than in many other parts of
the book. Since precision is needed we will also use a more mathemati-
cal style of presentation. We will start by proving a key theorem about
functions of complex variables.
THEOREM 3.1PRINCIPLE OF VARIATION OF THE ARGUMENT

Let D be a closed region in the complex plane and let be the boundary
of the region. Assume the function f is analytic in D and on except at
a finite number of poles and zeros, then
Z P
1 1 f ( z)
wn = arg f ( z) = dz = N P
ld
2 2 i f ( z)
where N is the number of zeros and P the number of poles in D. Poles

and zeros of multiplicity m are counted m times. The number wn is called
the winding number and arg f ( z) is the variation of the argument of
the function f as the curve is traversed in the positive direction.
or
PROOF 3.1
Assume that z = a is a zero of multiplicity m. In the neighborhood of
z = a we have
f ( z) = ( z a)m g( z)
where the function g is analytic and different form zero. We have
f P ( z) m gP ( z)
W
= +
f ( z) z a g( z)
The second term is analytic at z = a. The function f P / f thus has a single

pole at z = a with the residue m. The sum of the residues at the zeros of
the function is N. Similarly we find that the sum of the residues of the
poles of is P. Furthermore we have
d f P ( z)
log f ( z) =
TU
dz f ( z)
which implies that Z

f P ( z)
dz = log f ( z)
f ( z)
where denotes the variation along the contour . We have
log f ( z) = log h f ( z)h + i arg f ( z)

JN
96

ld
Figure 3.11 Contour used to prove Nyquists stability theorem.
Since the variation of h f ( z)h around a closed contour is zero we have
or
log f ( z) = i arg f ( z)
and the theorem is proven.
REMARK 3.1
The number wn is called the winding number.
W
REMARK 3.2
The theorem is useful to determine the number of poles and zeros of
an function of complex variables in a given region. To use the result we
must determine the winding number. One way to do this is to investigate
how the curve is transformed under the map f . The variation of the
argument is the number of times the map of winds around the origin
in the f -plane. This explains why the variation of the argument is also
TU
called the winding number.

We will now use the Theorem 1 to prove Nyquists stability theorem.
For that purpose we introduce a contour that encloses the right half plane.
For that purpose we choose the contour shown in Figure 3.11. The contour
consists of a small half circle to the right of the origin, the imaginary axis
and a large half circle to the right with with the imaginary axis as a
diameter. To illustrate the contour we have shown it drawn with a small
radius r and a large radius R. The Nyquist curve is normally the map
JN
97

Chapter 3. Dynamics
of the positive imaginary axis. We call the contour the full Nyquist
contour.
Consider a closed loop system with the loop transfer function L(s).
The closed loop poles are the zeros of the function
f ( s ) = 1 + L( s )
To find the number of zeros in the right half plane we thus have to inves-
tigate the winding number of the function f = 1 + L as s moves along the
contour . The winding number can conveniently be determined from the
Nyquist plot. A direct application of the Theorem 1 gives.
THEOREM 3.2NYQUISTS STABILITY THEOREM
ld
Consider a simple closed loop system with the loop transfer function L(s).
Assume that the loop transfer function does not have any poles in the
region enclosed by and that the winding number of the function 1 + L(s)
is zero. Then the closed loop characteristic equation has not zeros in the
right half plane.
We illustrate Nyquists theorem by an examples.
or
EXAMPLE 3.6A SIMPLE CASE
Consider a closed loop system with the loop transfer function
k
L(s) =
s((s + 1)2
Figure 3.12 shows the image of the contour under the map L. The
W
Nyquist curve intersects the imaginary axis for = 1 the intersection is
at k/2. It follows from Figure 3.12 that the winding number is zero if
k < 2 and 2 if k > 2. We can thus conclude that the closed loop system is
stable if k < 2 and that the closed loop system has two roots in the right
half plane if k > 2.
By using Nyquists theorem it was possible to resolve a problem that
had puzzled the engineers working with feedback amplifiers. The follow-
ing quote by Nyquist gives an interesting perspective.
TU
Mr. Black proposed a negative feedback repeater and proved by tests

that it possessed the advantages which he had predicted for it. In
particular, its gain was constant to a high degree, and it was lin-
ear enough so that spurious signals caused by the interaction of the
various channels could be kept within permissible limits. For best re-
sults, the feedback factor, the quantity usually known as (the loop
transfer function), had to be numerically much larger than unity. The
possibility of stability with a feedback factor greater than unity was
JN
98

ld
Figure 3.12 Map of the contour under the map L(s) = k
s((s+1)2
. The curve is
drawn for k < 2. The map of the positive imaginary axis is shown in full lines, the
map of the negative imaginary axis and the small semi circle at the origin in dashed
lines.
or
puzzling. Granted that the factor is negative it was not obvious how
that would help. If the factor was -10, the effect of one round trip
around the feedback loop is to change the magnitude of the current
from, say 1 to -10. After a second trip around the loop the current
becomes 100, and so forth. The totality looks much like a divergent
series and it was not clear how such a succession of ever-increasing
W
components could add to something finite and so stable as experience
had shown. The missing part in this argument is that the numbers
that describe the successive components 1, -10, 100, and so on, rep-
resent the steady state, whereas at any finite time many of the com-
ponents have not yet reached steady state and some of them, which
are destined to become very large, have barely reached perceptible
magnitude. My calculations were principally concerned with replac-
ing the indefinite diverging series referred to by a series which gives
the actual value attained at a specific time t. The series thus obtained
TU
is convergent instead of divergent and, moreover, converges to values

in agreement with the experimental findings.
This explains how I came to undertake the work. It should perhaps

be explained also how it come to be so detailed. In the course of the
calculations, the facts with which the term conditional stability have
come to be associated, became apparent. One aspect of this was that
it is possible to have a feedback loop which is stable and can be made
unstable by by increasing the loop loss. this seemed a very surprising
JN
99

Chapter 3. Dynamics
0.5
400
0.4
300
0.3
200
0.2
100 0.1
0 0
0.1
100
0.2
200
0.3
300
0.4
400 0.5
400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
3(s+1)2
Figure 3.13 Map of the contour under the map L(s) = , see (3.29), which
ld
s(s+6)2
is a conditionally stable system. The map of the positive imaginary axis is shown
in full lines, the map of the negative imaginary axis and the small semicircle at the
origin in dashed lines. The plot on the right is an enlargement of the area around
the origin of the plot on the left.
or
result and appeared to require that all the steps be examined and set
forth in full detail.
This quote clearly illustrate the difficulty in understanding feedback by

simple qualitative reasoning. We will illustrate the issue of conditional
stability by an example.
W
EXAMPLE 3.7CONDITIONAL STABILITY
Consider a feedback system with the loop transfer function
3(s + 1)2
L(s) = (3.29)
s(s + 6)2
The Nyquist plot of the loop transfer function is shown in Figure 3.13 The
TU
figure shows that the Nyquist curve intersects the negative real axis at a
point close to -5. The naive argument would then indicate that the system
would be unstable. The winding number is however zero and stability
follows from Nyquists theorem.
Notice that Nyquists theorem does not hold if the loop transfer func-
tion has a pole in the right half plane. There are extensions of the Nyquist
theorem to cover this case but it is simpler to invoke Theorem 1 directly.
We illustrate this by two examples.
JN
100

ld
Figure 3.14 Map of the contour under the map L(s) = s(s1k)(s+5) . The curve on
the right shows the region around the origin in larger scale. The map of the positive
imaginary axis is shown in full lines, the map of the negative imaginary axis and
the small semi circle at the origin in dashed lines.
EXAMPLE 3.8LOOP TRANSFER FUNCTION WITH RHP POLE
L(s) =
k
or
Consider a feedback system with the loop transfer function
s(s 1)(s + 5)
W
This transfer function has a pole at s = 1 in the right half plane. This
violates one of the assumptions for Nyquists theorem to be valid. The
Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function is shown in Figure 3.14. Traversing
the contour in clockwise we find that the winding number is 1. Applying
Theorem 1 we find that
NP=1
Since the loop transfer function has a pole in the right half plane we have
P = 1 and we get N = 2. The characteristic equation thus has two roots
TU
in the right half plane.
EXAMPLE 3.9THE INVERTED PENDULUM

Consider a closed loop system for stabilization of an inverted pendulum
with a PD controller. The loop transfer function is
s+2
L(s) = (3.30)
s2 1
JN
101

Chapter 3. Dynamics
ld
Figure 3.15 Map of the contour under the map L(s) = ss2+21 given by (3.30). The
map of the positive imaginary axis is shown in full lines, the map of the negative
imaginary axis and the small semi circle at the origin in dashed lines.
or
This transfer function has one pole at s = 1 in the right half plane.
The Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function is shown in Figure 3.15.
Traversing the contour in clockwise we find that the winding number
is -1. Applying Theorem 1 we find that
N P = 1
W
Since the loop transfer function has a pole in the right half plane we have
P = 1 and we get N = 0. The characteristic equation thus has no roots
in the right half plane and the closed loop system is stable.
Bode Plots
The Nyquist curve is one way to represent the frequency response G (i ).
Another useful representation was proposed by Bode who represented
TU
it by two curves, the gain curve and the phase curve. The gain curve
gives the value of G (i ) as a function of and the phase curve gives
arg G (i ) as a function of . The curves are plotted as shown below with
logarithmic scales for frequency and magnitude and linear scale for phase,
see Figure 3.16 An useful feature of the Bode plot is that both the gain
curve and the phase curve can be approximated by straight lines, see
Figure 3.16 where the approximation is shown in dashed lines. This fact
was particularly useful when computing tools were not easily accessible.
JN
102

5
10
4
10
h G (i )h
3
10
2
10
2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10
50
arg G (i )
ld
0
50
100
150
2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10

tions of the curves.
or
Figure 3.16 Bode diagram of a frequency response. The top plot is the gain curve
and bottom plot is the phase curve. The dashed lines show straight line approxima-
The fact that logarithmic scales were used also simplified the plotting. We
illustrate Bode plots with a few examples.
W
It is easy to sketch Bode plots because with the right scales they have
linear asymptotes. This is useful in order to get a quick estimate of the
behavior of a system. It is also a good way to check numerical calculations.
Consider first a transfer function which is a polynomial G (s) = B (s)/ A(s).
We have
log G (s) = log B (s) log A(s)
Since a polynomial is a product of terms of the type :
TU
s, s + a, s2 + 2 as + a2
it suffices to be able to sketch Bode diagrams for these terms. The Bode
plot of a complex system is then obtained by composition.
EXAMPLE 3.10BODE PLOT OF A DIFFERENTIATOR

Consider the transfer function
G ( s) = s
JN
103

Chapter 3. Dynamics
1
10
h G (i )h
0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10
91
arg G (i )
90.5
90
89.5
89
1 0 1
10 10 10

ld
Figure 3.17 Bode plot of a differentiator.
We have G (i ) = i which implies
log h G (i )h = log
or
arg G (i ) = /2
The gain curve is thus a straight line with slope 1 and the phase curve is
a constant at 90 .. The Bode plot is shown in Figure 3.17
EXAMPLE 3.11BODE PLOT OF AN INTEGRATOR

W
1
G ( s) =
s
We have G (i ) = 1/ i which implies
log h G (i )h = log
arg G (i ) = /2
The gain curve is thus a straight line with slope -1 and the phase curve
TU
is a constant at 90 . The Bode plot is shown in Figure 3.18

Compare the Bode plots for the differentiator in Figure 3.17 and the
integrator in Figure 3.18. The sign of the phase is reversed and the gain
curve is mirror imaged in the horizontal axis. This is a consequence of
the property of the logarithm.
1
log = log G = logh G h i arg G
G
JN
104

1
10
h G (i )h 0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10
89
arg G (i )
89.5
90
90.5
91
1 0 1
10 10 10

ld
Figure 3.18 Bode plot of an integrator.
EXAMPLE 3.12BODE PLOT OF A FIRST ORDER FACTOR
or
G ( s) = s + a
We have
W
G (i ) = a + i
and it follows that
p
h G (i )h = 2 + a2 , arg G (i ) = arctan / a
TU
Hence
1
log h G (i )h = log ( 2 + a2 ), arg G (i ) = arctan / a
2
The Bode Plot is shown in Figure 3.19. Both the gain curve and the phase
curve can be approximated by straight lines if proper scales are chosen
JN
105

Chapter 3. Dynamics
1
10
h G (i )h
0
10
1 0 1
10 10 10
100
arg G (i )
50
0
1 0 1
10 10 10

ld
Figure 3.19 Bode plot of a first order factor. The dashed lines show the piece-wise
linear approximations of the curves.
and we obtain the following approximations.
or

log a if << a,

log h G (i )h log a + log 2 if = a, ,

log if >> a

0 if << a,

W
1
arg G (i ) 4 + 2 log a if a, ,

if >> a
2
Notice that a first order system behaves like an integrator for high fre-
quencies. Compare with the Bode plot in Figure 3.18.
TU
EXAMPLE 3.13BODE PLOT OF A SECOND ORDER SYSTEM

G (s) = s2 + 2a s + a2
We have
G (i ) = a2 2 + 2i a
JN
106

Hence
1
log h G (i )h = log ( 4 + 2a2 2 (2 2 1) + a4 )
2
arg G (i ) = arctan 2 a /(a2 2 )
Notice that the smallest value of the magnitude min h G (i )h = 1/2 is

obtained for = a The gain is thus constant for small . It has an asymp-
tote with zero slope for low frequencies. For large values of the gain is
proportional to 2 , which means that the gain curve has an asymptote
with slope 2. The phase is zero for low frequencies and approaches 180
for large frequencies. The curves can be approximated with the following
piece-wise linear expressions
ld

2 log a if << a,

log h G (i )h 2 log a + log 2 if = a, ,

2 log if >> a

0 if << a,

or
a
arg G (i ) + if = a, ,

2 a

if >> a
The Bode Plot is shown in Figure 3.20, the piece-wise linear approxima-
W
tions are shown in dashed lines.
Sketching a Bode Plot

It is easy to sketch the asymptotes of the gain curves of a Bode plot. This
is often done in order to get a quick overview of the frequency response.
The following procedure can be used
Factor the numerator and denominator of the transfer functions.
The poles and zeros are called break points because they correspond
TU
to the points where the asymptotes change direction.

Determine break points sort them in increasing frequency
Start with low frequencies
Draw the low frequency asymptote
Go over all break points and note the slope changes
JN
107

Chapter 3. Dynamics
2
10
h G (i )h
10
1
0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10
200
arg G (i )
150
100
50
0
1 0 1
10 10 10

ld
Figure 3.20 Bode plot of a second order factor with = 0.05 (dotted), 0.1, 0.2, 0.5
and 1.0 (dash-dotted). The dashed lines show the piece-wise linear approximations
of the curves.
A crude sketch of the phase curve is obtained by using the rela-
or
tion that, for systems with no RHP poles or zeros, one unit slope
corresponds to a phase of 90
We illustrate the procedure with the transfer function
200(s + 1) 1+s
G ( s) = =
s(s + 10)(s + 200) 10s(1 + 0.1s)(1 + 0.01s)
W
The break points are 0.01, 0.1, 1. For low frequencies the transfer function
can be approximated by
1
G ( s)
10s
Following the procedure we get
The low frequencies the system behaves like an integrator with gain
TU
0.1. The low frequency asymptote thus has slope -1 and it crosses
the axis of unit gain at = 0.1.
The first break point occurs at = 0.01. This break point corre-
sponds to a pole which means that the slope decreases by one unit
to -2 at that frequency.
The next break point is at = 0.1 this is also a pole which means
that the slope decreases to -3.
JN
108

0
Gain
10
1
10
2
10
3
10
1 0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10 10

Phase
0
ld
50
100
150
1 0 1 2 3
or
10 10 10 10 10

Figure 3.21 Illustrates how the asymptotes of the gain curve of the Bode plot can
be sketched. The dashed curves show the asymptotes and the full lines the complete
plot.
The next break point is at = 1, since this is a zero the slope

W
increases by one unit to -2.
Figure 3.21 shows the asymptotes of the gain curve and the complete Bode
plot.
Gain and Phase Margins

The gain and phase margins can easily be found from the Bode plot of
the loop transfer function. Recall that the gain margin tells how much the
TU
gain has to be increased for the system to reach instability. To determine

the gain margin we first find the frequency pc where the phase is 180 .
This frequency is called the phase crossover frequency. The gain margin is
the inverse of the gain at that frequency. The phase margin tells how the
phase lag required for the system to reach instability. To determine the
phase margin we first determine the frequency gc where the gain of the
loop transfer function is one. This frequency is called the gain crossover
frequency. The phase margin is the phase of the loop transfer function
JN
109

Chapter 3. Dynamics
gain
1
10
0
10
1
10
1 0
10 10
phase
100
ld
120
140
160
180
200
or
1 0
10 10
Figure 3.22 Finding gain and phase margins from the Bode plot of the loop trans-
fer function.
W
at that frequency plus 180 . Figure 3.22 illustrates how the margins are
found in the Bode plot of the loop transfer function.
Bodes Relations
TU
Analyzing the Bode plots in the examples we find that there appears
to be a relation between the gain curve and the phase curve. Consider
e.g. the curves for the differentiator in Figure 3.17 and the integrator
in Figure 3.18. For the differentiator the slope is +1 and the phase is
constant pi/2 radians. For the integrator the slope is -1 and the phase
is pi/2. Bode investigated the relations between the curves and found
that there was a unique relation between amplitude and phase for many
systems. In particular he found the following relations for system with no
JN
110

poles and zeros in the right half plane.

Z
2 0 log h G (i )h log h G (i 0 )h
arg G (i 0 ) = d
0 2 02
Z +
1 d log h G (i )h 0
= log d
0 d log 0
d log h G (i )h

2 d log
Z
log h G (i )h 2 2 1 arg G (i ) 01 arg G (i 0 )
= 0 d
log h G (i 0 )h 0 2 02
Z +
2 2 d 1 arg G (i ) 0
= 0 log d
0 d 0
ld
(3.31)
The formula for the phase tells that the phase is a weighted average of
the logarithmic derivative of the gain, approximatively
d log h G (i )h
arg G (i ) (3.32)
2 d log
or
This formula implies that a slope of +1 corresponds to a phase of /2,
which holds exactly for the differentiator, see Figure 3.17. The exact for-
mula (3.31) says that the differentiated slope should be weighted by the
kernel Z +
0 2
log d =
0 0 2
Figure 3.23 is a plot of the kernel.
W
Minimum Phase and Non-minimum Phase
Bodes relations hold for systems that do not have poles and zeros in the
left half plane. Such systems are called minimum phase systems. One
nice property of these systems is that the phase curve is uniquely given
by the gain curve. These systems are also relatively easy to control. Other
systems have larger phase lag, i.e. more negative phase. These systems
are said to be non-minimum phase, because they have more phase lag
TU
than the equivalent minimum phase systems. Systems which do not have
minimum phase are more difficult to control. Before proceeding we will
give some examples.
EXAMPLE 3.14A TIME DELAY

The transfer function of a time delay of T units is
G (s) = esT
JN
111

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Weight
6
3
y
0
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
x
Figure 3.23 The weighting kernel in Bodes formula for computing the phase from
ld
the gain.
This transfer function has the property
h G (i )h = 1, arg G (i ) = T
or
Notice that the gain is one. The minimum phase system which has unit
gain has the transfer function G (s) = 1. The time delay thus has an
additional phase lag of T. Notice that the phase lag increases with in-
creasing frequency. Figure 3.24
It seems intuitively reasonable that it is not possible to obtain a fast
response of a system with time delay. We will later show that this is
indeed the case.
W
Next we will consider a system with a zero in the right half plane
EXAMPLE 3.15SYSTEM WITH A RHP ZERO

Consider a system with the transfer function
as
G ( s) =
a+s

TU

h G (i )h = 1, arg G (i ) = 2 arctan
a
gain has the transfer function G (s) = 1. In Figure 3.25 we show the Bode
plot of the transfer function. The Bode plot resembles the Bode plot for a
time delay which is not surprising because the exponential function esT
JN
112

1
Gain
10
0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10

Phase
0
ld
100
200
300
400
1 0 1
or
10 10 10

Figure 3.24 Bode plot of a time delay which has the transfer function G (s) = es .
can be approximated by
W
1 sT /2
esT =
1 + sT /2
The largest phase lag of a system with a zero in the RHP is however
pi.
We will later show that the presence of a zero in the right half plane
severely limits the performance that can be achieved. We can get an intu-
TU
itive feel for this by considering the step response of a system with a right
half plane zero. Consider a system with the transfer function G (s) that
has a zero at s = in the right half plane. Let h be the step response
of the system. The Laplace transform of the step response is given by
Z
G ( s) t
H ( s) = = est h(t)dt
s 0
JN
113

Chapter 3. Dynamics
1
Gain
10
0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10

Phase
0
ld
100
200
300
400
1 0 1
or
10 10 10

as
Figure 3.25 Bode plot of a the transfer function G (s) = .
a+s
Since G ( ) is zero we have

Z
W
t
0= e t h(t)dt
0
Since e t is positive it follows that the step response h(t) must be neg-
ative for some t. This is illustrated in Figure 3.26 which shows the step
response of a system having a zero in the right half plane. Notice that the
output goes in the wrong direction initially. This is sometimes referred to
as inverse response. It seems intuitively clear that such systems are diffi-
cult to control fast. This is indeed the case as will be shown in Chapter 5.
TU
We have thus found that systems with time delays and zeros in the right
half plane have similar properties. Next we will consider a system with a
right half plane pole.
EXAMPLE 3.16SYSTEM WITH A RHP POLE

s+a
G ( s) =
sa
JN
114

0.5
0.5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.26 Step response of a system with a zero in the right half plane. The
6(s + 1)
system has the transfer function G (s) = .
s2 + 5s + 6
ld
a
h G (i )h = 1, arg G (i ) = 2 arctan

gain has the transfer function G (s) = 1. In Figure 3.27 we show the Bode
or
plot of the transfer function.
Comparing the Bode plots for systems with a right half plane pole
and a right half plane zero we find that the additional phase lag appears
at high frequencies for a system with a right half plane zero and at low
frequencies for a system with a right half plane pole. This means that
there are significant differences between the systems. When there is a
right half plane pole high frequencies must be avoided by making the
W
system slow. When there is a right half plane zero low frequencies must
be avoided and it is necessary to control these systems rapidly. This will
be discussed more in Chapter 5.
It is a severe limitation to have poles and zeros in the right half plane.
Dynamics of this type should be avoided by redesign of the system. The
zeros of a system can also be changed by moving sensors or by introducing
additional sensors. Unfortunately systems which are non-minimum phase
are not uncommon i real life. We end this section by giving a few examples.
TU
EXAMPLE 3.17HYDRO ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION

The transfer function from tube opening to electric power in a hydroelec-
tric power station has the form
P ( s) P0 1 2sT
=
A( s ) A0 1 + sT
where T is the time it takes sound to pass along the tube.
JN
115

Chapter 3. Dynamics
1
Gain
10
0
10
1
10
1 0 1
10 10 10

Phase
0
ld
50
100
150
1 0 1
or
10 10 10

s+a
Figure 3.27 Bode plot of a the transfer function G (s) = which has a pole
sa
in the right half plane.
W
EXAMPLE 3.18LEVEL CONTROL IN STEAM GENERATORS
Consider the problem of controlling the water level in a steam generator.
The major disturbance is the variation of steam taken from the unit. When
more steam is fed to the turbine the pressure drops. There is typically a
mixture of steam and water under the water level. When pressure drops
the steam bubbles expand and the level increases momentarily. After some
time the level will decrease because of the mass removed from the system.
TU
EXAMPLE 3.19FLIGHT CONTROL

The transfer function from elevon to height in an airplane is non-minimum
phase. When the elevon is raised there will be a force that pushes the rear
of the airplane down. This causes a rotation which gives an increase of
the angle of attack and an increase of the lift. Initially the aircraft will
however loose height. The Wright brothers understood this and used con-
trol surfaces in the front of the aircraft to avoid the effect.
JN
116

3.6 State Models
EXAMPLE 3.20BACKING A CAR

Consider backing a car close to a curb. The transfer function from steer-
ing angle to distance from the curve is non-minimum phase. This is a
mechanism that is similar to the aircraft.
EXAMPLE 3.21REVENUE FROM DEVELOPMENT

The relation between revenue development effort in a new product devel-
opment is a non-minimum phase system. This means that such a system
is very difficult to control tightly.
3.6 State Models
ld
The state is a collection of variables that summarize the past of a sys-
tem for the purpose of prediction the future. For an engineering system
the state is composed of the variables required to account for storage of
mass, momentum and energy. An key issue in modeling is to decide how
accurate storage has to be represented. The state variables are gathered
in a vector, the state vector x. The control variables are represented by
or
another vector u and the measured signal by the vector y. A system can
then be represented by the model
dx
= f ( x, u)
dt (3.33)
y = g( x, u)
W
The dimension of the state vector is called the order of the system.
The system is called time-invariant because the functions f and g do not
depend explicitly on time t. It is possible to have more general time-
varying systems where the functions do depend on time. The model thus
consists of two functions. The function f gives the velocity of the state
vector as a function of state x, control u and time t and the function g
gives the measured values as functions of state x, control u and time t. The
function f is called the velocity function and the function g is called the
sensor function or the measurement function. A system is called linear
TU
if the functions f and g are linear in x and u. A linear system can thus
be represented by
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx + Du
where A, B, C and D are constant varying matrices. Such a system is
said to be linear and time-invariant, or LTI for short. The matrix A is
JN
117

Chapter 3. Dynamics
ld
Figure 3.28 An inverted pendulum. The picture should be mirrored.
called the dynamics matrix, the matrix B is called the control matrix, the
matrix C is called the sensor matrix and the matrix D is called the direct
term. Frequently systems will not have a direct term indicating that the
or
control signal does not influence the output directly. We will illustrate
by a few examples.
EXAMPLE 3.22THE DOUBLE INTEGRATOR

Consider a system described by

dx 0 1
W
=
x + 0 1u
dt 0 0 (3.34)

y = 1 0x
This is a linear time-invariant system of second order with no direct term.

TU
EXAMPLE 3.23THE INVERTED PENDULUM

Consider the inverted pendulum in Figure 3.28. The state variables are
the angle = x1 and the angular velocity d / dt = x2 , the control variable
is the acceleration ug of the pivot, and the output is the angle .
Newtons law of conservation of angular momentum becomes
d2
J = mg l sin + mul cos
dt2
JN
118

3.6 State Models
R L +
M J
u M e
D
i
(a) (b)
Figure 3.29 Schematic diagram of an electric motor.
ld
Introducing x1 = and x2 = d / dt the state equations become

x2
dx

= mg l mlu
dt sin x1 + cos x1
J J
or
y = x1
p
It is convenient to normalize the equation by choosing J / mg l as the
unit of time. The equation then becomes

dx x2
=

dt sin x1 + u cos x1 (3.35)
W
y = x1
This is a nonlinear time-invariant system of second order.
EXAMPLE 3.24AN ELECTRIC MOTOR

A schematic picture of an electric motor is shown in Figure 3.29 Energy
stored is stored in the capacitor, and the inductor and momentum is stored
TU
in the rotor. Three state variables are needed if we are only interested in
motor speed. Storage can be represented by the current I through the
rotor, the voltage V across the capacitor and the angular velocity of
the rotor. The control signal is the voltage E applied to the motor. A
momentum balance for the rotor gives
d
J + D = kI
dt
JN
119

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Figure 3.30 A schematic picture of a water tank.
ld
and Kirchoffs laws for the electric circuit gives
dI d
E = RI + L +V k
dt dt
dV
or
I=C
dt
Introducing the state variables x1 = , x2 = V , x3 = I and the control

variable u = E the equations for the motor can be written as
D
J 0 k
0

J

dx
1

1 0 0 x
=
0 0
x +
0 u y = (3.36)
1
W
dt
kD
C

k2
JL L1 JL
R
L L
This is a linear time-invariant system with three state variables and one
input.
EXAMPLE 3.25THE WATER TANK

Consider a tank with water where the input is the inflow and there is
TU
free outflow, see Figure 3.30 Assuming that the density is constant a
mass balance for the tank gives
dV
= qin qout
dt
The outflow is given by p

qout = a 2g h
JN
120

3.6 State Models
There are several possible choices of state variables. One possibility is to

characterize the storage of water by the height of the tank. We have the
following relation between height h and volume
Z h
V = A( x)dx
0
Simplifying the equations we find that the tank can be described by

dh 1 p
= ( qin a 2g h)
dt A(h)
p
qout = a 2g h
The tank is thus a nonlinear system of first order.
ld
Equilibria
To investigate a system we will first determine the equilibria. Consider
the system given by (3.33) which is assumed to be time-invariant. Let the
control signal be constant u = u0 . The equilibria are states x0 such that
the dx/ dt = 0. Hence
f ( x0 , u0 ) = 0
or
Notice that there may be several equilibria.
For second order systems the state equations can be visualized by plot-
ting the velocities for all points in the state space. This graph is called the
phase plane shows the behavior qualitative. The equilibria corresponds to
points where the velocity is zero. We illustrate this with an example.
EXAMPLE 3.26THE PHASE PLANE

W
Consider the
dx x x23
2
=

dt x1 x22
The equilibria are given by
x2 x23 = 0
x1 x22 = 0
There are three equilibria:
TU
x1 = 1 x2 = 1
x1 = 1 x2 = 1
x1 = 0 x2 = 0
The phase plane is shown in Figure 3.31. The phase plane is a good
visualization of solutions for second order systems. It also illustrates that
nonlinear systems can be interpreted as a vector field or a flow.
JN
121

Chapter 3. Dynamics
3
x=yy
2
y=xy
1.5
0.5
0
y
0.5
1.5
ld
2
3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2

x
Figure 3.31 Phase plane for the second order system dx1 /dt = x2 x23 ,dx2 /dt =
x1 x22 .
Linearization
or
Nonlinear systems are unfortunately difficult. It is fortunate that many
aspects of control can be understood from linear models. This is particu-
larly true for regulation problems where it is intended to keep variables
close to specified values. When deviations are small the nonlinearities can
be approximated by linear functions. With efficient control the deviations
W
are small and the approximation works even better. In this section we will
show how nonlinear dynamics systems are approximated. We will start
with an example that shows how static systems are approximated.
EXAMPLE 3.27LINEARIZATION OF STATIC SYSTEM

Consider the system
y = g(u)
A Taylor series expansion around u = u0 gives
TU
y = g(u0 ) + gP (u0 )(u u0 ) + . . .
The linearized model is
y y0 = gP (u0 )(u u0 )
The linearized model thus replaces the nonlinear curve by its tangent at
the operating point.
JN
122

3.6 State Models
Linearization of dynamic systems is done in the same way. We start by

determining the appropriate equilibria. The nonlinear systems are then
approximated using Taylor series expansions. Consider the system
dx
= f ( x, u)
dt
y = g( x, u)
Consider small deviations from the equilibrium!
x = x0 + x, u = u0 + u, y = y0 + y
Make a series expansion of the differential equation and neglect terms of
ld
second and higher order. This gives
dx Vf Vf
= f ( x0 + x, u0 + u) f ( x0 , u0 ) + ( x0 , u0 ) x + ( x0 , u0 ) u
dt Vx Vu
Vg Vg
y = g( x0 + x, u0 + u) y0 + ( x0 , u0 ) x + ( x0 , u0 ) u
Vx Vu
We have f ( x0 , u0 ) = 0 because x0 is an equilibrium and we find the fol-
or
lowing approximation for small deviations around the equilibrium.
d( x x0 )
= A( x x0 ) + B (u u0 )
dt
y y0 = C ( x x0 ) + D (u u0 )
where
W
Vf Vf
A= ( x0 , u0 ) B= ( x0 , u0 )
Vx Vu
Vg Vg
C= ( x0 , u0 ) D= ( x0 , u0 )
Vx Vu
The linearized equation is thus a linear time-invariant system, compare
with (3.37). It is common practice to relabel variables and simply let x, y
and u denote deviations from the equilibrium.
TU
We illustrate with a few examples
EXAMPLE 3.28LINEARIZATION OF THE WATER TANK

dh 1 p
= ( qin a 2g h)
dt A(h)
p
qout = a 2g h
JN
123

Chapter 3. Dynamics
To determine the equilibrium we assume that the inflow is constant qin =

q0 . It follows that
p
qout = qin = q0 = a 2g h0
q20
h0 =
2g a2
Let A0 be the cross section A at level h0 , introduce the deviations. The
linearized equations are

d h a 2g h0 1
= h+ qin
dt 2A h A0
0 0
a 2g h0 q0
qout = h = h
h0 h0
ld
The parameter
2A0 h0 Total water volume [m3 ]
T= =2
q0 Flow rate [m3 /s]
is called the time constant of the system. Notice that T /2 is the time it
takes to fill the volume A0 h0 with the steady state flow rate q0
or
EXAMPLE 3.29LINEARIZATION OF THE INVERTED PENDULUM
Consider the inverted pendulum in Example 3.23 which is described by
(3.35). If the control signal is zero the equilibria are given by
x2 = 0
sin x1 = 0
W
i.e. x2 = / dt and x1 = = 0 and x1 = = . The first equilibrium corre-
sponds to the pendulum standing upright and the second to the pendulum
hanging straight down. We have

V f ( x, 0)
0 1
Vf

0

= , = ,
Vx cos x1 u sin x1 0 Vu cos x1
Evaluating the derivatives at the upper equilibrium u = 0, x1 = 0 and
x2 = 0 we get
0 1
TU
A=
, B = 0 1.
1 0
For the equilibrium when then pendulum is hanging down, u = 0, x1 =
and x2 = 0 we have instead

0 1
A=
, B = 0 1 .
1 0
JN
124

3.7 Linear Time-Invariant Systems

The model
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt (3.37)
y = Cx + Du
is one of the standard models in control. In this section we will present
an in depth treatment. Let us first recall that x is the state vector, u the
control, y the measurement. The model is nice because it can represent
systems with many inputs and many outputs in a very compact form.
Because of the advances in numeric linear algebra there are also much
powerful software for making computations. Before going into details we
will present some useful results about matrix functions. It is assumed
ld
that the reader is familiar with the basic properties of matrices.
Matrix Functions
Some basic facts about matrix functions are summarized in this section.
Let A be a square matrix, since it is possible to compute powers of matrices
we can define a matrix polynomial as follows
or
f ( A) = a0 I + a1 A + . . . + an An
Similarly if the function f ( x) has a converging series expansion we can

also define the following matrix function
f ( A) = a0 I + a1 A + . . . + an An + . . .
The matrix exponential is a nice useful example which can be defined as

W
1 1
eAt = I + At + ( At)2 + . . . + An tn + . . .
2 n!
Differentiating this expression we find
deAt 1 1
= A + A2 t + A3 t2 + . . . + An tn1 + . . .
dt 2 (n 1)!
1 1
= A(= I + At + ( At)2 + . . . + An tn + . . .) = AeAt
TU
2 n!
The matrix exponential thus has the property
deAt
= AeAt = eAt A (3.38)
dt
Matrix functions do however have other interesting properties. One result
is the following.
JN
125

Chapter 3. Dynamics
THEOREM 3.3CAYLEY-HAMILTON
Let the n n matrix A have the characteristic equation
det( I A) = n + a1 n1 + a2 n2 . . . + an = 0
then it follows that
det( I A) = An + a1 An1 + a2 An2 . . . + an I = 0
A matrix satisfies its characteristic equation.
PROOF 3.2
If a matrix has distinct eigenvalues it can be diagonalized and we have
A = T 1 T. This implies that
ld
A2 = T 1 T T 1 T = T 1 2 T
A3 = T 1 T A2 = T 1 T T 1 2 T = T 1 3 T
and that An = T 1 n T. Since i is an eigenvalue it follows that
ni + a1 in1 + a2 in2 . . . + an = 0
or
Hence
ni + a1 in1 + a2 in2 . . . + an I = 0
Multiplying by T 1 from the left and T from the right and using the
relation Ak = T 1 k T now gives
An + a1 An1 + a2 An2 . . . + an I = 0
W
The result can actually be sharpened. The minimal polynomial of a
matrix is the polynomial of lowest degree such that g( A) = 0. The char-
acteristic polynomial is generically the minimal polynomial. For matrices
with common eigenvalues the minimal polynomial may, however, be dif-
ferent from the characteristic polynomial. The matrices

1 0 1 1
A1 = , A2 =
0 1 0 1
TU
have the minimal polynomials
g1 ( ) = 1, g2 ( ) = ( 1)2
A matrix function can thus be written as
f ( A) = c0 I + c1 A + . . . + ck1 Ak1
where k is the degree of the minimal polynomial.

JN
126

Solving the Equations

Using the matrix exponential the solution to (3.37) can be written as
Z t
x(t) = eAt x(0) + eA(t ) Bu( )d (3.39)
0
To prove this we differentiate both sides and use the property 3.38) of the
matrix exponential. This gives
Z t
dx
= AeAt x(0) + AeA(t ) Bu( )d + Bu(t) = Ax + Bu
dt 0
ld
which prove the result. Notice that the calculation is essentially the same
as for proving the result for a first order equation.
Input-Output Relations
It follows from Equations (3.37) and (3.39) that the input output relation
is given by
y(t) = CeAt x(0) +

Z
0
t
or
eA(t ) Bu( )d + Du(t)
Taking the Laplace transform of (3.37) under the assumption that x(0) =
0 gives
W
sX (s) = AX (s) + BU (s)
Y (s) = C X (s) + DU (s)
Solving the first equation for X (s) and inserting in the second gives
X (s) = [sI A]1 BU (s)

TU
Y (s) = C [sI A]1 B + D U (s)
The transfer function is thus
G (s) = C [sI A]1 B + D (3.40)
we illustrate this with an example.

JN
127

Chapter 3. Dynamics
EXAMPLE 3.30TRANSFER FUNCTION OF INVERTED PENDULUM

The linearized model of the pendulum in the upright position is charac-
terized by the matrices

0 1 0
A=

,
B= , C = 1 0, D = 0.
1 0 1
The characteristic polynomial of the dynamics matrix A is

s 1
det (sI A) = det

= s2 1
1 s
ld
Hence

1

s 1

(sI A)1 = det
s 1
2 1 s
The transfer function is thus
1 s 1 1 0
or
1 1
G (s) = C [sI A] 1
B= 2 0
= 2
s 1 1 s 1 s 1
Transfer function and impulse response remain invariant with coordi-

nate transformations.
W
1
g( At
t) = Ce B = CT 1 eT AT t T B = CeAt B = g(t)
and
G (s) = C (sI A )1 B = CT 1 (sI T AT 1 )1 T B

X S = C (sI A)1 B = G (s)
TU
Consider the system
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx
To find the input output relation we can differentiate the output and we
JN
128

obtain
y = Cx
dy dx
=C = C Ax + C Bu
dt dt
d2 y dx du du
= CA + CB = C A2 x + C ABu + C B
dt2 dt dt dt
..
.
dn y n1 n2 du dn1 u
= C A n
x + C A Bu + C A B + . . . + C B
dtn dt dtn1
Let ak be the coefficients of the characteristic equation. Multiplying the
first equation by an , the second by an1 etc we find that the input-output
ld
relation can be written as.
+ a1 + . . . + a n y = B1 + B2 + . . . + Bn u,
dtn dtn1 dtn1 dtn2
where the matrices Bk are given by.
B1 = C B
or
B2 = C AB + a1 C B
B3 = C A2 B + a1 C AB + a2 C B
..
.
Bn = C An1 B + a1 C An1 B + . . . + an1 C B
W
Coordinate Changes
The components of the input vector u and the output vector y are unique
physical signals, but the state variables depend on the coordinate system
chosen to represent the state. The elements of the matrices A, B and
C also depend on the coordinate system. The consequences of changing
coordinate system will now be investigated. Introduce new coordinates z
by the transformation z = T x, where T is a regular matrix. It follows
from (3.37) that
TU
dz
= T ( Ax + Bu) = T AT 1 z + T Bu = Az
+ Bu

dt
y = Cx + DU = CT 1 z + Du = Cz + Du
The transformed system has the same form as (3.37) but the matrices A,
B and C are different
A = T AT 1 , B = T B , C = CT 1 , D = D (3.41)
JN
129

Chapter 3. Dynamics
It is interesting to investigate if there are special coordinate systems that

gives systems of special structure.
The Diagonal Form Some matrices can be transformed to diagonal

form, one broad class is matrices with distinct eigenvalues. For such ma-
trices it is possible to find a matrix T such that the matrix T AT 1 is a
diagonal i.e.

0
1

2

1

T AT = ==

. .

.

0 n
ld
The transformed system then becomes

1 0 1

dz

2

2

=

z +

.

u
dt
. .

.

.

.
(3.42)

or
0 n n

y = 1 2 . . . n z + Du
The transfer function of the system is
X
n
i i
G ( s) = +D
W
s i
i=1
Notice appearance of eigenvalues of matrix A in the denominator.
Reachable Canonical Form Consider a system described by the n-th

order differential equation
TU
dn y dn1 y dn1 u
+ a1 + . . . + a n y = b1 + . . . + bn u
dtn dtn1 dtn1
To find a representation in terms of state model we first take Laplace

transforms
b1 sn1 + . . . + b1 s + bn b1 sn1 + . . . + b1 s + bn
Y ( s) = U ( s) = U ( s)
sn + a1 s n 1 + . . . + an1 s + an A( s )
JN
130

Introduce the state variables
sn1
X 1 ( s) = U ( s)
A( s )
sn2 1
X 2 ( s) = U ( s) = X 1 ( s)
A( s ) s
sn2 1 1 (3.43)
X 3 ( s) = U ( s) = 2 X 1 ( s) = X 2 ( s)
A( s ) s s
..
.
1 1 1
X n ( s) = U (s) = n1 X 1 (s) = X n1 (s)
A( s ) s s
ld
Hence
(sn + a1 sn1 + . . . + an1 s + an ) X 1 (s) = sn1 U (s)

1 1
sX 1 (s) + a1 X 1 (s) + a2 X 1 (s) + . . . + an n1 = U ( s)
s s X 1 ( s)
or
sX 1 (s) + a1 X 2 (s) + a2 X 2 (s) + . . . + an X n (s) = U (s)
Consider the equation for X 1 (s), dividing by sn1 we get
sX 1 (s) + a1 X 2 (s) + a2 X 2 (s) + . . . + an X n (s) = U (s)

W
Conversion to time domain gives
dx1
= a1 x1 a2 x2 . . . an xn + u
dt
(3.43) also implies that

TU
1
X 2 ( s) = X 1 ( s)
s
1
X 3 ( s) = X 2 ( s)
s
..
.
1
X n (s) = X n1
s
JN
131

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Transforming back to the time domain gives
dx2
= x1
dt
dx3
= x2
dt
..
.
dxn
= xn1
dt
With the chosen state variables the output is given by
Y (s) = b1 X 1 (s) + b2 X 2 (s) + . . . + bn X n (s)
ld
Collecting the parts we find that the equation can be written as

a1 a2 . . . an1 an 1

1 0 0 0

0

dz

or
=
0 1 0 0
z +

0
u
dt
.

.
(3.44)

. .

.
.

0 0 1 0 0

y = b1 b2 . . . bn1 bn z + Du
The system has the characteristic polynomial

W

s + a1 a2 ... an1 an

1 s 0 0

Dn (s) = det
0 1 0 0

..

.

0 0 1 s
TU
Expanding the determinant by the last row we find that the following
recursive equation for the polynomial Dn (s).
Dn (s) = sDn1(s) + an
It follows from this equation that
Dn (s) = sn + a1 sn1 + . . . + an1 s + an

JN
132

Transfer function
b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
G ( s) = +D
sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an
The numerator of the transfer function G (s) is the characteristic polyno-

mial of the matrix A. This form is called the reachable canonical for for
reasons that will be explained later in this Section.
Observable Canonical Form The reachable canonical form is not the

only way to represent the transfer function
b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
G ( s) =
sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an
ld
another representation is obtained by the following recursive procedure.
Introduce the Laplace transform X 1 of first state variable as
b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
X1 = Y = U
sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an
or
then
(sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an ) X 1 = (b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn ) U
Dividing by sn1 and rearranging the terms we get
sX 1 = a1 X 1 + b1 U + X 2
W
where

sn1 X 2 = (a2 sn2 + a3 sn3 + . . . + an X 1
+ b2 sn2 + b3 sn3 + . . . + bn ) U
Dividing by sn2 we get
sX 2 = a2 X 2 + b2 U + X 3
TU
where

sn2 X 3 = (a3 sn3 + a4n4 . . . + an X 1 + b3 sn3 + . . . + bn ) U
Dividing by sn3 gives
sX 3 = a3 X 1 ?b3 U + X 4
JN
133

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Proceeding in this we we finally obtain
X n = an X 1 + b1 U
Collecting the different parts and converting to the time domain we find
that the system can be written as

a1 1 0 ... 0 b1

a2 0 1 0
b2

dz
..

..

u
= .
z +
.

dt

(3.45)

a n1 0 0 1

bn1

an 0 0 0 bn

ld
y = 1 0 0 . . . 0 z + Du
Transfer function
b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
G ( s) = +D
sn + a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an
or
The numerator of the transfer function G (s) is the characteristic polyno-
mial of the matrix A.
Consider a system described by the n-th order differential equation
dn y dn1 y dn1 u
+ a1 + . . . + a n y = b1 + . . . + bn u
dtn dtn1 dtn1
Reachability
W
We will now disregard the measurements and focus on the evolution of
the state which is given by
sx
= Ax + Bu
dt
where the system is assumed to be or order n. A fundamental question
is if it is possible to find control signals so that any point in the state
space can be reached. For simplicity we assume that the initial state of
TU
the system is zero, the state of the system is then given by

Z t Z t
x(t) = eA(t ) Bu( )d = eA( ) Bu(t )d
0 0
It follows from the theory of matrix functions that
eA = I 0 (s) + A 1 (s) + . . . + An1 n1 (s)

JN
134

and we find that

Z t Z t
x(t) = B 0 ( )u(t )d + AB 1 ( )u(t )d +
0 0
Z t
. . . + An1 B n1 ( )u(t )d
0
The right hand is thus composed of a linear combination of the columns

of the matrix.
Wr = B AB . . . An1 B
To reach all points in the state space it must thus be required that there
are n linear independent columns of the matrix Wc . The matrix is therefor
called the reachability matrix. We illustrate by an example.
ld
EXAMPLE 3.31REACHABILITY OF THE INVERTED PENDULUM
The linearized model of the inverted pendulum is derived in Example 3.29.
The dynamics matrix and the control matrix are

0 1 0
A=
, B =

or
1 0 1
The reachability matrix is

0 1
Wr =

(3.46)
1 0
This matrix has full rank and we can conclude that the system is reach-
W
able.
Next we will consider a the system in (3.44), i.e

a1 a2 . . . an1 an 1

0
0
1

0 0

dz
0 0

0

=
1 0
z +
u = Az + Bu

dt
..
..

.
.

0 0 1 0 0
TU
The inverse of the reachability matrix is

1 a1 a2 . . . an

0 1 a1 1 . . . an1

1 =

(3.47)
W r
..

.

0 0 0 ... 1
JN
135

Chapter 3. Dynamics
To show this we consider the product

B A B A n1 B Wr1 = w0 w1 wn1
where
w0 = B
w1 = a1 B + A B
..
.
+ + A n1 B
wn1 = an1 B + an2 AB
The vectors wk satisfy the relation
wk = ak + w k1
ld
Iterating this relation we find that

1 0 0 ... 0

0 1 0 ... 0

w0 w1 wn1 =

.

..

or
0 0 0 ... 1
r.
which shows that the matrix (3.47) is indeed the inverse of W
Systems That are Not Reachable It is useful of have an intuitive

understanding of the mechanisms that make a system unreachable. An
example of such a system is given in Figure 3.32. The system consists
of two identical systems with the same input. The intuition can also be
W
demonstrated analytically. We demonstrate this by a simple example.
EXAMPLE 3.32NON-REACHABLE SYSTEM

Assume that the systems in Figure 3.32 are of first order. The complete
system is then described by
dx1
= x1 + u
dt
dx2
= x2 + u
TU
dt
The reachability matrix is

1 1
Wr =

1 1
This matrix is singular and the system is not reachable.
JN
136

S
u
Figure 3.32 A non-reachable system.
Coordinate Changes
ld
It is interesting to investigate how the reachability matrix transforms
when the coordinates are changed. Consider the system in (3.37). Assume
that the coordinates are changed to z = T x. It follows from (3.41) that
the dynamics matrix and the control matrix for the transformed system
are
A = T AT 1
r = B
W
B = T B
A B ...
or
The reachability matrix for the transformed system then becomes

A n1 B =
W
We have
A B = T AT 1 T B = T AB
A 2 B = (T AT 1 )2 T B = T AT 1 T AT 1 T B = T A2 B
..
.
n
A B = T An B
TU
and we find that the reachability matrix for the transformed system has
the property

r = B
W A B ... A n1 B = T B AB ... An1 B = T Wr
This formula is very useful for finding the transformation matrix T.

JN
137

Chapter 3. Dynamics
Observability
When discussing reachability we neglected the output and focused on the
state. We will now discuss a related problem where we will neglect the
input and instead focus on the output. Consider the system
dx
= Ax
dt (3.48)
y = Cx
We will now investigate if it is possible to determine the state from ob-

servations of the output. This is clearly a problem of significant practical
interest, because it will tell if the sensors are sufficient.
The output itself gives the projection of the state on vectors that are
rows of the matrix C. The problem can clearly be solved if the matrix C
ld
is invertible. If the matrix is not invertible we can take derivatives of the
output to obtain.
dy sc
=C = C Ax
dt dt
From then derivative of the output we thus get the projections of the state
on vectors which are rows of the matrix C A. Proceeding in this way we
or
get
y

dy

C

dt

CA

d y C A2
2

= x

dt2

.

.

..

.

W
.
n1

C A n1

d y

dtn1
We thus find that the state can be determined if the matrix

C

CA

Wo = C A 2
(3.49)

.

TU
. .

n1

CA
has n independent rows. Notice that because of the Cayley-Hamilton equa-
tion it is not worth while to continue and take derivatives higher than
dn1 / dtn1 . The matrix Wo is called the observability matrix. A system is
called observable if the observability matrix has full rank. We illustrate
with an example.
JN
138

S
y

Figure 3.33 A non-observable system.
EXAMPLE 3.33OBSERVABILITY OF THE INVERTED PENDULUM
ld
The linearized model of inverted pendulum around the upright position
is described by (3.41). The matrices A and C are

0 1

A= , C = 1 0
1 0
The observability matrix is
or

1 0

Wo =
0 1
which has full rank. It is thus possible to compute the state from a mea-
surement of the angle.
W
A Non-observable System
It is useful to have an understanding of the mechanisms that make a
system unobservable. Such a system is shown in Figure 3.33. Next we
will consider the system in (3.45) on observable canonical form, i.e.

a1 1 0 ... 0 b1

a 0 1 0
b2
2
dz

TU
. .
=
..

z +

.
.

u
dt

an1 0 0 1

bn1

an 0 0 0 bn

y = 1 0 0... 0 z + Du
A straight forward but tedious calculation shows that the inverse of the
JN
139

Chapter 3. Dynamics
observability matrix has a simple form. It is given by

1 0 0 ... 0

a1 1 0 ... 0

Wo1 =
a2 a1 1 ... 0

..

.

an1 an2 an3 ... 1
This matrix is always invertible. The system is composed of two identical

systems whose outputs are added. It seems intuitively clear that it is
not possible to deduce the states from the output. This can also be seen
ld
formally.
Coordinate Changes
It is interesting to investigate how the observability matrix transforms
when the coordinates are changed. Consider the system in (3.37). Assume
that the coordinates are changed to z = T x. It follows from (3.41) that
or
the dynamics matrix and the output matrix are given by
A = T AT 1
C = CT 1
The observability matrix for the transformed system then becomes

W

C

C A

o =
W C A 2

.
..

n1

CA
TU
We have
C A = CT 1 T AT 1 = C AT 1
C A 2 = CT 1 (T AT 1 )2 = CT 1 T AT 1 T AT 1 = C A2 T 1
..
.
C A = C An T 1
n
JN
140

and we find that the observability matrix for the transformed system has
the property

C

C A

C A 2
1

Wo =
T = Wo T 1
.

.

.

n1

CA
This formula is very useful for finding the transformation matrix T.
Kalmans Decomposition
The concepts of reachability and observability make it possible understand
ld
the structure of a linear system. We first observe that the reachable states
form a linear subspace spanned by the columns of the reachability matrix.
By introducing coordinates that span that space the equations for a linear
system can be written as

d xc A11 A12 xc B1
or
= + u
dt xc 0 A22 xc 0
where the states xc are reachable and xc are non-reachable. Similarly

we find that the non-observable or quiet states are the null space of the
observability matrix. We can thus introduce coordinates so that the system
can be written as

W
d xo A11 0 xo
=
dt xo A21 A22 x0

xo
y = ( C1 0)
xo
where the states xo are observable and xo not observable (quiet) Combin-
ing the representations we find that a linear system can be transformed
TU
to the form

A11 0 A13 0 B1
A A24 B
dx 21 A22 A23 2
= x+ u
dt 0 0 A33 0 0
0 0 A43 A44 0
y = ( C1 0 C2 0)x
JN
141

Chapter 3. Dynamics
u y
Soc
-
Soc Soc-
--
Soc
Figure 3.34 Kalmans decomposition of a system.
ld
where the state vector has been partitioned as
T
xro
x
ro
x=
xro

xr o
Sr o reachable not observable

Sro
not reachable observable
or
A linear system can thus be decomposed into four subsystems.
Sro reachable and observable
W
Sro not reachable not observable
This decomposition is illustrated in Figure 3.34. By tracing the arrows in
the diagram we find that the input influences the systems Soc and Soc and
that the output is influenced by Soc and Soc . The system Soc is neither
connected to the input nor the output.
The transfer function of the system is
G (s) = C1 (sI A11 )1 B1 (3.50)

TU
It is thus uniquely given by the subsystem Sro .
The Cancellation Problem Kalmans decomposition resolves one of

the longstanding problems in control namely the problem of cancellation
of poles and zeros. To illustrate the problem we will consider a system
described by the equation.
JN
142

3.8 Summary
EXAMPLE 3.34CANCELLATION OF POLES AND ZEROS

dy du
y= u (3.51)
dt dt
Integrating this system we find that
y(t) = u(t) + cet
where c is a constant. The transfer function of the system is
Y ( s) s1
= =1
U ( s) s1
Since s is a complex variable the cancellation is clearly permissible and we
ld
find that the transfer function is G (s) = 1 and we have seemingly obtained
a contradiction because the system is not equivalent to the system
y(t) = u(t)
The problem is easily resolved by using the Kalman representation. In this

particular case the system has two subsystems Sro and Sro . The system
or
Sro is a static system with transfer function G (s) = 1 and the subsystem
which is observable but non reachable has the dynamics.
Sro
dx
=x
dt
W
Notice that cancellations typically appear when using Laplace trans-
forms because of the assumption that all initial values are zero. The con-
sequences are particularly serious when factors like s 1 are cancelled
because they correspond to exponentially growing signals. In the early
development of control cancellations were avoided by ad hoc rules forbid-
ding cancellation of factors with zeros in the right half plane. Kalmans
decomposition gives a very clear picture of what happens when poles and
zeros are cancelled.
TU
3.8 Summary
This chapter has summarized some properties of dynamical systems that
are useful for control. Both input-output descriptions and state descrip-
tions are given. Much of the terminology that is useful for control has also
been introduced.
JN
143

4
Simple Control Systems
ld
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter we will give simple examples of analysis and design of
control systems. We will start in Sections 4.2 and 4.3 with two systems
that can be handled using only knowledge of differential equations. Sec-
or
tion 4.2 deals with design of a cruise controller for a car. In Section 4.3
we discuss the dynamics of a bicycle, many of its nice properties are due
to a purely mechanical feedback which has emerged as a result of trial
and error over a long period of time. Section 3.3 is a suitable prepara-
tion for Sections 4.2 and 4.3. Differential equations are cumbersome for
more complicated problems and better tools are needed. Efficient meth-
ods for working with linear systems can be developed based on a basic
knowledge of Laplace transforms and transfer functions. Coupled with
W
block diagrams this gives a very efficient way to deal with linear systems.
The block diagram gives the overview and the behavior of the individual
blocks are described by transfer functions. The Laplace transforms make
it easy to manipulate the system formally and to derive relations between
different signals. This is one of the standard methods for working with
control systems. It is exploited in Section 4.4, which gives a systematic
way of designing PI controllers for first order systems. This section also
contains material required to develop an intuitive picture of the proper-
TU
ties of second order systems. Section 4.5 deals with design of PI and PID
controllers for second order systems. A proper background for Sections 4.4
and 4.5 is Section 3.4. Section 4.6 deals with the design problem for sys-
tems of arbitrary order. This section which requires more mathematical
maturity can be omitted in a first reading. For the interested reader it
gives, however, important insight into the design problem and the struc-
ture of stabilizing controllers. Section 4.6 summarizes the chapter and
JN
144

4.2 Cruise Control
Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of a car on a sloping road.
ld
outlines some important issues that should be considered.
4.2 Cruise Control
or
The purpose of cruise control is to keep the velocity of a car constant.
The driver drives the car at the desired speed, the cruise control system
is activated by pushing a button and the system then keeps the speed
constant. The major disturbance comes from changes of the slope of the
road which generates forces on the car due to gravity. There are also
disturbances due to air and rolling resistance. The cruise control system
W
measures the difference between the desired and the actual velocity and
generates a feedback signal which attempts to keep the error small in
spite of changes in the slope of the road. The feedback signal is sent to
an actuator which influences the throttle and thus the force generated by
the engine.
We will start by developing a mathematical model of the system. The
mathematical model should tell how the velocity of the car is influenced
by the throttle and the slope of the road. A schematic picture is shown in
Figure 4.1
TU
Modeling
We will model the system by a momentum balance. The major part of the
momentum is the product of the velocity v and the mass m of the car. There
are also momenta stored in the engine, in terms of the rotation of the crank
shaft and the velocities of the cylinders, but these are much smaller than
mv. Let denote the slope of the road, the momentum balance can be
JN
145

Chapter 4. Simple Control Systems
Slope of road
Desired velocity Throttle F Velocity

Controller Engine Body

Figure 4.2 Block diagram of a car with cruise control.
written as
dv
m + cv = F mg (4.1)
ld
dt
where the term cv describes the momentum loss due to air resistance and
rolling and F is the force generated by the engine. The retarding force
due to the slope of the road should similarly be proportional to the sine
of the angle but we have approximated sin . The consequence of the
approximations will be discussed later. It is also assumed that the force F
or
developed by the engine is proportional to the signal u sent to the throttle.
Introducing parameters for a particular car, an Audi in fourth gear, the
model becomes
dv
+ 0.02v = u 10 (4.2)
dt
where the control signal is normalized to be in the interval 0 u 1,
where u = 1 corresponds to full throttle. The model implies that with full
W
throttle in fourth gear the car cannot climb a road that is steeper than
10%, and that the maximum speed in 4th gear on a horizontal road is
v = 1/0.02 = 50 m/s (180 km/hour).
Since it is desirable that the controller should be able to maintain
constant speed during stationary conditions it is natural to choose a con-
troller with integral action. A PI controller is a reasonable choice. Such a
controller can be described by
Z t
TU
u = k(vr v) + ki (vr v( ))d (4.3)

0
A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 4.2. To understand how

the cruise control system works we will derive the equations for the closed
loop systems described by Equations (4.2) and (4.3) Since the effect of the
slope on the velocity is of primary interest we will derive an equation that
tells how the velocity error e = vr v depends on the slope of the road.
JN
146

4.2 Cruise Control
Assuming that vr is constant we find that
dv de d2 v d2 e
= , 2
= 2
dt dt dt dt
It is convenient to differentiate (4.3) to avoid dealing both with integrals

and derivatives. Differentiating the process model (4.2) the term du/ dt
can be eliminated and we find the following equation that describes the
closed loop system
d2 e de d
+ (0.02 + k) + ki e = 10 (4.4)
dt2 dt dt
We can first observe that if and e are constant the error is zero. This
ld
is no surprise since the controller has integral action, see the discussion
about the integral action Section 2.2.
To understand the effects of the controller parameters k and ki we
can make an analogy between (4.4) and the differential equation for a
mass-spring-damper system
or
d2 x dx
M +D + Kx = 0
dt2 dt
We can thus conclude that parameter k influences damping and that ki

influences stiffness.
The closed loop system (4.4) is of second order and it has the charac-
teristic polynomial
s2 + (0.02 + k)s + ki (4.5)
W
We can immediately conclude that the roots of this polynomial can be
given arbitrary values by choosing the controller parameters properly. To
find reasonable values we compare the characteristic polynomial with the
characteristic polynomial of the normalized second order polynomial
s2 + 2 0 s + 02 (4.6)
where denotes relative damping and 0 is the undamped natural fre-

TU
quency. The parameter 0 gives response speed, and determines the

shape of the response. Comparing the coefficients of the closed loop charac-
teristic polynomial (4.5) with the standard second order polynomial (4.6)
we find that the controller parameters are given by
k = 2 0 0.02
(4.7)
ki = 02
JN
147

2.5
Velocity error
2
1.5
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Time
0.5
0.4
Control signal
0.3
ld
0.2
0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Time
or
Figure 4.3 Simulation of a car with cruise control for a step change in the slope of
the road. The controllers are designed with relative damping = 1 and 0 = 0.05
(dotted), 0 = 0.1 (full) and 0 = 0.2 (dashed).
Since it is desirable that a cruise control system should respond to changes

in the slope in a smooth manner without oscillations it is natural to choose
= 1, which corresponds to critical damping. Then there is only one pa-
W
rameter 0 that has to be determined. The selection of this parameter is
a compromise between response speed and control actions. This is illus-
trated in Figure 4.3 which shows the velocity error and the control signal
for a simulation where the slope of the road suddenly changes by 4%. No-
tice that the largest velocity error decreases with increasing 0 , but also
that the control signal increases more rapidly. In the simple model (4.1) it
was assumed that the force responded instantaneously to the throttle. For
rapid changes there may be additional dynamics that has to be accounted
TU
for. There are also physical limitations to the rate of change of the force.
These limitations, which are not accounted for in the simple model (4.1),
limit the admissible value of 0 . Figure 4.3 shows the velocity error and
the control signal for a few values of 0 . A reasonable choice of 0 is
in the range of 0.1 to 0.2. The performance of the cruise control system
can be evaluated by comparing the behaviors of cars with and without
cruise control. This is done in Figure 4.4 which shows the velocity error
when the slope of the road is suddenly increased by 4%. Notice the drastic
JN
148

4.3 Bicycle Dynamics
20
Velocity error
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Time
Figure 4.4 Simulation of a car with (solid line) and without cruise control (dashed
line) for a step change of 4% in the slope of the road. The controller is designed for
0 = 0.1 and = 1.
ld
difference between the open and closed loop systems.
With the chosen parameters 0 = 0.2 and = 1 we have 2 0 = 0.2
and it follows from (4.7) that the parameter c = 0.02 has little influence
on the behavior of the closed loop system since it is an order of mag-
nitude smaller than 2 0 . Therefore it is not necessary to have a very
or
precise value of this parameter. This is an illustration of an important
and surprising property of feedback, namely that feedback systems can
be designed based on simplified models. This will be discussed extensively
in Chapter 5.
A cruise control system contains much more than an implementation
of the PI controller given by (4.3). The human-machine interface is par-
ticularly important because the driver must be able to activate and deac-
tivate the system and to change the desired velocity. There is also logic
W
for deactivating the system when braking, accelerating or shifting gear.

The bicycle is an ingenious device for recreation and transportation, which
has evolved over a long period of time. It is a very effective vehicle that is
extremely maneverable. Feedback is essential for understanding how the
TU
bicycle really works. In the bicycle there is no explicit control system with
sensing and actuation, instead control is accomplished by clever mechan-
ical design of the front fork which creates a feedback that under certain
conditions stabilizes the bicycle. It is worth mentioning that the literature
on bicycles is full of mistakes or misleading statements. We quote from
the book Bicycling Science by Whitt and Wilson:
The scientific literature (Timoshenko, Young, DenHartog et. al.) shows
JN
149

ld
Figure 4.5 Schematic picture of a bicycle. The top view is shown on the left and
the rear view on the right.
or
often complete disagreement even about fundamentals. One advocates
that a high center of mass improves stability, another concludes that
a low center of mass is desirable.
We start by developing a simple modeling that clearly shows that feedback

is an essential aspect of a bicycle.
W
Modeling
A detailed model of the bicycle is quite complicated. We will derive a
simplified model that captures many relevant balancing properties of the
bicycle. To understand how a bicycle works it is necessary to consider the
system consisting of the bicycle and the rider. The rider can influence
the bicycle in two ways by exerting a torque on the handle bar and by
leaning. We will neglect the lean and consider the rider as a rigid body,
firmly attached to the bicycle. A schematic picture of the bicycle is shown
TU
in Figure 4.5. To describe the dynamics we must account for the tilt of
the bicycle. We introduce a coordinate system fixed to the bicycle with
the x-axis through the contact points of the wheels with the ground, the
y-axis horizontal and the z-axis vertical, as shown in Figure 4.5. Let m
be the mass of the bicycle and the rider, J the moment of inertia of the
bicycle and the rider with respect to the x-axis. Furthermore let l be the
distance from the x-axis to the center of mass of bicycle and rider, the
tilt angle and F the component of the force acting on rider and the bicycle.
JN
150

A momentum balance around the x-axis gives

d2
J = mg l sin + Fl cos (4.8)
dt2
The force F has two components, a centripetal force and an inertia force
due to the acceleration of the coordinate system. The force can be de-
termined from kinematic relations, see Figure 4.5. To describe these we
introduce the steering angle , and the forward velocity V0 . Furthermore
the distance between the contact point of the front and rear wheel is b
and the distance between the contact point of the rear wheel and the
projection of the center of mass of bicycle and rider is a. To simplify the
equations it is assumed that the angles and are so small that sines
and tangent are equal to the angle and cosine is equal to the one. Viewed
ld
from the top as shown in Figure 4.5 the bicycle has its center of rotation
at a distance b/ from the rear wheel. The centripetal force is
mV02
Fc =
b
The y-component of the velocity of the center of mass is
or
aV0
V y = V0 =
b
where a is the distance from the contact point of the back wheel to the
projection of the center of mass. The inertial force due to the acceleration
of the coordinate system is thus
amV0 d
Fi =
W
b dt
Inserting the total force F = Fc + Fi into (4.8) we find that the bicycle
can be described by
d2 amV0 l d mV02 l
J 2
= mg l + + (4.9)
dt b dt b
This equation has the characteristic equation
TU
Js2 mg l = 0
which has the roots r

mg l
s=
J
The system is unstable, because the characteristic equation has one root
in the right half plane. We may therefore believe that the rider must
actively stabilize the bicycle all the time.
JN
151

Figure 4.6 Schematic picture of the front fork.
ld
The Front Fork
The bicycle has a front fork of rather intriguing design, see Figure 4.6.
The front fork is angled and shaped so that the contact point of the wheel
with the road is behind the axis of rotation of the front wheel assembly.
The distance c is called the trail. The effect of this is that there will be
a torque on the front wheel assembly when the bicycle is tilted. Because
or
of the elasticity of the wheel there will be a compliance that also exerts
a torque. The driver will also exert a torque on the front wheel assembly.
Let T be the torque applied on the front fork by the driver. A static torque
balance for the front fork assembly gives
= k1 + k2 T (4.10)
W
Strictly speaking we should have a differential equation, for simplicity we
will use the static equation.
Taking the action of the front fork into account we find that the bicycle
is described by the Equations 4.9 and 4.10. A block diagram of represen-
tation of the system is shown in Figure 4.7. The figure shows clearly that
the bicycle with the front fork is a feedback system. The front wheel angle
influences the tilt angle as described by (4.9) and the tilt angle influ-
ences the front wheel angle as described by (4.10). We will now investigate
TU
the consequences of the feedback created by the front fork. Inserting the
expression (4.10) for steering angle in the momentum balance (4.9) we
get
d2 amV0 lk1 d mV 2 lk amV0 lk2 dT mV02 k2 l

1
J + + 0
m g l = + T
dt2 b dt b b dt b
(4.11)
JN
152

Handlebar torque
Front fork
k2

k1 Bike
Figure 4.7 Block diagram of a bicycle with the front fork.
ld
The characteristic equation of this system is
amV0 lk1 mV 2 lk
1
Js2 + s+ 0
mg l = 0
b b
This equation is stable if
or
s
gb
V0 > Vc = (4.12)
k1
We can thus conclude that because of the feedback created by the design
of the front fork the bicycle will be stable provided that the velocity is
sufficiently large. The velocity Vc is called the critical velocity.
W
Useful information about bicycle dynamics can be obtained by driving
it with constant speed V0 in a circle with radius r0 . To determine the
numerical values of the essential parameters a torque wrench can be
used to measure the torque the driver exerts on the handle bar. In steady
state conditions the centripetal force must be balanced by the gravity.
Assuming that the bicycle moves counter clockwise the lean angle is
V02
0 =
r0 g
TU
It then follows from (4.11) that the torque required is given by
bg l V02 lk1 ) k1 ( Vc2 V02 )

T0 = =
k2 lr0 g k2 r0 g
This means that no torque is required if the bicycle is driven at the critical
velocity and that the torque changes sign at the critical velocity.
JN
153

Rear-wheel Steering
The analysis performed shows that feedback analysis gives substantial
insight into behavior of bicycles. Feedback analysis can also indicate that
a proposed system may have substantial disadvantages that are not ap-
parent from static analysis. It is therefore essential to consider feedback
and dynamics at an early stage of design. We illustrate this with a bicycle
example. There are advantages in having rear-wheel steering on recum-
bent bicycles because the design of the drive is simpler. Again we quote
from Whitt and Wilson Bicycling Science:
The U.S. Department of Transportation commissioned the construc-
tion of a safe motorcycle with this configuration (rear-wheel steering).
It turned out to be safe in an unexpected way: No one could ride it.
ld
The reason for this is that a bicycle with rear-wheel steering has dynamics
which makes it very difficult to ride. This will be discussed in Sections 5.9.
Let it suffice to mention that it is essential to consider dynamics and
control at an early stage of the design process. This is probable the most
important reason why all engineers should have a basic knowledge about
control.
4.4 Control of First Order Systems
or
We will now develop a systematic procedure for finding controllers for
simple systems. To do this we will be using the formalism based on Laplace
transforms and transfer functions which is developed in Section 3.4. This
simplifies the calculations required substantially. In this section we will
W
consider systems whose dynamics are of first order differential equations.
Many systems can be approximately described by such equations. The
approximation is reasonable if the storage of mass, momentum and energy
can be captured by one state variable. Typical examples are
Velocity of car on the road
Control of velocity of rotating system
Electric systems where energy is essentially stored in one component
TU
Incompressible fluid flow in a pipe

Level control of a tank
Pressure control in a gas tank
Temperature in a body with essentially uniform temperature distri-
bution e.g., a vessel filled with a mixture of steam and water.
JN
154

r e u y
C (s) P(s)
Figure 4.8 Block diagram of a first order system with a PI controller.
ld
A linear model of a first order system can be described by the transfer
function
b
P ( s) = (4.13)
s+a
The system thus has two parameters. These parameters can be deter-
mined from physical consideration or from a step response test on the
or
system. A step test will also reveal if it is reasonable to model a system
by a first order model.
To have no steady state error a controller must have integral action. It
is therefore natural to use a PI controller which has the transfer function
ki
C ( s) = k + (4.14)
s
W
A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 4.8. The loop transfer
function of the system is
kbs + ki b n L ( s)
L(s) = P(s) C (s) = = (4.15)
s(s + a) d L ( s)
The transfer function of the closed system from reference r to output y is

given by
Y ( s) P ( s) C ( s) n L ( s) b( ks + ki )
TU
= = = 2
R( s ) 1 + P ( s) C ( s) d L ( s) + n L ( s) s + (a + bk)s + bki
The closed loop system is of second order and its characteristic polynomial
is
dL (s) + n L (s) = s2 + (a + bk)s + bki . (4.16)
The poles of the closed loop system can be given arbitrary values by choos-
ing the parameters k and ki properly. Intuition about the effects of the
JN
155

parameters can be obtained from the mass-spring-damper analogy as was

done in Section 4.2 and we find that integral gain ki corresponds to stiff-
ness and that proportional gain k corresponds to damping.
It is convenient to re-parameterize the problem so that the character-
istic polynomial becomes
s2 + 2 0 s + 02 (4.17)
Identifying the coefficients of s in the polynomials (4.16) and (4.17) we

find that the controller parameters are given by
2 0 a
k=
ld
b
(4.18)
02
ki =
b
Since the design method is based on choosing the poles of the closed
loop system it is called pole placement. Instead of choosing the controller
parameters k and ki we now select and 0 . These parameters have a
or
good physical interpretation. The parameter 0 determines the speed of
response and determines the shape of the response. Controllers often
have parameters that can be tuned manually. For a PI controller it is
customary to use the parameters k and ki . When a PI controller is used for
a particular system, where the model is known, it is much more practical
to use other parameters. If the model can be approximated by a first order
model it is very convenient to have 0 and as parameters. We call this
W
performance related parameters because they are related directly to the
properties of the closed loop system.
If the parameters 0 and are known the controller parameters are
given by (4.18). We will now discuss how to choose these parameters.
Behavior of Second Order Systems

We will first consider a second order system with the transfer function
TU
02
G ( s) = . (4.19)
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
This is a normalized transfer function of a second order system without

zeros. The step responses of systems with different values of are shown
in Figure 4.9 The figure shows that parameter 0 essentially gives a time
scaling. The response is faster if 0 is larger. The shape of the response
JN
156

h 1.5
0.5
0
0 5 10 15
0t
Figure 4.9 Step responses h for the system (4.19) with the transfer function
02
G ( s) = for = 0 (dotted), 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 0.707 (dash dotted), 1, 2, 5 and
s2 +2 0 s+ 02
ld
10 (dashed).
is determined by . The step responses have an overshoot of

p
1 2
or
M= e for h h < 1

1 for 1
For < 1 the maximum overshoot occurs at
2
tmax = p
0 1 2
W
There is always an overshoot if < 1. The maximum decreases and is
shifted to the right when increases and it becomes infinite for = 1
when the overshoot disappears. In most cases it is desirable to have a
moderate overshoot which means that the parameter should be in the
range of 0.5 to 1. The value = 1 gives no overshoot.
Behavior of Second Order Systems with Zeros

TU
We will now consider a system with the transfer function
0 s + 0
G ( s) = (4.20)
s + 2 0 s + 02
2
Notice that the transfer function has been parameterized so that the
steady state gain G (0) is one. Step responses for this transfer function
for different values of are shown in Figure 4.10. The figure shows that
JN
157

2.5
2
h
1.5
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.5
0.5
ld
0
h
0.5
1.5
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0t
or
Figure 4.10 Step responses h for the system (4.19) with the transfer function
0 (s+ 0 )
G ( s) = 2 2 for 0 = 1 and = 0.5. The values for = 0.25 (dotted), 0.5
(s +2 0 s+ 0 )
1, 2, 5 and 10 (dashed), are shown in the upper plot and = 0.25, -0.5 -1, -2, -5
and -10 (dashed) in the lower plot.
the zero introduces overshoot for positive and an undershoot for nega-
W
tive . Notice that the effect of is most pronounced if is small. The
effect of the zero is small if h h > 5. Intuitively it it appears that systems
with negative values of , where the output goes in the wrong direction
initially, are difficult to control. This is indeed the case as will be dis-
cussed later. Systems with this type of behavior are said to have inverse
response. The behavior in the figures can be understood analytically. The
transfer function G (s) can be written as
TU
0 s + 0 02 1 s 0
G ( s) = = +
s2 + 2 0 s + 02 s2 + 2 0 s + 02 s2 + 2 0 s + 02
Let h0 (t) be the step response of the transfer function
02
G 0 ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
JN
158

It follows from (4.20) that the step response of G (s) is
1 dh0 (t)
h(t) = h0 (t) + (4.21)
0 dt
It follows from this equation that all step responses for different values of
go through the point where dh0 /dt is zero. The overshoot will increase
for positive and decrease for negative . It also follows that the effect
of the zero is small if h h is large. The largest magnitude of dh/ dt is ap-
proximately 0.4 0 /2.7, which implies that the largest value of the second
term is approximately 0.4/ . The term is thus less than 8% if h h is larger
than 5.
Notice in Figure 4.10 that the step response goes in the wrong direction
initially when is negative. This phenomena is called inverse response,
ld
can also be seen from (4.21). When is negative the transfer function
(4.20) has a zero in the right half plane. Such are difficult to control
and they are called non-minimum phase system, see Section 3.5. Several
physical systems have this property, for example level dynamics in steam
generators (Example 3.18, hydro-electric power stations (Example 3.17),
pitch dynamics of an aircraft (Example 3.19) and vehicles with rear wheel
or
steering.
The Servo Problem

Having developed insight into the behavior of second order systems with
zeros we will return to the problem of PI control of first order systems.
We will discuss selection of controller parameters for the servo problem
where the main concern is that the output should follow the reference
W
signal well. The loop transfer function of the system is given by (4.15)
and the transfer function from reference r to output y is
Y ( s) P ( s) C ( s) n L ( s) (a + bk)s + bki
G yr = = = = 2
R( s ) 1 + P ( s) C ( s) n D ( s) + n L ( s) s + (a + bk)s + bki
Choosing control parameters to give the characteristic polynomial (4.17)

we find as before that the controller parameters are given by (4.18) and
TU
the transfer function above becomes
Y ( s) (a + bk)s + bki 2 0 s + 02
= 2 = 2 (4.22)
R( s ) s + (a + bk)s + bki s + 2 0 s + 02
Comparing this transfer function with the transfer function (4.20) we find
that
= 2
JN
159

This implies that parameter is in the range of 1 to 2 for reasonable

choices of . Comparing with Figure 4.10 shows that the system has a
significant overshoot. This can be avoided by a simple modification of the
controller.
Avoiding the Overshoot - Systems with two degrees of freedom

The controller used in Figure 4.8 is based on error feedback. The control
signal is related to the reference and the output in the following way
Z t
u(t) = k(r(t) y(t)) + ki (r( ) y( ))d (4.23)
0
The reason for the overshoot is that the controller reacts quite violently
ld
on a step change in the reference. By changing the controller to
Z t
u(t) = ky(t) + ki (r( ) y( ))d (4.24)
0
we obtain a controller that is reacting much less violent to changes in the

reference signal. Taking Laplace transforms of this controller we get
U (s) = kY (s) +
ki
s
( R(s) Y (s))
or
Combining this equation with the equation (4.13) which describes the
process we find that
(4.25)
W
Y ( s) bki 02
= 2 = 2 (4.26)
R( s ) s + (a + bk)s + bki s + 2 0 s + 02
and we obtain a transfer function from reference r to output y which does

not have a zero, compare with (4.20).
The controller given by (4.23) is said to have error feedback because
all control actions are based on the error e = r y. The controller given by
(4.24) is said to have two degrees of freedom (2DOF) because the signal
TU
path from reference r to control u is different from the signal path from
output y to control u. Figure 4.11 shows block diagrams of the systems.
The transfer function (4.26) is the standard transfer function for a second
order system without zeros, its step responses are shown in Figure 4.9.
The Regulation Problem

It will now be investigated how the parameters 0 and should be chosen
for the regulation problem. In this problem the main concern is reduction
JN
160

r e u y
k+ ki
s P
r e u y
ki
s
P
ld
Figure 4.11 Block diagrams of a system with a conventional PI controller (above)
and a PI controller having two degrees of freedom (below).
0
10
10
10
2
10
3 2
10 10
1 0
10
or 1
10
2
10
3
10
W
Figure 4.12 Gain curves for the transfer function from load disturbance to process
output for b = 1, = 1 and 0 = 0.2 dotted, 0 = 1.0, dashed and 0 = 5 full.
of load disturbances. Consider the system in Figure 4.8, the transfer func-
tion from load disturbance d to output y is
Y ( s) P ( s) s
G yd (s) = = = 2
D ( s) 1 + P ( s) C ( s) s + (a + bk)s + bki
TU
bs b 0s
= 2 =
s + 2 0 s + 0 2 0 s + 2 0 s + 02
2
We will first consider the effect of parameter 0 . Figure 4.12 shows the
gain curves of the Bode diagram for different values of 0 . The figure
shows that disturbances of high and low frequencies are reduced sig-
nificantly and that the disturbance reduction is smallest for frequencies
JN
161

around 0 , they may actually be amplified. The figure also shows that
the disturbance rejection at low frequencies is drastically influenced by
the parameter 0 but that the reduction of high frequency disturbances
is virtually independent of 0 . It is easy to make analytical estimates
because we have
bs s
G yd (s) 2 =
0 bki
for small s, where the second equality follows from (4.18). It follows from
this equation that it is highly desirable to have a large value of 0 . A
large value of 0 means that the control signal has to change rapidly. The
largest permissible value of 0 is typically determined by how quickly the
control signal can be changed, dynamics that was neglected in the simple
model (4.13) and possible saturations. The integrated error for a unit step
ld
disturbance in the load disturbance is
Z
1 b 1
IE = e(t)dt = lim E(s) = lim G yd = 2 =
0 s0 s0 s 0 bki
The largest value of h G yd (i )h is
or
b
max h G yd (i )h = h G yd (i 0 )h =
2 0
The closed loop system obtained with PI control of a first order system
is of second order. Before proceeding we will investigate the behavior of
second order systems.
W
4.5 Control of Second Order Systems
We will now discuss control of systems whose dynamics can approximately
be described by differential equations of second order. Such an approxi-
mation is reasonable if the storage of mass, momentum and energy can
be captured by two state variables. Typical examples are
Position of car on the road
TU
Motion control systems

Stabilization of satellites
Electric systems where energy is stored in two elements
Levels in two connected tanks
Pressure in two connected vessels
JN
162

Simple bicycle models

The general transfer function for a process of second order is
b1 s + b2
P ( s) = (4.27)
s2 + a1 s + a2
In some cases we will consider the special case when b1 = 0.
PD control
We will first design a PD control of the process
b
P ( s) =
s2 + a1 s + a2
ld
A PD controller with error feedback has the transfer function
C (s) = k + kd s
The loop transfer function is
or
bkd s + bk n L ( s)
L( s) = P ( s) C ( s) = =
s2 + a1 s + a2 d L ( s)
The closed loop transfer function from reference to output is
Y ( s) PC n L ( s) b( kd s + k)
= = = 2
R( s ) 1 + PC n D ( s) + n L ( s) s + a1 s + a2 + b( kd s + k)
b( kd s + k)
W
= 2
s + (a1 + bkd )s + a2 + bk
The closed loop system is of second order and the controller has two pa-
rameters. The characteristic polynomial of the closed loop system is
s2 + (a1 + bkd )s + a2 + bk (4.28)
Matching this with the standard polynomial

TU
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
we get
02 a2
k=
b (4.29)
2 0 a1
kd =
b
JN
163

r e u y
k + kd s P
r e u y
k P
kd s
ld
Figure 4.13 Block diagrams of system with PD control based on error feedback
(above) and with a PD controller with two degrees of freedom (below). Compare
with Figure 4.11.
The closed loop transfer function from reference to output becomes
or
Y ( s) PC (2 0 a1 )s + 02 a2
= =
R( s ) 1 + PC s2 + 2 0 s + 02
Notice that there will be a steady state error unless a2 = 0. The steady
state error is small if ha2 h << 02 . Also notice that the zero in the nu-
merator may cause overshoot. To avoid this the controller based on error
feedback can be replaced with the following controller
W
U (s) = k( R(s) Y (s)) kd sY (s) (4.30)
which has two degrees of freedom. The transfer function from reference
to output for the closed loop system then becomes
Y ( s) 02 a2
= 2
R( s ) s + 2 0 s + 02
Notice that this transfer function does not have a zero. Block diagrams
TU
for the system with error feedback and with two degrees of freedom are
shown in Figure 4.13.
PI Control
Next we will investigate what can be achieved with PI control of the
process given by (4.27). Let the PI controller have the transfer function
ki ks + ki
C ( s) = k + =
s s
JN
164

The loop transfer function becomes

( ks + ki )(b1 s + b2 ) n L ( s)
L( s ) = P ( s ) C ( s ) = =
s + a1 s + a2 s
3 2 d L ( s)
The characteristic polynomial is
n L (s) + dL (s) = s3 + (a1 + kb1 )s2 + (a2 + kb2 + ki b1 ) + b2 ki
Identifying the coefficients of this equation with the desired characteristic

polynomial
(s2 + 2 0 s + 02 )(s + 0 ) = s3 +( + 2 ) 0 s2 +(1 + 2 ) 02 s + 03 (4.31)

we obtain
ld
a1 + b1 k = ( + 2 ) 0
a2 + b1 ki + b2 k = (1 + 2 ) 02
b2 ki = 03
Since there are three equations and only two unknowns the problem can-
not be solved in general. To have a solution we can let 0 be a free pa-
or
rameter. If b1 = 0 and b2 = 0 the equation then has the solution
a1
0 =
+ 2
(1 + 2 ) 02 a2
k= (4.32)
b2
03
ki =
W
b2
The parameter 0 which determines the response time is thus uniquely
given by the process dynamics. When b1 = 0 the parameter 0 is instead
the real solution to the equation
b21 03 (1 + 2 )b1 b2 02 + ( + 2 )b22 0 + a2 b1 b2 a1 b22 = 0.

and the controller parameters are given by
TU
( + 2 ) 0 a1
k=
b1
03
ki =
b2
In both cases we find that with PI control of a second order system there
is only one choice of 0 that is possible. The performance of the closed
loop system is thus severely restricted when a PI controller is used.
JN
165

PID Control
Assume that the process is characterized by the second-order model
b1 s + b2
P ( s) = (4.33)
s2 + a1 s + a2
This model has four parameters. It has two poles that may be real or com-
plex, and it has one zero. This model captures many processes, oscillatory
systems, and systems with right half-plane zeros. The right half-plane
zero can also be used as an approximation of a time delay. Let controller
be
ki
ld
U (s) = k(bR(s) Y (s)) + ( R(s) Y (s)) + kd s(cR(s) Y (s))
s
( kd s2 + ks + ki )(b1 s + b2 ) n L ( s)
L( s ) = =
s(s2 + a1 s + a2 ) d L ( s)
= (1 + b1 k) s3 +
or
The closed-loop system is of third order with the characteristic polynomial
dL (s) + n L (s) = s(s2 + a1 s + a2 ) + (b1 s + b2 )( kd s2 + ks + ki )

= (1 + b1 k)s3 + (a1 + b1 k + b2 kd )s2 + (a2 + b1 ki + b2 k)s + b2 ki
a1 + b1 k + b2 kd 2 a2 + b1 ki + b2 k
s + s+
b2 ki
W
1 + b1 k 1 + b1 k 1 + b1 k
A suitable closed-loop characteristic equation of a third-order system is
(s + 0 )(s2 + 2 0 s + 02 )
Equating coefficients of equal power in s in this polynomial with the nor-

malized characteristic polynomial gives
TU
a1 + b2 kd + b1 k
= ( + 2 ) 0
1 + b1 kd
a2 + b2 k + b1 ki
= (1 + 2 ) 02
1 + b1 kd
b2 ki
= 03
1 + b1 kd
JN
166

This is a set of linear equations in the controller parameters. The solution

is straightforward but tedious and is given by
a2 b22 a2 b1 b2 ( + 2 ) 0 (b2 a1 b1 )(b2 (1 + 2 ) 02 + b1 03 )

k=
b32 b1 b22 ( + 2 ) 0 + b21 b2 (1 + 2 ) 02 b31 03
(a1 b1 b2 + a2 b21 + b22 ) 03

ki =
b32 b1 b22 ( + 2 ) 0 + b21 b2 (1 + 2 ) 02 b31 03
a1 b22 + a2 b1 b2 + b22 ( + 2 ) 0 b1 b2 02 (1 + 2 ) + b21 03

kd =
b32 b1 b22 ( + 2 ) 0 + b21 b2 (1 + 2 ) 02 b31 03
(4.34)
The transfer function from set point to process output is
ld
(b1 s + b2 )(ckd s2 + bks + ki )
G yr (s) =
(s + 0 )(s2 + 2 0 s + 02 )
The parameters b and c have a strong influence on shape of the transient

response of this transfer function.
The transfer function from load disturbance to process output is
G yd =
b1 s2 + b2 s
or
(s + 0 )(s2 + 2 0 s + 02 )
These formulas are useful because many processes can be approximately

described by the transfer function (4.27). We illustrate this with an ex-
ample.
W
EXAMPLE 4.1OSCILLATORY SYSTEM WITH RHP ZERO
1s
P ( s) =
s2 + 1
This system has one right half-plane zero and two undamped complex
poles. The process is difficult to control.
TU
s3 + 2s2 + 2s + 1.
(4.34) gives a PID controller with the parameters k = 0, ki = 1/3, and

kd = 2/3. Notice that the proportional gain is zero.
We will give an example that illustrates that there are situations where
a PID controller can be much better than a PI controller.
JN
167

EXAMPLE 4.2PID CAN BE MUCH BETTER THAN PI

Consider a process described by
kv
P ( s) = esTd (4.35)
s(1 + sT )
where the time delay Td is much smaller than the time constant T. Since
the time constant T is small it can be neglected and the design can be
based on the second order model
kv
P ( s) (4.36)
s(1 + sT )
ld
A PI controller for this system can be obtained from Equation (4.32) and
we find that a closed loop system with the characteristic polynomial (4.31)
can be obtained by choosing the parameter 0 equal to 1/( + 2 )T. Since
Td << T it follows that 0 Td << 1 and it is reasonable to neglect the
time delay.
If the approximation (4.36) it is possible to find a PID controller that
gives the closed loop characteristic polynomial with arbitrarily large val-
or
ues of 0 . Since the real system is described by (4.35) the parameter 0
must be chosen so that the approximation (4.36) is valid. This requires
that the product 0 Td is not too large. It can be demonstrated that the
approximation is reasonable if 0 Td is smaller than 0.2.
Summarizing we find that it is possible to obtain the characteristic
polynomial (4.31) with both PI and PID control. With PI control the pa-
rameter 0 must be chosen as 1/( + 2 )T. With PID control the param-
W
eter instead can be chosen so that the product 0 Td < 1 is small, e.g.
0.2 or less. With PI control the response speed is thus determined by T
and with PID control it is determined by Td . The differences can be very
significant. Assume for example that T = 100, Td = 1, = 1 and = 0.5.
Then we find that with 0 = 0.005 with PI control and 0 = 0.1 with
PID control. This corresponds to a factor of 200 in response time. This
will also be reflected in a much better disturbance attenuation with PID
control.
TU
4.6 Control of Systems of High Order*
The method for control design used in the previous sections can be charac-
terized in the following way. Choose a controller of given complexity, PD,
PI or PID and determine the controller parameters so that the closed loop
JN
168

characteristic polynomial is equal to a specified polynomial. This tech-

nique is called pole placement because the design is focused on achieving
a closed loop system with specified poles. The zeros of the transfer func-
tion from reference to output can to some extent be influenced by choos-
ing a controller with two degrees of freedom. We also observed that the
complexity of the controller reflected the complexity of the process. A PI
controller is sufficient for a first order system but a PID controller was
required for a second order system. Choosing a controller of too low order
imposed restrictions on the achievable closed loop poles. In this section
we will generalize the results to systems of arbitrary order. This section
also requires more mathematical preparation than the rest of the book.
Consider a system given by the block diagram in Figure 4.8. Let the
process have the transfer function
ld
Y ( s) b(s) b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
P ( s) = = = (4.37)
U ( s) a(s) sn + a1 sn1 + . . . + an
where a(s) and b(s) are polynomials. A general controller can be described
by
f (s) U (s) = g(s) Y (s) + h(s) R(s) (4.38)
or
where f (s), g(s) and h(s) are polynomials. The controller given by (4.38) is
a general controller with two degrees of freedom. The transfer function
from measurement signal y to control signal u is g(s)/ f (s) and the
transfer function from reference signal r to control signal u is h(s)/ f (s).
For a system with error feedback we have g(s) = h(s). Elimination of
U (s) between Equations (4.37) and (4.38) gives
W

a(s) f (s) + b(s)g(s) Y (s) = b(s)h(s) R(s) + b(s) f (s) D (s) (4.39)
The closed loop has the characteristic polynomial
c(s) = a(s) f (s) + b(s)g(s) (4.40)
Notice that this only depends on the polynomials f (s) and g(s). The design
TU
problem can be stated as follows: Given the polynomials a(s), b(s) and c(s)
find the polynomials f (s) and g(s) which satisfies (4.40). This is a well
known mathematical problem. It will be shown in the next section that
the equation always has a solution if the polynomials a(s) and b(s) do not
have any common factors. If one solution exists there are also infinitely
many solutions. This is useful because it makes it possible to introduce
additional constraints. We may for example require that the controller
should have integral action.
JN
169

A Naive Solution
To obtain the solution to the design problem the equation (4.40) must be
solved. A simple direct way of doing this is to introduce polynomials f
and g with arbitrary coefficients, writing equating coefficients of equal
powers of s, and solving the equations. This procedure is illustrated by
an example.
EXAMPLE 4.3GENERAL POLE PLACEMENT

Consider a process with the transfer function
1
P ( s) =
(s + 1)2
ld
Find a controller that gives a closed loop system with the characteristic
polynomial
(s2 + as + a2 )(s + a)
(4.40) becomes
(s + 1)2 f + g = (s2 + as + a2 )(s + a) = s3 + 2as2 + 2a2 s + a3
One solution is
f =1
or
g = s3 + (2a 1)s2 + (2a2 2)s + a3 1
but there are also other solutions e.g.

W
f = s + 2a 2
g = (2a2 4a + 3)s + a3 2a + 2
The Diophantine Equation

TU
The naive solution of (4.40) hides many interesting aspects of the prob-
lem. The equation (4.40) is a classical equation which has been studied
extensively in mathematics. To discuss this equation we will use more
mathematics than in most parts of the book. We will also change to a
more formal style of presentation. This is a nice illustration of the fact
that control is a field where many branches of mathematics are useful.
We will start by observing that polynomials belong to a mathematical
object called a ring. This means that they can be multiplied and added,
JN
170

and that there are units: the zero polynomial for addition and the polyno-
mial 1 for multiplication. Division of polynomials does not always give a
polynomial, but quotient and remainders are defined. Integers are other
objects that also is a ring. To develop some insight we will first explore
two examples.
EXAMPLE 4.4AN EQUATION IN INTEGERS

Consider the following equation
3x + 2 y = 1,
where x and y are integers. By inspection we find that x = 1 and y = 1

is a solution. We also find that if we have a solution other solutions can
ld
be obtained by adding 2 to x and subtracting 3 from y. The equation thus
has infinitely many solutions.

Consider the equation
6x + 4 y = 1,
number.

or
where x and y are integers. This equation cannot have a solution because
the left hand side is an even number and the right hand side is an odd
W
Consider the equation
6x + 4 y = 2,
where x and y are integers. Dividing the right hand side by 2 we obtain
the equation in Example 4.4
These examples tell most about the (4.40) when a, b, f , g and c belong
to a ring. To be precise we have the following result.
TU
THEOREM 4.1EUCLIDS ALGORITHM

Let a, b, and c be polynomials with real coefficients. Then the equation
ax + by = c (4.41)
has a solution if and only if the greatest common factor of a and b divides
c. If the equation has a solution x0 and y0 then x = x0 bn and y = y0 + an,
where n is an arbitrary integer, is also a solution.
JN
171

PROOF 4.1
We will first determine the largest common divisor of the polynomials a
and b by a recursive procedure. Assume that the degree of a is greater
than or equal to the degree of b. Let a0 = a and b0 = b. Iterate the
equations
an+1 = bn
bn+1 = an mod bn
until bn+1 = 0. The greatest common divisor is then bn . If a and b are

co-prime we have bn = 1. Backtracking we find that
ax + by = bn
ld
where the polynomials x and y can be found by keeping track of the
quotients and the remainders in the iterations. When a and b are co-
prime we have
ax + by = 1
and the result is obtained by multiplying x and y by c. When a and b have
a common factor it must be required that the largest common divisor of a
or
and b is also a factor of c. Dividing the equation with this divisor we are
back to the case when a and b are co-prime.
Since the proof has only used addition, multiplication, quotients and re-
mainders it follows that the results holds for any ring.
An Algorithm
The following is a convenient way of organizing the recursive computa-
W
tions. With this method we also obtain the minimum degree solution to
the homogeneous equation.
ax + by = 1
(4.42)
au + bv = 0
where g is the greatest common divisor of a and b and u and v are the
minimal degree solutions to the homogeneous equation These equations
TU
can be written as

x ya 1 0 1 x y

=

u v b 0 1 0 u v
The solution to Equation (4.42) can be obtained by transforming the ma-

trix

a 1 0

A0 =
b 0 1
JN
172

by row operations to a matrix where the 21 element is zero. This can be

done recursively as follows. Assume that deg a is greater than or equal
to deg b, exchange the rows if this is not the case. Form the following
recursion. n n n
n+1

A21 A22 A23

A = n n n
r A12 q A22 A13 q A23
n n n n
n+1
where qn = A11n
div An21 and r n = A11
n
div An21 . Proceed until A21 = 0. It
n
follows from Euclids algorithm that A11 is the greatest common divisor
of a and b and that a and b are co-prime if A11 n
= 1. The equation (4.41)
n
then has a solution if A11 is a factor of c.
System Theoretic Consequences
ld
The following result is an immediate consequence of Euclids algorithm,
Theorem 4.1.
THEOREM 4.2CONTROLLER PARAMETERIZATION

Consider a system with a rational transfer function P = b/ a. Let C0 =
g0 / f 0 be a controller which gives a closed loop system with the charac-
teristic polynomial c. Then all controllers which give a closed loop system
or
with the characteristic polynomial c are given by
g0 + qa
C=
f 0 qb
where q is an arbitrary polynomial.

W
PROOF 4.2
The loop transfer function obtained with the controller C is
b(g0 + qa)
L = PC =
a( f 0 qb)
we have
a( f 0 qb) + b(g0 + qa) a f 0 + bg0 c

1+ L= = =
TU
a( f 0 qb) a( f 0 qb) a( f 0 qb)
which shows that the characteristic polynomial is c. Let C = g/ f be any

controller that gives the characteristic polynomial c it follows that
a f + bg = c
and it follows from Theorem 4.1 that f = f 0 bq and g = g0 + aq.

JN
173

Q B A
1
G0 P
F0
Figure 4.14 Block diagram that illustrates the Youla-Kucera parameterization

theorem. If C = G0 / F0 stabilizes the system P = B / A, then the controller shown
in the block diagram also stabilizes the system for all stable rational functions Q.
ld
This theorem is useful because it characterizes all controllers that give
specified closed loop poles. Since the theorem tells that there are many
solutions we may ask if there are some solutions that are particularly use-
ful. It is natural to look for simple solutions. It follows from Theorem 4.2
or
that there is one controller where deg f < deg b, i.e. a controller of lowest
order, and another where deg g < deg a, a controller with highest pole
excess.

Youla-Kucera Parameterization
Theorem 4.2 characterizes all controllers that give a closed loop system
with a given characteristic polynomial. We will now derive a related re-
W
sult that characterizes all stabilizing controllers. To start with we will
introduce another representation of a transfer function.
DEFINITION 4.1STABLE RATIONAL FUNCTIONS

Let a(s) be a polynomial with all zeros in the left half plane and b(s)
an arbitrary polynomial. The rational function b(s)/ a(s) is called a stable
rational function.
TU
Stable rational functions are also a ring. This means that Theorem 4.1
also holds for rational functions. A fractional representation of a transfer
function P is
B
P=
A
where A and B are stable rational transfer functions. We have the fol-
lowing result.
JN
174

THEOREM 4.3YOULA-KUCERA REPRESENTATION

Consider a process with the transfer function P = B / A, where A and
B are stable rational functions that are co-prime, let C0 = G0 / F0 be a
fractional representation of a controller that stabilizes P, all stabilizing
controllers are then given by
G0 + Q A
C= (4.43)
F0 Q B
where Q is an arbitrary stable rational transfer function.
PROOF 4.3
The loop transfer function obtained with the controller C is
ld
B ( G 0 + Q A)
L = PC =
A( F0 Q B )
we have
A( F0 Q B ) + B ( G0 + Q A) AF0 + BG0
1+ L = =
A( F0 Q B ) A( F0 Q B )
or
Since the rational function AF0 + BG0 has all its zeros in the left half
plane the closed loop system is stable. Let C = G / F be any controller
that stabilizes the closed loop system it follows that
AF + BG = C
is a stable rational function with all its zeros in the left half plane. Hence
W
A B
F+ G=1
C C
and it follows from Theorem 4.1 that
B
F = F0 Q = F0 B Q
C
A
G = G0 Q = G0 A Q
TU
C
where Q is a stable rational function because C has all its zeros in the
left half plane.
It follows from Equation (4.43) that the control law can be written as
U G G0 + Q A
= =
Y F F0 Q B
JN
175

or
F0 U = G0 Y + Q ( BU AY )
The Youla-Kucera parameterization theorem can then be illustrated by
the block diagram in Figure 4.14. Notice that the signal v is zero. It
therefore seems intuitively reasonable that a feedback based on this signal
cannot make the system unstable.
4.7 Summary
In this section we started by investigating some simple control systems.

A systematic method for analysis and design was developed. The closed
ld
loop system was first represented by a block diagram. The behavior of
each block was represented by a transfer function. The relations between
the Laplace transforms of all signals could be derived by simple alge-
braic manipulations of the transfer functions of the blocks. An interesting
feature of using Laplace transforms is that systems and signals are repre-
sented in the same way. The analysis gave good insight into the behavior
of simple control systems and how its properties were influenced by the
or
poles and zeros of the closed loop system. The results can also be devel-
oped using differential equations but it is much simpler to use Laplace
transforms and transfer functions. This is also the standard language of
the field of control.
To design a controller we selected a controller with given structure,
PI or PID. The parameters of the controller were then chosen to obtain
a closed loop system with specified poles, or equivalently specified roots
W
of the characteristic equation. This design method was called pole place-
ment. The design methods were worked out in detail for first and sec-
ond order systems but we also briefly discussed the general case. To find
suitable closed loop poles we found that it was convenient to introduce
standard parameters to describe the closed loop poles. Results that guide
the intuition of choosing the closed loop poles were also developed.
The analysis was based on simplified models of the dynamics of the
process. The example on cruise control in Section 4.2 indicated that it was
not necessary to know some parameters accurately. One of the amazing
TU
properties of control systems is that they can often be designed based on

simple models. This will be justified in the next chapter.
JN
176

5
Feedback Fundamentals
ld
5.1 Introduction
Fundamental properties of feedback systems will be investigated in this
Chapter. We begin in Section 5.2 by discussing the basic feedback loop and
typical requirements. This includes the ability to follow reference signals,
or
effects of load disturbances and measurement noise and the effects of pro-
cess variations. It turns out that these properties can be captured by a
set of six transfer functions, called the Gang of Six. These transfer func-
tions are introduced in Section 5.3. For systems where the feedback is
restricted to operate on the error signal the properties are characterized
by a subset of four transfer functions, called the Gang of Four. Properties
of systems with error feedback and the more general feedback configura-
tion with two degrees of freedom are also discussed in Section 5.3. It is
W
shown that it is important to consider all transfer functions of the Gang
of Six when evaluating a control system. Another interesting observation
is that for systems with two degrees of freedom the problem of response
to load disturbances can be treated separately. This gives a natural sepa-
ration of the design problem into a design of a feedback and a feedforward
system. The feedback handles process uncertainties and disturbances and
the feedforward gives the desired response to reference signals.
Attenuation of disturbances are discussed in Section 5.4 where it is
TU
demonstrated that process disturbances can be attenuated by feedback

but that feedback also feeds measurement noise into the system. It turns
out that the sensitivity function which belongs to the Gang of Four gives
a nice characterization of disturbance attenuation. The effects of process
variations are discussed in Section 5.5. It is shown that their effects are
well described by the sensitivity function and the complementary sensi-
tivity function. The analysis also gives a good explanation for the fact that
JN
177

Chapter 5. Feedback Fundamentals
d n
r e u v x y
F C P
1
Controller Process
Figure 5.1 Block diagram of a basic feedback loop.
control systems can be designed based on simplified models. When dis-
ld
cussing process variations it is natural to investigate when two processes
are similar from the point of view of control. This important nontrivial
problem is discussed in Section 5.6. Section 5.7 is devoted to a detailed
treatment of the sensitivity functions. This leads to a deeper understand-
ing of attenuation of disturbances and effects of process variations. A
fundamental result of Bode which gives insight into fundamental limi-
tations of feedback is also derived. This result shows that disturbances
or
of some frequencies can be attenuated only if disturbances of other fre-
quencies are amplified. Tracking of reference signals are investigated in
Section 5.8. Particular emphasis is given to precise tracking of low fre-
quency signals. Because of the richness of control systems the emphasis
on different issues varies from field to field. This is illustrated in Sec-
tion 5.10 where we discuss the classical problem of design of feedback
amplifiers.
W
5.2 The Basic Feedback Loop
A block diagram of a basic feedback loop is shown in Figure 5.1. The sys-
tem loop is composed of two components, the process P and the controller.
The controller has two blocks the feedback block C and the feedforward
block F. There are two disturbances acting on the process, the load distur-
TU
bance d and the measurement noise n. The load disturbance represents

disturbances that drive the process away from its desired behavior. The
process variable x is the real physical variable that we want to control.
Control is based on the measured signal y, where the measurements are
corrupted by measurement noise n. Information about the process variable
x is thus distorted by the measurement noise. The process is influenced
by the controller via the control variable u. The process is thus a system
with three inputs and one output. The inputs are: the control variable
JN
178

5.2 The Basic Feedback Loop
w z
P
u y
Figure 5.2 An abstract representation of the system in Figure 5.1. The input u
represents the control signal and the input w represents the reference r, the load
disturbance d and the measurement noise n. The output y is the measured variables
and z are internal variables that are of interest.
ld
u, the load disturbance d and the measurement noise n. The output is
the measured signal. The controller is a system with two inputs and one
output. The inputs are the measured signal y and the reference signal r
and the output is the control signal u. Note that the control signal u is an
input to the process and the output of the controller and that the mea-
sured signal is the output of the process and an input to the controller. In
or
Figure 5.1 the load disturbance was assumed to act on the process input.
This is a simplification, in reality the disturbance can enter the process
in many different ways. To avoid making the presentation unnecessar-
ily complicated we will use the simple representation in Figure 5.1. This
captures the essence and it can easily be modified if it is known precisely
how disturbances enter the system.
W
More Abstract Representations
The block diagrams themselves are substantial abstractions but higher
abstractions are sometimes useful. The system in Figure 5.1 can be rep-
resented by only two blocks as shown in Figure 5.2. There are two types
of inputs, the control u, which can be manipulated and the disturbances
w = (r, d, n), which represents external influences on the closed loop
systems. The outputs are also of two types the measured signal y and
other interesting signals z = ( e, v, x). The representation in Figure 5.2
TU
allows many control variables and many measured variables, but it shows
less of the system structure than Figure 5.1. This representation can be
used even when there are many input signals and many output signals.
Representation with a higher level of abstraction are useful for the devel-
opment of theory because they make it possible to focus on fundamentals
and to solve general problems with a wide range of applications. Care
must, however, be exercised to maintain the coupling to the real world
control problems we intend to solve.
JN
179

Disturbances
Attenuation of load disturbances is often a primary goal for control. This is
particularly the case when controlling processes that run in steady state.
Load disturbances are typically dominated by low frequencies. Consider
for example the cruise control system for a car, where the disturbances are
the gravity forces caused by changes of the slope of the road. These distur-
bances vary slowly because the slope changes slowly when you drive along
a road. Step signals or ramp signals are commonly used as prototypes for
load disturbances disturbances.
Measurement noise corrupts the information about the process vari-
able that the sensors delivers. Measurement noise typically has high fre-
quencies. The average value of the noise is typically zero. If this was not
the case the sensor will give very misleading information about the pro-
ld
cess and it would not be possible to control it well. There may also be
dynamics in the sensor. Several sensors are often used. A common situa-
tion is that very accurate values may be obtained with sensors with slow
dynamics and that rapid but less accurate information can be obtained
from other sensors.
or
Actuation
The process is influenced by actuators which typically are valves, motors,
that are driven electrically, pneumatically, or hydraulically. There are of-
ten local feedback loops and the control signals can also be the reference
variables for these loops. A typical case is a flow loop where a valve is
controlled by measuring the flow. If the feedback loop for controlling the
flow is fast we can consider the set point of this loop which is the flow
W
as the control variable. In such cases the use of local feedback loops can
thus simplify the system significantly. When the dynamics of the actua-
tors is significant it is convenient to lump them with the dynamics of the
process. There are cases where the dynamics of the actuator dominates
process dynamics.
Design Issues
Many issues have to be considered in analysis and design of control sys-
tems. Basic requirements are
TU
Stability
Ability to follow reference signals
Reduction of effects of load disturbances
Reduction of effects of measurement noise
Reduction of effects of model uncertainties
JN
180

5.3 The Gang of Six
The possibility of instabilities is the primary drawback of feedback. Avoid-

ing instability is thus a primary goal. It is also desirable that the process
variable follows the reference signal faithfully. The system should also
be able to reduce the effect of load disturbances. Measurement noise is
injected into the system by the feedback. This is unavoidable but it is es-
sential that not too much noise is injected. It must also be considered that
the models used to design the control systems are inaccurate. The proper-
ties of the process may also change. The control system should be able to
cope with moderate changes. The focus on different abilities vary with the
application. In process control the major emphasis is often on attenuation
of load disturbances, while the ability to follow reference signals is the
primary concern in motion control systems.
ld
5.3 The Gang of Six
The feedback loop in Figure 5.1 is influenced by three external signals,
the reference r, the load disturbance d and the measurement noise n.
There are at least three signals x, y and u that are of great interest
or
for control. This means that there are nine relations between the input
and the output signals. Since the system is linear these relations can be
expressed in terms of the transfer functions. Let X , Y, U , D, N R be the
Laplace transforms of x, y, u, d, n r, respectively. The following relations
are obtained from the block diagram in Figure 5.1
P PC PC F
X = D N+ R
W
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
P 1 PC F
Y= D+ N+ R (5.1)
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
PC C CF
U = D N+ R.
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
To simplify notations we have dropped the arguments of all Laplace trans-

forms. There are several interesting conclusions we can draw from these
TU
equations. First we can observe that several transfer functions are the
same and that all relations are given by the following set of six transfer
functions which we call the Gang of Six.
PC F PC P
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
(5.2)
CF C 1
,
1 + PC 1 + PC 1 + PC
JN
181

The transfer functions in the first column give the response of process
variable and control signal to the set point. The second column gives the
same signals in the case of pure error feedback when F = 1. The transfer
function P/(1 + PC ) in the third column tells how the process variable
reacts to load disturbances the transfer function C /(1 + PC ) gives the
response of the control signal to measurement noise.
Notice that only four transfer functions are required to describe how
the system reacts to load disturbance and the measurement noise and
that two additional transfer functions are required to describe how the
system responds to set point changes.
The special case when F = 1 is called a system with (pure) error
feedback. In this case all control actions are based on feedback from the
error only. In this case the system is completely characterized by four
ld
transfer functions, namely the four rightmost transfer functions in (5.2),
i.e.
PC
, the complementary sensitivity function
1 + PC
P
, the load disturbance sensitivity function
1 + PC
(5.3)
C
or
, the noise sensitivity function
1 + PC
1
, the sensitivity function
1 + PC
These transfer functions and their equivalent systems are called the
Gang of Four. The transfer functions have many interesting properties
that will be discussed in then following. A good insight into these prop-
W
erties are essential for understanding feedback systems. The load distur-
bance sensitivity function is sometimes called the input sensitivity func-
tion and the noise sensitivity function is sometimes called the output
sensitivity function.
Systems with Two Degrees of Freedom

The controller in Figure 5.1 is said to have two degrees of freedom be-
cause the controller has two blocks, the feedback block C which is part
TU
of the closed loop and the feedforward block F which is outside the loop.
Using such a controller gives a very nice separation of the control problem
because the feedback controller can be designed to deal with disturbances
and process uncertainties and the feedforward will handle the response to
reference signals. Design of the feedback only considers the gang of four
and the feedforward deals with the two remaining transfer functions in
the gang of six. For a system with error feedback it is necessary to make
a compromise. The controller C thus has to deal with all aspects of the
JN
182

5.3 The Gang of Six
PC F /(1 + PC ) PC /(1 + PC ) P/(1 + PC )

1.5 1.5 1.5
1 1 1
0.5 0.5 0.5
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
C F /(1 + PC ) C /(1 + PC ) 1/(1 + PC )
1.5 1.5 1.5
1 1 1
0.5 0.5 0.5
0 0 0
ld
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
Figure 5.3 Step responses of the Gang of Six for PI control k = 0.775, Ti = 2.05
of the process P(s) = (s + 1)4 . The feedforward is designed to give the transfer
function (0.5s + 1)4 from reference r to output y.
or
problem.
To describe the system properly it is thus necessary to show the re-
sponse of all six transfer functions. The transfer functions can be repre-
sented in different ways, by their step responses and frequency responses,
see Figures 5.3 and 5.4.
Figures 5.3 and 5.4 give useful insight into the properties of the closed
loop system. The time responses in Figure 5.3 show that the feedforward
W
gives a substantial improvement of the response speed. The settling time
is substantially shorter, 4 s versus 25 s, and there is no overshoot. This is
also reflected in the frequency responses in Figure 5.4 which shows that
the transfer function with feedforward has higher bandwidth and that it
has no resonance peak.
The transfer functions C F /(1 + PC ) and C /(1 + PC ) represent the
signal transmission from reference to control and from measurement noise
to control. The time responses in Figure 5.3 show that the reduction in
TU
response time by feedforward requires a substantial control effort. The

initial value of the control signal is out of scale in Figure 5.3 but the
frequency response in 5.4 shows that the high frequency gain of PC F /(1 +
PC ) is 16, which can be compared with the value 0.78 for the transfer
function C /(1 + PC ). The fast response thus requires significantly larger
control signals.
There are many other interesting conclusions that can be drawn from
Figures 5.3 and 5.4. Consider for example the response of the output to
JN
183

PC F /(1 + PC ) PC /(1 + PC ) P/(1 + PC )

0 0 0
10 10 10
1 1 1
10 10 10
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
C F /(1 + PC ) C /(1 + PC ) 1
1/(1 + PC )
10
1 1
10 10
0
0
10
0
10 10
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
ld
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Figure 5.4 Gain curves of frequency responses of the Gang of Six for PI control
k = 0.775, Ti = 2.05 of the process P(s) = (s + 1)4 where the feedforward has been
designed to give the transfer function (0.5s + 1)4 from reference to output.
or
load disturbances expressed by the transfer function P/(1 + PC ). The
frequency response has a pronounced peak 1.22 at max = 0.5 the corre-
sponding time function has its maximum 0.59 at tmax = 5.2. Notice that
the peaks are of the same magnitude and that the product of max tmax =
2.6.
The step responses can also be represented by two simulations of the
process. The complete system is first simulated with the full two-degree-
W
of-freedom structure. The simulation begins with a step in the reference
signal, when the system has settled to equilibrium a step in the load dis-
turbance is then given. The process output and the control signals are
recorded. The simulation is then repeated with a system without feedfor-
ward, i.e. F = 1. The response to the reference signal will be different
but the response to the load disturbance will be the same as in the first
simulation. The procedure is illustrated in Figure 5.5.
TU
A Remark
The fact that 6 relations are required to capture properties of the basic
feedback loop is often neglected in literature. Most papers on control only
show the response of the process variable to set point changes. Such a
curve gives only partial information about the behavior of the system. To
get a more complete representation of the system all six responses should
be given. We illustrate the importance of this by an example.
JN
184

5.3 The Gang of Six
Process variable
2
1.5
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Control signal
1.5
0.5
0.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
ld
Figure 5.5 Representation of properties of a basic feedback loop by step responses
in the reference at time 0, and at the process input at time 30. The dashed full lines
show the response for a system with error feedback F = 1, and the dashed lines
show responses for a system having two degrees of freedom.
EXAMPLE 5.1ASSESSMENT OF A CONTROL SYSTEM
or
A process with the transfer function
1
P ( s) =
(s + 1)(s + 0.02)
is controlled using error feedback with a controller having the transfer
function
50s + 1
C ( s) =
W
50s
1
L(s) =
s(s + 1)
Figure 5.6 shows that the responses to a reference signal look quite rea-
sonable. Based on these responses we could be tempted to conclude that
the closed loop system is well designed. The step response settles in about
TU
10 s and the overshoot is moderate.

To explore the system further we will calculate the transfer functions
of the Gang of Six, we have
P ( s) C ( s) 1 P ( s) s
= 2 =
1 + P ( s) C ( s) s +s+1 1 + P ( s) C ( s) (s + 0.02)(s2 + s + 1)
C ( s) (s + 0.02)(s + 1) 1 s(s + 1)
= = 2
1 + P ( s) C ( s) s2 + s + 1 1 + P ( s) C ( s) s +s+1
JN
185

Output
1.4
1.2
1
y 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Control
1.2
0.8
0.6
ld
u
0.4
0.2
0.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
t
or
Figure 5.6 Response of output y and control u to a step in reference r.
The responses of y and u to the reference r are given by
1 (s + 1)(s + 0.02)
Y ( s) = R(s), U ( s) = R( s )
s2 + s + 1 s2 + s + 1
W
and the responses of y and u to the load disturbance d are given by
s 1
Y ( s) = D (s), U ( s) = D ( s)
(s + 0.02)(s2 + s + 1) s2 +s+1
Notice that the process pole s = 0.02 is cancelled by a controller zero.

This implies that the loop transfer function is of second order even if the
closed loop system itself is of third order. The characteristic equation of
TU
the closed loop system is
(s + 0.02)(s2 + s + 1) = 0
where the the pole s = 0.02 corresponds the process pole that is canceled
by the controller zero. The presence of the slow pole s = 0.02 which ap-
pears in the response to load disturbances implies that the output decays
very slowly, at the rate of e0.02t . The controller will not respond to the
JN
186

5.3 The Gang of Six
Output
1.4
1.2
1
y 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Control
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
ld
u
0.8
1.2
1.4
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
t
or
Figure 5.7 Response of output y and control u to a step in the load disturbance.
Notice the very slow decay of the mode e0.02t . The control signal does not respond
to this mode because the controller has a zero s = 0.02.
signal e0.02t because the zero s = 0.02 will block the transmission of this
W
signal. This is clearly seen in Figure 5.7, which shows the response of the
output and the control signals to a step change in the load disturbance.
Notice that it takes about 200 s for the disturbance to settle. This can
be compared with the step response in Figure 5.6 which settles in about
10s.
The behavior illustrated in the example is typical when there are cancel-
TU
lations of poles and zeros in the transfer functions of the process and the
controller. The canceled factors do not appear in the loop transfer function
and the sensitivity functions. The canceled modes are not visible unless
they are excited. The effects are even more drastic than shown in the
example if the canceled modes are unstable. This has been known among
control engineers for a long time and a there has been a design rule that
cancellation of slow or unstable modes should be avoided. Another view
of cancellations is given in Section 3.7.
JN
187

d n
r=0 u x yol
C P
d n
r=0 e u x ycl
C P
ld
Figure 5.8 Open and closed loop systems subject to the same disturbances.
5.4 Disturbance Attenuation

The attenuation of disturbances will now be discussed. For that purpose
or
we will compare an open loop system and a closed loop system subject to
the disturbances as is illustrated in Figure 5.8. Let the transfer function of
the process be P(s) and let the Laplace transforms of the load disturbance
and the measurement noise be D (s) and N (s) respectively. The output of
the open loop system is
Yol = P(s) D (s) + N (s) (5.4)

W
and the output of the closed loop system is
P ( s) D ( s) + N ( s)
Ycl = = S(s)( P(s) D (s) + N (s)) (5.5)
1 + P ( s) C ( s)
where S(s) is the sensitivity function, which belongs to the Gang of Four.
We thus obtain the following interesting result
Ycl (s) = S(s) Yol (s) (5.6)

TU
The sensitivity function will thus directly show the effect of feedback on
the output. The disturbance attenuation can be visualized graphically by
the gain curve of the Bode plot of S(s). The lowest frequency where the
sensitivity function has the magnitude 1 is called the sensitivity crossover
frequency and denoted by sc . The maximum sensitivity

1
Ms = max h S(i )h = max (5.7)
1 + P(i ) C (i )
JN
188

5.4 Disturbance Attenuation
1
10
h S(i )h
10
1
10
2
10
2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10

Figure 5.9 Gain curve of the sensitivity function for PI control ( k = 0.8, ki = 0.4)
of process with the transfer function P(s) = (s + 1)4 . The sensitivity crossover
frequency is indicated by + and the maximum sensitivity by o.
ld
30
20
10
y
or
10
20
30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t
Figure 5.10 Outputs of process with control (full line) and without control (dashed
line).
W
is an important variable which gives the largest amplification of the dis-
turbances. The maximum occurs at the frequency ms .
A quick overview of how disturbances are influenced by feedback is
obtained from the gain curve of the Bode plot of the sensitivity function.
An example is given in Figure 5.9. The figure shows that the sensitivity
crossover frequency is 0.32 and that the maximum sensitivity 2.1 occurs at
TU
ms = 0.56. Feedback will thus reduce disturbances with frequencies less

than 0.32 rad/s, but it will amplify disturbances with higher frequencies.
The largest amplification is 2.1.
If a record of the disturbance is available and a controller has been
designed the output obtained under closed loop with the same disturbance
can be visualized by sending the recorded output through a filter with the
transfer function S(s). Figure 5.10 shows the output of the system with
and without control.
JN
189

1/ Ms ms
sc
ld
Figure 5.11 Nyquist curve of loop transfer function showing graphical interpre-
tation of maximum sensitivity. The sensitivity crossover frequency sc and the fre-
quency ms where the sensitivity has its largest value are indicated in the figure.
All points inside the dashed circle have sensitivities greater than 1.
or
The sensitivity function can be written as
1 1
S ( s) = = . (5.8)
1 + P ( s) C ( s) 1 + L( s )
Since it only depends on the loop transfer function it can be visualized

graphically in the Nyquist plot of the loop transfer function. This is illus-
W
trated in Figure 5.11. The complex number 1 + L(i ) can be represented
as the vector from the point 1 to the point L(i ) on the Nyquist curve.
The sensitivity is thus less than one for all points outside a circle with
radius 1 and center at 1. Disturbances of these frequencies are attenu-
ated by the feedback. If a control system has been designed based on a
given model it is straight forward to estimated the potential disturbance
reduction simply by recording a typical output and filtering it through the
sensitivity function.
TU
Slow Load Disturbances

Load disturbances typically have low frequencies. To estimate their effects
on the process variable it is then natural to approximate the transfer
function from load disturbances to process output for small s, i.e.
P ( s)
G xd (s) = c0 + c1 s + c2 s2 + (5.9)
1 + P ( s) C ( s)
JN
190

5.5 Process Variations
The coefficients ck are called stiffness coefficients. This means that the
process variable for slowly varying load disturbances d is given by
dd(t) d2 d(t)
x(t) = c0 d(t) + c1 + c2 +
dt dt2
For example if the load disturbance is d(t) = v0 t we get
x(t) = c0 v0 t + c1 v0
If the controller has integral action we have c0 = 0 and x(t) = c1 v0 .
ld
Control systems are designed based on simplified models of the processes.
Process dynamics will often change during operation. The sensitivity of a
closed loop system to variations in process dynamics is therefore a funda-
mental issue.
or
Risk for Instability
Instability is the main drawback of feedback. It is therefore of interest
to investigate if process variations can cause instability. The sensitivity
functions give a useful insight. Figure 5.11 shows that the largest sen-
sitivity is the inverse of the shortest distance from the point 1 to the
Nyquist curve.
The complementary sensitivity function also gives insight into allow-
W
able process variations. Consider a feedback system with a process P and
a controller C. We will investigate how much the process can be perturbed
without causing instability. The Nyquist curve of the loop transfer func-
tion is shown in Figure 5.12. If the process is changed from P to P + P
the loop transfer function changes from PC to PC + C P as illustrated
in the figure. The distance from the critical point 1 to the point L is
h1 + Lh. This means that the perturbed Nyquist curve will not reach the
critical point 1 provided that
TU
h C Ph < h1 + Lh
This condition must be valid for all points on the Nyquist curve. The
condition for stability can be written as
h P(i )h 1
< (5.10)
h P(i )h hT (i )h
JN
191

1+ L
C P
ld
Figure 5.12 Nyquist curve of a nominal loop transfer function and its uncertainty
caused by process variations P.
A technical condition, namely that the perturbation P is a stable trans-

fer function, must also be required. If this does not hold the encirclement
condition required by Nyquists stability condition is not satisfied. Also
notice that the condition (5.10) is conservative because it follows from
or
Figure 5.12 that the critical perturbation is in the direction towards the
critical point 1. Larger perturbations can be permitted in the other di-
rections.
This formula (5.10) is one of the reasons why feedback systems work
so well in practice. The mathematical models used to design control sys-
tem are often strongly simplified. There may be model errors and the
properties of a process may change during operation. Equation (5.10) im-
W
plies that the closed loop system will at least be stable for substantial
variations in the process dynamics.
It follows from (5.10) that the variations can be large for those fre-
quencies where T is small and that smaller variations are allowed for
frequencies where T is large. A conservative estimate of permissible pro-
cess variations that will not cause instability is given by
h P(i )h 1
<
h P(i )h
TU
Mt
where Mt is the largest value of the complementary sensitivity

P(i ) C (i )

Mt = max hT (i )h = max (5.11)
1 + P(i ) C (i )
The value of Mt is influenced by the design of the controller. For example

if Mt = 2 gain variations of 50% and phase variations of 30 are permitted
JN
192

without making the closed loop system unstable. The fact that the closed
loop system is robust to process variations is one of the reason why control
has been so successful and that control systems for complex processes can
indeed be designed using simple models. This is illustrated by an example.
EXAMPLE 5.2MODEL UNCERTAINTY

Consider a process with the transfer function
1
P ( s) =
(s + 1)4
A PI controller with the parameters k = 0.775 and Ti = 2.05 gives a closed

loop system with Ms = 2.00 and Mt = 1.35. The complementary sensitivity
has its maximum for mt = 0.46. Figure 5.13 shows the Nyquist curve
ld
of the transfer function of the process and the uncertainty bounds P =
h Ph/hT h for a few frequencies. The figure shows that
Large uncertainties are permitted for low frequencies, T (0) = 1.
The smallest relative error h P/ Ph occurs for = 0.46.
For = 1 we have hT (i )h = 0.26 which means that the stability
or
requirement is h P/ Ph < 3.8
For = 2 we have hT (i )h = 0.032 which means that the stability
requirement is h P/ Ph < 31
The situation illustrated in the figure is typical for many processes, mod-
erately small uncertainties are only required around the gain crossover
W
frequencies, but large uncertainties can be permitted at higher and lower
frequencies. A consequence of this is also that a simple model that de-
scribes the process dynamics well around the crossover frequency is suf-
ficient for design. Systems with many resonance peaks are an exception
to this rule because the process transfer function for such systems may
have large gains also for higher frequencies.
Variations in Closed Loop Transfer Function

TU
So far we have investigated the risk for instability. The effects of small
variation in process dynamics on the closed loop transfer function will
now be investigated. To do this we will analyze the system in Figure 5.1.
For simplicity we will assume that F = 1 and that the disturbances d
and n are zero. The transfer function from reference to output is given by
Y PC
= =T (5.12)
R 1 + PC
JN
193

ld
Figure 5.13 Nyquist curve of a nominal process transfer function P(s) = (s + 1)4
shown in full lines. The circles show the uncertainty regions h Ph = 1/hT h obtained
for a PI controller with k = 0.775 and Ti = 2.05 for = 0, 0.46 and 1.
or
Compare with (5.2). The transfer function T which belongs to the Gang
of Four is called the complementary sensitivity function. Differentiating
(5.12) we get
dT C PC T
= = =S
dP (1 + PC )2 (1 + PC )(1 + PC ) P P
W
Hence
d log T dT P
= =S (5.13)
d log P dP T
This equation is the reason for calling S the sensitivity function. The
relative error in the closed loop transfer function T will thus be small
if the sensitivity is small. This is one of the very useful properties of
TU
feedback. For example this property was exploited by Black at Bell labs
to build the feedback amplifiers that made it possible to use telephones
over large distances.
A small value of the sensitivity function thus means that disturbances
are attenuated and that the effect of process perturbations also are negli-
gible. A plot of the magnitude of the complementary sensitivity function
as in Figure 5.9 is a good way to determine the frequencies where model
precision is essential.
JN
194

Constraints on Design
Constraints on the maximum sensitivities Ms and Mt are important to
ensure that closed loop system is insensitive to process variations. Typical
constraints are that the sensitivities are in the range of 1.1 to 2. This has
implications for design of control systems which are illustrated by an
example.
EXAMPLE 5.3SENSITIVITIES CONSTRAIN CLOSED LOOP POLES

PI control of a first order system was discussed in Section 4.4 where
it was shown that the closed loop system was of second order and that
the closed loop poles could be placed arbitrarily by proper choice of the
controller parameters. The process and the controller are characterized
by
ld
b
Y ( s) = U ( s)
s+a
ki
U (s) = kY (s) + ( R(s) Y (s))
s
or
where U , Y and R are the Laplace transforms of the process input, output
and the reference signal. The closed loop characteristic polynomial is
s2 + (a + bk)s + bki
requiring this to be equal to
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
W
we find that the controller parameters are given by
2 0 1
k=
b
02
ki =
b
TU
and there are no apparent constraints on the choice of parameters and

0 . Calculating the sensitivity functions we get
s(s + a)
S ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
(2 0 a)s + 02
T ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
JN
195

2
10
0
10
h S(i )h
2
10
4
10
2 1 0 1 2
10 10 10 10 10

1
10
0
10
h S(i )h
1
10
ld
2
10
3
10
2 1 0 1 2
10 10 10 10 10

Figure 5.14 Magnitude curve for bode plots of the sensitivity function (above) and
or
the complementary sensitivity function (below) for = 0.7, a = 1 and 0 /a = 0.1
(dashed), 1 (solid) and 10 (dotted).
Figure 5.14 shows clearly that the sensitivities will be large if the pa-
rameter 0 is chosen smaller than a. The equation for controller gain
also gives an indication that small values of 0 are not desirable because
proportional gain then becomes negative which means that the feedback
W
is positive.
Sensitivities and Relative Damping

For simple low order control systems we have based design criteria on the
patterns of the poles and zeros of the complementary transfer function. To
relate the general results on robustness to the analysis of the simple con-
trollers it is of interest to find the relations between the sensitivities and
relative damping. The complementary sensitivity function for a standard
TU
second order system is given by

02
T ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
This implies that the sensitivity function is given by
s(s + 2 0 )
S ( s) = 1 T ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
JN
196

5.6 When are Two Processes Similar?
2.5
Ms , Mt 2
1.5
1
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

Figure 5.15 Maximum sensitivities Ms (full line) and Mt (dashed line) as func-
02 s(s+2 0 )
tions of relative damping for T (s) = and S(s) = .
s2 +2 0 s+ 02 s2 +2 0 s+ 02
ld
Straight forward but tedious calculations give.
s p
8 2 + 1 + (4 2 + 1) 8 2 + 1
Ms = p
8 2 + 1 + (4 2 1) 8 2 + 1
p
or
1 + 8 2 + 1
wms = 0
2
p
1/(2 1 2 ) if 2/2 (5.14)
Mt =
1 if > 2/2
p
0 1 2 2 if 2/2
mt =
0
W
if > 2/2
The relation between the sensitivities and relative damping are shown in
Figure 5.15. The values = 0.3, 0.5 and 0.7 correspond to the maximum
sensitivities Ms = 1.99, 1.47 and 1.28 respectively.

TU
A fundamental issue is to determine when two processes are close. This

seemingly innocent problem is not as simple as it may appear. When dis-
cussing the effects of uncertainty of the process on stability in Section 5.5
we used the quantity
( P1 , P2 ) = max h P1 (i ) P2 (i )h (5.15)

JN
197

1000
800
600
400
200
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 5.16 Step responses for systems with the transfer functions P1 (s) =
1000/(s + 1) and P2 (s) = 107 /((s + 1)(s + 100)2 ).
ld
as a measure of closeness of two processes. In addition the transfer func-
tions P1 and P2 were assumed to be stable. This means conceptually that
we compare the outputs of two systems subject to the same input. This
may appear as a natural way to compare two systems but there are com-
plications. Two systems that have similar open loop behaviors may have
or
drastically different behavior in closed loop and systems with very differ-
ent open loop behavior may have similar closed loop behavior. We illus-
trate this by two examples.
EXAMPLE 5.4SIMILAR IN OPEN LOOP BUT DIFFERENT IN CLOSED LOOP

Systems with the transfer functions
W
1000 1000a2
P1 (s) = , P2 (s) =
s+1 (s + 1)(s + a)2
have very similar open loop responses for large values of a. This is il-
lustrated in Figure 5.16 which shows the step responses of for a = 100.
The differences between the step responses are barely noticeable in the
figure. The transfer functions from reference values to output for closed
loop systems obtained with error feedback with C = 1 are
TU
1000 107
T1 = , T2 =
s + 1001 (s 287)(s2 + 86s + 34879)
The closed loop systems are very different because the system T1 is stable
and T2 is unstable.
JN
198

EXAMPLE 5.5DIFFERENT IN OPEN LOOP BUT SIMILAR IN CLOSED LOOP

Systems with the transfer functions
1000 1000
P1 (s) = , P2 (s) =
s+1 s1
have very different open loop properties because one system is unstable
and the other is stable. The transfer functions from reference values to
output for closed loop systems obtained with error feedback with C = 1
are
1000 1000
T1 (s) = T2 (s) =
s + 1001 s + 999
which are very close.
ld
These examples show clearly that to compare two systems by investigating
their open loop properties may be strongly misleading from the point
of view of feedback control. Inspired by the examples we will instead
compare the properties of the closed loop systems obtained when two
processes P1 and P2 are controlled by the same controller C. To do this
it will be assumed that the closed loop systems obtained are stable. The
or
difference between the closed loop transfer functions is
P2 C ( P1 P2 ) C
P1 C
( P1 , P2 ) = = (5.16)
1 + P1 C 1 + P2 C (1 + P1 C )(1 + P2 C )
This is a natural way to express the closeness of the systems P1 and P2 ,

when they are controlled by C. It can be verified that is a proper norm
in the mathematical sense. There is one difficulty from a practical point
W
of view because the norm depends on the feedback C. The norm has some
interesting properties.
Assume that the controller C has high gain at low frequencies. For
low frequencies we have
P1 P2
( P1 , P2 )
P1 P2 C
If C is large it means that can be small even if the difference P1 P2 is

TU
large. For frequencies where the maximum sensitivity is large we have
( P1 , P2 ) Ms1 Ms2 h C( P1 P2 )h
For frequencies where P1 and P2 have small gains, typically for high
frequencies, we have
( P1 , P2 ) h C( P1 P2 )h
JN
199

This equation shows clearly the disadvantage of having controllers with

large gain at high frequencies. The sensitivity to modeling error for high
frequencies can thus be reduced substantially by a controller whose gain
goes to zero rapidly for high frequencies. This has been known empirically
for a long time and it is called high frequency roll off.
5.7 The Sensitivity Functions
We have seen that the sensitivity function S and the complementary sen-
sitivity function T tell much about the feedback loop. We have also seen
from Equations (5.6) and (5.13) that it is advantageous to have a small
value of the sensitivity function and it follows from (5.10) that a small
ld
value of the complementary sensitivity allows large process uncertainty.
Since
1 P ( s) C ( s)
S ( s) = and T (s) =
1 + P ( s) C ( s) 1 + P ( s) C ( s)
it follows that
S ( s) + T ( s) = 1 (5.17)
or
This means that S and T cannot be made small simultaneously. The loop
transfer function L is typically large for small values of s and it goes to
zero as s goes to infinity. This means that S is typically small for small s
and close to 1 for large. The complementary sensitivity function is close
to 1 for small s and it goes to 0 as s goes to infinity.
A basic problem is to investigate if S can be made small over a large
W
frequency range. We will start by investigating an example.
EXAMPLE 5.6SYSTEM THAT ADMITS SMALL SENSITIVITIES

Consider a closed loop system consisting of a first order process and a
proportional controller. Let the loop transfer function
k
L(s) = P(s) C (s) =
s+1
TU
where parameter k is the controller gain. The sensitivity function is
s+1
S ( s) =
s+1+k
and we have r
1 + 2
h S(i )h =
1 + 2k + k2 + 2
JN
200

5.7 The Sensitivity Functions
This implies that h S(i )h < 1 for all finite frequencies and that the sensi-
tivity can be made arbitrary small for any finite frequency by making k
sufficiently large.
The system in Example 5.6 is unfortunately an exception. The key feature
of the system is that the Nyquist curve of the process lies in the fourth
quadrant. Systems whose Nyquist curves are in the first and fourth quad-
rant are called positive real. For such systems the Nyquist curve never
enters the region shown in Figure 5.11 where the sensitivity is greater
than one.
For typical control systems there are unfortunately severe constraints
on the sensitivity function. Bode has shown that if the loop transfer has
poles pk in the right half plane and if it goes to zero faster than 1/ s for
large s the sensitivity function satisfies the following integral
ld
Z Z X
1
log h S(i )h d = log d = Re pk (5.18)
0 0 h1 + L(i )h
This equation shows that if the sensitivity function is made smaller for
some frequencies it must increase at other frequencies. This means that
or
if disturbance attenuation is improved in one frequency range it will be
worse in other. This has been been called the water bed effect.
Equation (5.18) implies that there are fundamental limitations to what
can be achieved by control and that control design can be viewed as a
redistribution of disturbance attenuation over different frequencies.
For a loop transfer function without poles in the right half plane (5.18)
reduces to Z
W
log h S(i )hd = 0
0
This formula can be given a nice geometric interpretation as shown in

Figure 5.17 which shows log h S(i )h as a function of . The area over the
horizontal axis must be equal to the area under the axis.
Derivation of Bodes Formula*

This is a technical section which requires some knowledge of the theory
TU
of complex variables, in particular contour integration. Assume that the

loop transfer function has distinct poles at s = pk in the right half plane
and that L(s) goes to zero faster than 1/ s for large values of s. Consider
the integral of the logarithm of the sensitivity function S(s) = 1/(1 +
L(s)) over the contour shown in Figure 5.18. The contour encloses the
right half plane except the points s = pk where the loop transfer function
L(s) = P(s) C (s) has poles and the sensitivity function S(s) has zeros. The
direction of the contour is counter clockwise.
JN
201

log h S(i )h 0
3
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Figure 5.17 Geometric interpretation of Bodes integral formula (5.18).
ld
pk
or
W
Figure 5.18 Contour used to prove Bodes theorem.
Z Z i Z XZ
log( S(s))ds = log( S(s))ds + log( S(s))ds + log( S(s))ds
i R k
= I1 + I2 + I3 = 0
where R is a large semi circle on the right and k is the contour starting
TU
on the imaginary axis at s = Im pk and a small circle enclosing the pole

pk . The integral is zero because the function log S(s) is regular inside the
contour. We have
Z iR Z iR
I1 = i log( S(i ))d = 2i log(h S(i )h)d
iR 0
because the real part of log S(i ) is an even function and the imaginary
JN
202

5.8 Reference Signals
part is an odd function. Furthermore we have

Z Z Z
I2 = log( S(s))ds = log(1 + L(s))ds L(s)ds
R R R
Since L(s) goes to zero faster than 1/ s for large s the integral goes to
zero when the radius of the circle goes to infinity. Next we consider the
integral I3 , for this purpose we split the contour into three parts X + ,
and X as indicated in Figure 5.18. We have
Z Z Z Z
log( S(s))ds = log( S(s))ds + log( S(s))ds + log( S(s))ds
X+ X
The contour is a small circle with radius r around the pole pk . The
ld
magnitude of the integrand is of the order log r and the length of the
path is 2 r. The integral thus goes to zero as the radius r goes to zero.
Furthermore we have
Z Z
log( S(s))ds + log( S(s))ds
X+ X
Z

or
= log( S(s)) log( S(s 2 i) ds = 2 pk
X+
Letting the small circles go to zero and the large circle go to infinity and
adding the contributions from all right half plane poles pk gives
Z iR X
I1 + I2 + I3 = 2i log(h S(i )h)d + 2 pk = 0.
W
0 k
which is Bodes formula (5.18).

The response of output y and control u to reference r for the systems in
Figure 5.1 having two degrees of freedom is given by the transfer functions
TU
PC F
G yr = = FT
1 + PC
CF
Gur =
1 + PC
First we can observe that if F = 1 then the response to reference signals
is given by T. In many cases the transfer function T gives a satisfactory
JN
203

response but in some cases it may be desirable to modify the response. If

the feedback controller C has been chosen to deal with disturbances and
process uncertainty it is straight forward to find a feedforward transfer
function that gives the desired response. If the desired response from
reference r to output y is characterized by the transfer function M the
transfer function F is simply given by
M (1 + PC ) M
F= = (5.19)
T PC
The transfer function F has to be stable and it therefore follows that all
right half plane zeros of C and P must be zeros of M . Non-minimum phase
properties of the process and the controller therefore impose restrictions
on the response to reference signals. The transfer function given by (5.19)
ld
can also be complicated so it may be useful to approximate the transfer
function.
Tracking of Slowly Varying Reference Signals

In applications such as motion control and robotics it may be highly de-
sirable to have very high precision in following slowly varying reference
or
signals. To investigate this problem we will consider a system with error
feedback. Neglecting disturbances it follows that
E ( s ) = S ( s ) R( s )
To investigate the effects of slowly varying reference signals we make a

Taylor series expansion of the sensitivity function
W
S(s) = e0 + e1 s + e2 s2 + . . . .
The coefficients ek are called error coefficients. The output generated by

slowly varying inputs is thus given by
dr(t) d2 r(t)
y(t) = r(t) e0 r(t) e1 e2 + ... (5.20)
dt dt2
TU
Notice that the sensitivity function is given by
1
S ( s) =
1 + P ( s) C ( s)
The coefficient e0 is thus zero if P(s) C (s) 1/ s for small s, i.e. if the
process or the controller has integral action.
JN
204

EXAMPLE 5.7TRACKING A RAMP SIGNALS

Consider for example a ramp input
r(t) = v0 t.
It follows from (5.20) that the output is given by
y(t) = v0 t e0 v0 t e1 v0 .
The error grows linearly if e0 = 0. If e0 = 0 there is a constant error which

is equal to e1 v0 in the steady state.
The example shows that a system where the loop transfer function has
an integrator there will be a constant steady state error when tracking
ld
a ramp signal. The error can be eliminated by using feedforward as is
illustrated in the next example.
EXAMPLE 5.8REDUCING TRACKING ERROR BY FEEDFORWARD

Consider the problem in Example 5.7. Assume that e0 = 0. Introducing
the feedforward transfer function
or
F = 1 + f1s (5.21)
we find that the transfer function from reference to output becomes

G yr (s) = F (s)T (s) = F (s) 1 S(s)
= (1 + f 1 s)(1 e0 e1 s e2 s2 . . .)
= 1 e0 + ( f 1 (1 e0 ) e1 )s + ( e2 f 1 e2 )s2 + . . .
W
If the controller has integral action it follows that e0 = 0. It then follows
that the tracking error is zero if f 1 = e1 . The compensator (5.21) implies
that the feedforward compensator predicts the output. Notice that two
coefficients have to be matched.
The error in tracking ramps can also be eliminated by introducing an
additional integrator in the controller as is illustrated in the next example.
TU
EXAMPLE 5.9REDUCING TRACKING ERROR BY FEEDBACK

Choosing F = 1 and a controller which gives a loop transfer function with
two integrators we have
k
L( s ) 2
s
for small s. This implies that e0 = e1 = 0 and e2 = 1/ k and it follows from
(5.20) that there will be no steady state tracking error. There is, however,
JN
205

1.4
1.2
Step response
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time
10
Ramp response
ld
4
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time
or
Figure 5.19 Step (above) and ramp (below) responses for a system with error
feedback having e0 = e1 = 0.
one disadvantage with a loop transfer function having two integrators

because the response to step signals will have a substantial overshoot.
The error in the step response is given by
1
W
E ( s) = S ( s)
s
The integral of the error is
E ( s) 1
= S ( s) 2
s s
Using the final value theorem we find that
Z t
sS(s)
TU
lim e( )d = lim =0
t 0 s0 s2
Since the integral of the error for a step in the reference is zero it means
that the error must have an overshoot. This is illustrated in Figure 5.19.
This is avoided if feedforward is used.
The figure indicates that an attempt to obtain a controller that gives
good responses to step and ramp inputs is a difficult compromise if the
JN
206

5.9 Fundamental Limitations
controller is linear and time invariant. In this case it is possible to resolve

the compromise by using adaptive controllers that adapt their behavior
to the properties of the input signal.
Constraints on the sensitivities will, in general, give restrictions on the
closed loop poles that can be chosen. This implies that when controllers
are designed using pole placements it is necessary to check afterwards
that the sensitivities have reasonable values. This does in fact apply to all
design methods that do not introduce explicit constraints on the sensitivity
functions.
ld
In any field it is important to be aware of fundamental limitations. In this
section we will discuss these for the basic feedback loop. We will discuss
how quickly a system can respond to changes in the reference signal.
Some of the factors that limit the performance are
Measurement noise
Actuator saturation
Process dynamics
Measurement Noise and Saturations
or
It seems intuitively reasonable that fast response requires a controller
with high gain. When the controller has high gain measurement noise is
also amplified and fed into the system. This will result in variations in
W
the control signal and in the process variable. It is essential that the fluc-
tuations in the control signal are not so large that they cause the actuator
to saturate. Since measurement noise typically has high frequencies the
high frequency gain Mc of the controller is thus an important quantity.
Measurement noise and actuator saturation thus gives a bound on the
high frequency gain of the controller and therefore also on the response
speed.
There are many sources of measurement noise, it can caused by the
TU
physics of the sensor, in can be electronic. In computer controlled systems

it is also caused by the resolution of the analog to digital converter. Con-
sider for example a computer controlled system with 12 bit AD and DA
converters. Since 12 bits correspond to 4096 it follows that if the high
frequency gain of the controller is Mc = 4096 one bit conversion error will
make the control signal change over the full range. To have a reasonable
system we may require that the fluctuations in the control signal due
to measurement noise cannot be larger than 5% of the signal span. This
JN
207

means that the high frequency gain of the controller must be restricted
to 200.
Dynamics Limitations
The limitations caused by noise and saturations seem quite obvious. It
turns out that there may also be severe limitations due to the dynamical
properties of the system. This means that there are systems that are
inherently difficult or even impossible to control. It is very important
for designers of any system to be aware of this. Since systems are often
designed from static considerations the difficulties do not show up because
they are dynamic in nature. A brief summary of dynamic elements that
cause difficulties are summarized briefly.
It seems intuitively clear that time delay cause limitations in the re-
ld
sponse speed. A system clearly cannot respond in times that are shorter
than the time delay. It follows from
1 sTd /2 s 2/ Td s z
esTd = = (5.22)
1 + sTd /2 s + 2/ Td s+ z
that a zero in the right half plane z can be approximated with a time
or
delay Td = 2/ z and we may thus expect that zeros in the right half plane
also cause limitations. Notice that a small zero corresponds to a long time
delay.
Intuitively it also seems reasonable that instabilities will cause lim-
itations. We can expect that a fast controller is required to control an
unstable system.
Summarizing we can thus expect that time delays and poles and zeros
W
in the right half plane give limitations. To give some quantitative results
we will characterize the closed loop system by the gain crossover frequency
gc . This is the smallest frequency where the loop transfer function has
unit magnitude, i.e. h L(i gc )h. This parameter is approximately inversely
proportional to the response time of a system. The dynamic elements that
cause limitations are time delays and poles and zeros in the right half
plane. The key observations are:
A right half plane zero z limits the response speed. A simple rule of
TU
thumb is
gc < 0.5z (5.23)
Slow RHP zeros are thus particularly bad.
A time delay Td limits the response speed. A simple rule of thumb
is
gc Td < 0.4 (5.24)
JN
208

A right half plane pole p requires high gain crossover frequency. A

simple rule of thumb is
gc > 2p (5.25)
Fast unstable poles require a high crossover frequency.
Systems with a right half plane pole p and a right half plane zero z
cannot be controlled unless the pole and the zero are well separated.
A simple rule of thumb is
p > 6z (5.26)
A system with a a right half plane pole and a time delay Td cannot
be controlled unless the product pTd is sufficiently small. A simple
ld
rule of thumb is
pTd < 0.16 (5.27)
We illustrate this with a few examples.
EXAMPLE 5.10BALANCING AN INVERTED PENDULUM
or
Consider the situation when we attempt to balance a pole manually. An
inverted pendulum is an example of an unstable system. With manual
balancing there is a neural delay which is about Td = 0.04 s. The transfer
function from horizontal position of the pivot to the angle is
s2
G ( s) = g
s2 Q
W
where g = 9.8 m/ s2 is the acceleration of
pgravity and Q is the length of the
pendulum. The system has a pole p = g/Q. The inequality (5.27) gives
p
0.04 g/Q = 0.16
Hence, Q = 0.6 m. Investigate the shortest pole you can balance.

TU
EXAMPLE 5.11BICYCLE WITH REAR WHEEL STEERING

The dynamics of a bicycle was derived in Section 4.3. To obtain the model
for a bicycle with rear wheel steering we can simply change the sign of the
velocity. It then follows from (4.9) that the transfer function from steering
angle to tilt angle is
mV0 Q Js2 mg l
P ( s) =
b as + V0
JN
209

Notice that the transfer function depends strongly on the forwardpvelocity

of the bicycle. The system thus has a right half plane pole at p = mgQ/ J
and a right half plane zero at z = V0 / a, and it can be suspected that the
system is difficult to control. The location of the pole does not depend on
velocity but the the position of the zero changes significantly
p with velocity.
At low velocities the zero is at the origin. For V0 = a mgQ/ J the pole and
the zero are at the same location and for higher velocities the zero is to
the right of the pole. To draw some quantitative conclusions we introduce
the numerical values m = 70 kg, Q = 1.2 m, a = 0.7, J = 120 kgm2 and
V = 5 m/s, give z = V / a = 7.14 rad/s and p = 0 = 2.6 rad/s we find
that p = 2.6. With V0 = 5 m/s we get z = 7.1, and p/ z = 2.7. To have a
situation where the system can be controlled it follows from (5.26) that
to have z/ p = 6 the velocity must be increased to 11 m/s. We can thus
ld
conclude that if the speed of the bicycle can be increased to about 10 m/s
so rapidly that we do not loose balance it can indeed be ridden.
The bicycle example illustrates clearly that it is useful to assess the funda-
mental dynamical limitations of a system at an early stage in the design.
If this had been done the it could quickly have been concluded that the
or
study of rear wheel steered motor bikes in 4.3 was not necessary.
Remedies
Having understood factors that cause fundamental limitations it is inter-
esting to know how they should be overcome. Here are a few suggestions.
Problems with sensor noise are best approached by finding the roots
W
of the noise and trying to eliminate them. Increasing the resolution of
a converter is one example. Actuation problems can be dealt with in a
similar manner. Limitations caused by rate saturation can be reduced by
replacing the actuator.
Problems that are caused by time delays and RHP zeros can be ap-
proached by moving sensors to different places. It can also be beneficial to
add sensors. Recall that the zeros depend on how inputs and outputs are
coupled to the states of a system. A system where all states are measured
TU
has no zeros.
Poles are inherent properties of a system, they can only be modified
by redesign of the system.
Redesign of the process is the final remedy. Since static analysis can
never reveal the fundamental limitations it is very important to make an
assessment of the dynamics of a system at an early stage of the design.
This is one of the main reasons why all system designers should have a
basic knowledge of control.
JN
210

5.10 Electronic Amplifiers
V1 V V2
R2
R1 + R2 A
R1
R1 + R2
Figure 5.20 Block diagram of the feedback amplifier in Figure 2.9. Compare with
Figure 2.10
ld
There are many variations on the prototype problem discussed in Sec-
or
tion 5.2. To illustrate this we will discuss electronic amplifiers. Examples
of such amplifiers have been given several times earlier, see Section 1.8
and Example 2.3.
The key issues in amplifier design are gain, noise and process varia-
tions. The purpose of an electronic amplifier is to provide a high gain and
a highly linear input output characteristics. The main disturbance is elec-
trical noise which typically has high frequencies. There are variations in
W
the components that create nonlinearities and slow drift that are caused
by temperature variations. A nice property of feedback amplifiers that
differ from many other processes is that many extra signals are available
internally.
The difficulty of finding a natural block diagram representation of a
simple feedback amplifier was discussed in Example 2.3. Some alternative
block diagram representations were given in Figure 2.10. In particular
we noted the difficulty that there was not a one to one correspondence
TU
between the components and the blocks. We will start by showing yet
another representation. In this diagram we have kept the negative gain
of the feedback loop in the forward path and the standard 1 block has
been replaced by a feedback. It is customary to use diagrams of this type
when dealing with feedback amplifiers. The generic version of the diagram
is shown in Figure 5.21. The block A represents the open loop amplifier,
block F the feedback and block H the feedforward. The blocks F and H
are represented by passive components.
JN
211

V1 V V2
R2
R 1 + R2 A
R1
R1 + R2
Figure 5.21 Generic block diagram of a feedback amplifier.
ld
For the circuit in Figure 5.20 we have
R1
F=
R1 + R2
R2
H=
R1 + R2
or
notice that both F and H are less than one.
The Gain Bandwidth Product

The input-output relation for the system in Figure 5.21 is given by
L V2
= G
L V1
W
where
AH
G= (5.28)
1 + AF
The transfer function of an operational amplifier can be approximated by
b
A(s) =
s+a
The amplifier has gain b/ a and bandwidth a. The gain bandwidth product
TU
is b. Typical numbers for a simple operational amplifier that is often used

to implement control systems, LM 741, are a = 50 Hz, b = 1 MHz. Other
amplifiers may have gain bandwidth products that are several orders of
magnitude larger.
Furthermore we have
R1 R2
F= , H=
R1 + R2 R1 + R2
JN
212

6
10
4
10
Gain
2
10
0
10
2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Figure 5.22 Gain curves of the open loop amplifier (full lines) and the feedback
ld
amplifier (dashed)
Combining this with the expression for A(s) in (5.28) gives
bR2 bR2
G=
( R1 + R2 )(s + a) + bR1 R2 s + bR1
or
where the approximation is obtained from the inequalities b >> a and
R2 >> R1 . The closed loop system thus has gain R2 R1 and bandwidth
0 = bR1 / R2 and it follows that the gain bandwidth product is constant
Gain Bandwidth = b
Notice that feedback does not change the gain bandwidth product. The
W
effect of feedback is simply to decrease the gain and increase the band-
width. This is illustrated in Figure 5.22 which shows the gain curves of
the open and closed loop systems. Also notice that the sensitivity of the
system is
1 ( R1 + R2 )(s + a) R2 (s + a)
S= =
1 + AF ( R1 + R2 )(s + a) + bR1 R2 s + bR1
The high open loop gain of the amplifier is traded off for high bandwidth
TU
and low sensitivity. This is some times expressed by saying that gain is the
hard currency of feedback amplifiers which can be traded for sensitivity
and linearity.
Sensitivity
It follows from (5.28) that
log G = log AH log (1 + AF )

JN
213

Differentiating this expression we find that
d log G 1
=
d log A 1 + AF
d log G AF
=
d log F 1 + AF
d log G
=1
d log H
The loop transfer function is normally large which implies that it is only
the sensitivity with respect the amplifier that is small. This is, how-
ld
ever, the important active part where there are significant variations.
The transfer functions F and H typically represent passive components
that are much more stable than the amplifiers.
Signal to Noise Ratio

The ratio between signal and noise is an important parameter for an
amplifier. Noise is represented by the signals n1 and n2 in Figure 5.21.
or
Noise entering at the amplifier input is more critical than noise at the
amplifier output. For an open loop system the output voltage is given by
Vol = N2 A( N1 + H V1 )
For a system with feedback the output voltage is instead given by

W
1 1
Vcl = N2 A( N1 + H V1 ) = Vol
1 + AF 1 + AF
The signals will be smaller for a system with feedback but the signal to
noise ratio does not change.
5.11 Summary
TU
Having got insight into some fundamental properties of the feedback loop
we are in a position to discuss how to formulate specifications on a control
system. It was mentioned in Section 5.2 that requirements on a control
system should include stability of the closed loop system, robustness to
model uncertainty, attenuation of measurement noise, injection of mea-
surement noise ability to follow reference signals. From the results given
in this section we also know that these properties are captured by six
JN
214

5.11 Summary
transfer functions called the Gang of Six. The specifications can thus be
expressed in terms of these transfer functions.
Stability and robustness to process uncertainties can be expressed by
the sensitivity function and the complementary sensitivity function
1 PC
S= , T= .
1 + PC 1 + PC
Load disturbance attenuation is described by the transfer function from

load disturbances to process output
P
G yd = = PS.
1 + PC
ld
The effect of measurement noise is be captured by the transfer function
C
Gun = = CS,
1 + PC
which describes how measurement noise influences the control signal. The
or
response to set point changes is described by the transfer functions
F PC FC
G yr = = FT , Gur = = FCS
1 + PC 1 + PC
Compare with (5.1). A significant advantage with controller structure

with two degrees of freedom is that the problem of set point response can
be decoupled from the response to load disturbances and measurement
W
noise. The design procedure can then be divided into two independent
steps.
First design the feedback controller C that reduces the effects of
load disturbances and the sensitivity to process variations without
introducing too much measurement noise into the system
Then design the feedforward F to give the desired response to set
points.
TU
JN
215

6
PID Control
ld
6.1 Introduction
The PID controller is the most common form of feedback. It was an es-
sential element of early governors and it became the standard tool when
process control emerged in the 1940s. In process control today, more than
or
95% of the control loops are of PID type, most loops are actually PI con-
trol. PID controllers are today found in all areas where control is used.
The controllers come in many different forms. There are stand-alone sys-
tems in boxes for one or a few loops, which are manufactured by the
hundred thousands yearly. PID control is an important ingredient of a
distributed control system. The controllers are also embedded in many
special-purpose control systems. PID control is often combined with logic,
sequential functions, selectors, and simple function blocks to build the
W
complicated automation systems used for energy production, transporta-
tion, and manufacturing. Many sophisticated control strategies, such as
model predictive control, are also organized hierarchically. PID control is
used at the lowest level; the multivariable controller gives the setpoints
to the controllers at the lower level. The PID controller can thus be said
to be the bread and buttertt of control engineering. It is an important
component in every control engineers tool box.
PID controllers have survived many changes in technology, from me-
TU
chanics and pneumatics to microprocessors via electronic tubes, transis-

tors, integrated circuits. The microprocessor has had a dramatic influence
on the PID controller. Practically all PID controllers made today are based
on microprocessors. This has given opportunities to provide additional fea-
tures like automatic tuning, gain scheduling, and continuous adaptation.
JN
216

6.2 The Algorithm
6.2 The Algorithm

We will start by summarizing the key features of the PID controller. The
textbook version of the PID algorithm is described by:
Zt
1 de(t)
u(t) = K e(t) + e( )d + Td (6.1)
Ti dt
0
where y is the measured process variable, r the reference variable, u is

the control signal and e is the control error ( e = ysp y). The reference
variable is often called the set point. The control signal is thus a sum of
three terms: the P-term (which is proportional to the error), the I-term
(which is proportional to the integral of the error), and the D-term (which
ld
is proportional to the derivative of the error). The controller parameters
are proportional gain K , integral time Ti , and derivative time Td . The
integral, proportional and derivative part can be interpreted as control
actions based on the past, the present and the future as is illustrated
in Figure 2.2. The derivative part can also be interpreted as prediction
by linear extrapolation as is illustrated in Figure 2.2. The action of the
or
different terms can be illustrated by the following figures which show the
response to step changes in the reference value in a typical case.
Effects of Proportional, Integral and Derivative Action

Proportional control is illustrated in Figure 6.1. The controller is given
by (6.1) with Ti = and Td = 0. The figure shows that there is always
a steady state error in proportional control. The error will decrease with
W
increasing gain, but the tendency towards oscillation will also increase.
Figure 6.2 illustrates the effects of adding integral. It follows from (6.1)
that the strength of integral action increases with decreasing integral time
Ti . The figure shows that the steady state error disappears when integral
action is used. Compare with the discussion of the magic of integral
action in Section Section 2.2. The tendency for oscillation also increases
with decreasing Ti . The properties of derivative action are illustrated in
Figure 6.3.
TU
Figure 6.3 illustrates the effects of adding derivative action. The pa-
rameters K and Ti are chosen so that the closed-loop system is oscillatory.
Damping increases with increasing derivative time, but decreases again
when derivative time becomes too large. Recall that derivative action can
be interpreted as providing prediction by linear extrapolation over the
time Td . Using this interpretation it is easy to understand that derivative
action does not help if the prediction time Td is too large. In Figure 6.3
the period of oscillation is about 6 s for the system without derivative
JN
217

Chapter 6. PID Control

K =5
K =2
1
K =1
0
0 5 10 15 20
K =5
K =2
2 K =1
2
0 5 10 15 20
ld
Figure 6.1 Simulation of a closed-loop system with proportional control. The pro-
cess transfer function is P(s) = 1/(s + 1)3 .
Ti = 1
Ti = 2
Ti = 5
1
or
Ti =
0
0 5 10 15 20
Ti = 1
2 Ti = 2
Ti = 5
1 Ti =
W
0
0 5 10 15 20
Figure 6.2 Simulation of a closed-loop system with proportional and integral con-
trol. The process transfer function is P(s) = 1/(s + 1)3 , and the controller gain is
K = 1.
TU
action. Derivative actions ceases to be effective when Td is larger than

a 1 s (one sixth of the period). Also notice that the period of oscillation
increases when derivative time is increased.
A Perspective
There is much more to PID than is revealed by (6.1). A faithful imple-
mentation of the equation will actually not result in a good controller. To
obtain a good PID controller it is also necessary to consider
JN
218

6.3 Filtering and Set Point Weighting

Td = 0.1
Td = 0.7
1
Td = 4.5
0
0 5 10 15 20
Td = 0.7 Td = 4.5 Td = 0.1
2
0 5 10 15 20
ld
Figure 6.3 Simulation of a closed-loop system with proportional, integral and
derivative control. The process transfer function is P(s) = 1/(s + 1)3 , the controller
gain is K = 3, and the integral time is Ti = 2.
Noise filtering and high frequency roll-off
or
Set point weighting and 2 DOF
Windup
Tuning
Computer implementation
W
In the case of the PID controller these issues emerged organically as the
technology developed but they are actually important in the implemen-
tation of all controllers. Many of these questions are closely related to
fundamental properties of feedback, some of them have been discussed
earlier in the book.
TU
Filtering
Differentiation is always sensitive to noise. This is clearly seen from the
transfer function G (s) = s of a differentiator which goes to infinity for
large s. The following example is also illuminating.
JN
219

EXAMPLE 6.1DIFFERENTIATION AMPLIFIES HIGH FREQUENCY NOISE

Consider the signal
y(t) = sin t + n(t) = sin t + an sin n t
where the noise is sinusoidal noise with frequency . The derivative of

the signal is
d y(t)
= cos t + n(t) = cos t + an cos n t
dt
The signal to noise ratio for the original signal is 1/ an but the signal to
noise ratio of the differentiated signal is / an . This ratio can be arbitrarily
ld
high if is large.
In a practical controller with derivative action it is therefor necessary to
limit the high frequency gain of the derivative term. This can be done by
implementing the derivative term as
sK Td
D= (6.2)
or
Y
1 + sTd / N
instead of D = sTd Y. The approximation given by (6.2) can be interpreted

as the ideal derivative sTd filtered by a first-order system with the time
constant Td / N. The approximation acts as a derivative for low-frequency
signal components. The gain, however, is limited to K N. This means that
high-frequency measurement noise is amplified at most by a factor K N.
W
Typical values of N are 8 to 20.
Further limitation of the high-frequency gain

The transfer function from measurement y to controller output u of a PID
controller with the approximate derivative is

1 sTd
C ( s) = K 1+ +
sTi 1 + sTd / N
TU
This controller has constant gain
lim C (s) = K (1 + N )
s
at high frequencies. It follows from the discussion on robustness against

process variations in Section 5.5 that it is highly desirable to roll-off the
JN
220

controller gain at high frequencies. This can be achieved by additional

low pass filtering of the control signal by
1
F ( s) =
(1 + sT f )n
where T f is the filter time constant and n is the order of the filter. The
choice of T f is a compromise between filtering capacity and performance.
The value of T f can be coupled to the controller time constants in the
same way as for the derivative filter above. If the derivative time is used,
T f = Td / N is a suitable choice. If the controller is only PI, T f = Ti / N
may be suitable.
The controller can also be implemented as

ld
1 1
C ( s) = K 1 + + sTd (6.3)
sTi (1 + sTd / N )2
This structure has the advantage that we can develop the design meth-
ods for an ideal PID controller and use an iterative design procedure. The
controller is first designed for the process P(s). The design gives the con-
or
troller parameter Td . An ideal controller for the process P(s)/(1 + sTd / N )2
is then designed giving a new value of Td etc. Such a procedure will also
give a clear picture of the trade-off between performance and filtering.
Set Point Weighting

When using the control law given by (6.1) it follows that a step change in
the reference signal will result in an impulse in the control signal. This
W
is often highly undesirable therefor derivative action is frequently not
applied to the reference signal. This problem can be avoided by filtering
the reference value before feeding it to the controller. Another possibility
is to let proportional action act only on part of the reference signal. This is
called set point weighting. A PID controller given by (6.1) then becomes
Zt
1 dr(t) d y(t)
u(t) = K br(t) y(t) + e( )d + Td c (6.4)
Ti dt dt
TU
where b and c are additional parameter. The integral term must be based
on error feedback to ensure the desired steady state. The controller given
by (6.4) has a structure with two degrees of freedom because the signal
path from y to u is different from that from r to u. The transfer function
from r to u is
U ( s) 1
= Cr (s) = K b + + csTd (6.5)
R( s ) sTi
JN
221

1.5
Output y
1
0.5
0
0 5 10 15
4
Input u
0
0 5 10 15
Time t
ld
Figure 6.4 Response to a step in the reference for systems with different set point
weights b = 0 dashed, b = 0.5 full and b = 1.0 dash dotted. The process has the
transfer function P(s) = 1/(s + 1)3 and the controller parameters are k = 3, ki = 1.5
and kd = 1.5.
or
and the transfer function from y to u is

U ( s) 1
= Cy (s) = K 1+ + sTd (6.6)
Y ( s) sTi
Set point weighting is thus a special case of controllers having two degrees
of freedom.
W
The system obtained with the controller (6.4) respond to load distur-
bances and measurement noise in the same way as the controller (6.1)
. The response to reference values can be modified by the parameters b
and c. This is illustrated in Figure 6.4, which shows the response of a PID
controller to setpoint changes, load disturbances, and measurement errors
for different values of b. The figure shows clearly the effect of changing b.
The overshoot for setpoint changes is smallest for b = 0, which is the case
where the reference is only introduced in the integral term, and increases
with increasing b.
TU
The parameter c is normally zero to avoid large transients in the con-

trol signal due to sudden changes in the setpoint.
6.4 Different Parameterizations

The PID algorithm given by Equation (6.1) can be represented by the
JN
222

transfer function
1
G ( s) = K 1 + + sTd (6.7)
sTi
A slightly different version is most common in commercial controllers.
This controller is described by

1 TdP 1
G P ( s) = K P 1 + (1 + sT P
) = K P
1 + + + sT P
(6.8)
sTiP d
TiP sTiP d
The controller given by Equation (6.7) is called non-interacting, and

the one given by Equation (6.8) interacting. The interacting controller
Equation (6.8) can always be represented as a non-interacting controller
whose coefficients are given by
ld
TiP + TdP
K = KP
TiP
Ti = TiP + TdP (6.9)
TiP TdP
Td =
or
TiP + TdP
An interacting controller of the form Equation (6.8) that corresponds to

a non-interacting controller can be found only if
Ti 4Td
W
The parameters are then given by
K p
KP = 1+ 1 4Td / Ti
2
T p
TiP = (6.10)
i
1+ 1 4Td / Ti
2
Ti p
TdP = 1 1 4Td / Ti
2
TU
The non-interacting controller given by Equation (6.7) is more general,

and we will use that in the future. It is, however, sometimes claimed that
the interacting controller is easier to tune manually.
It is important to keep in mind that different controllers may have
different structures when working with PID controllers. If a controller is
replaced by another type of controller, the controller parameters may have
to be changed. The interacting and the non-interacting forms differ only
JN
223

when both the I and the D parts of the controller are used. If we only use
the controller as a P, PI, or PD controller, the two forms are equivalent.
Yet another representation of the PID algorithm is given by
ki
G PP (s) = k + + skd (6.11)
s
The parameters are related to the parameters of standard form through
K
k= K ki = kd = K Td
Ti
ld
The representation Equation (6.11) is equivalent to the standard form, but
the parameter values are quite different. This may cause great difficulties
for anyone who is not aware of the differences, particularly if parameter
1/ ki is called integral time and kd derivative time. It is even more con-
fusing if ki is called integration time. The form given by Equation (6.11)
is often useful in analytical calculations because the parameters appear
or
linearly. The representation also has the advantage that it is possible to
obtain pure proportional, integral, or derivative action by finite values of
the parameters.
The PIPD Controller

The controller with set point weighting can also be represented by the
W
block diagram in Figure 6.5. To see this we introduce the transfer func-
tions of the blocks
kPi
G PI (s) = kP +
s
G PD (s) = 1 + kPd s
Notice that the proportional gain of the PD controller must be one in order
TU
to have zero steady state error. The input-output relation of the complete
controller is
kPi
U (s) = kP R(s) + ( R(s) Y (s)) ( kP + kPd hPi ) Y (s) kP kPd sY (s)
s
Which shows that the controller is thus identical to the controller given
JN
224

r u y
PI Process
PD
r e y
PI P
ld
PD
Figure 6.5 Block diagram of a PI-PD controller. This controller is equivalent to a
or
conventional PID controller with set point weighting.
by (6.4). The parameters are related in the following way
k = kP + kPd kPi
ki = kPi
kd = kP kPd
W
kP + kPd kPi kP
Ti = =
kPi kPi
P P
kk
Td = P d
ki
kP
b= P
k + kPd hPi
TU
c=0
Following the same pattern the controller with b = 0 and c = 0 is some-

times called an I-PD controller, and the controller with b = 1 and c = 0
is called a PI-D controller.
Notice, however, that the representation given by (6.4) is much better
suitable for tuning, because the parameters k, Ti and Td can first be de-
termined to deal with load disturbances, measurement noise and process
JN
225

uncertainty. When this is done the response to set points can be adjusted
by choosing the parameters b and c. The controller parameters appear in
a much more complicated way in the PIPD controller.
6.5 Windup
Although many aspects of a control system can be understood based on
linear theory, some nonlinear effects must be accounted for in practically
all controllers. Windup is such a phenomena, which is caused by the inter-
action of integral action and saturations. All actuators have limitations:
a motor has limited speed, a valve cannot be more than fully opened or
fully closed, etc. For a control system with a wide range of operating condi-
ld
tions, it may happen that the control variable reaches the actuator limits.
When this happens the feedback loop is broken and the system runs as
an open loop because the actuator will remain at its limit independently
of the process output. If a controller with integrating action is used, the
error will continue to be integrated. This means that the integral term
may become very large or, colloquially, it winds up. It is then required
that the error has opposite sign for a long period before things return to
or
normal. The consequence is that any controller with integral action may
give large transients when the actuator saturates. We will illustrate this
by an example.
EXAMPLE 6.2ILLUSTRATION OF INTEGRATOR WINDUP

The wind-up phenomenon is illustrated in Figure 6.6, which shows control
of an integrating process with a PI controller. The initial setpoint change
W
is so large that the actuator saturates at the high limit. The integral
term increases initially because the error is positive; it reaches its largest
value at time t = 10 when the error goes through zero. The output remains
saturated at this point because of the large value of the integral term. It
does not leave the saturation limit until the error has been negative for a
sufficiently long time to let the integral part come down to a small level.
Notice that the control signal bounces between its limits several times.
The net effect is a large overshoot and a damped oscillation where the
control signal flips from one extreme to the other as in relay oscillation.
TU
The output finally comes so close to the setpoint that the actuator does
not saturate. The system then behaves linearly and settles.
The example show integrator windup which is generated by a change in
the reference value. Windup may also be caused by large disturbances or
equipment malfunctions. It can also occur in many other situations.
The phenomenon of windup was well known to manufacturers of ana-
log controllers who invented several tricks to avoid it. They were described
JN
226

6.5 Windup
2 y
1
ysp
0
0 20 40 60 80
0.1
u
0.1
0 20 40 60 80
ld
I
2
2
0 20 40 60 80
or
Figure 6.6 Illustration of integrator windup. The diagrams show process output
y, setpoint ysp, control signal u, and integral part I.
under labels like preloading, batch unit, etc. Although the problem was
well understood, there were often restrictions caused by the analog tech-
nology. The ideas were often kept as trade secrets and not much spoken
W
about. The problem of windup was rediscovered when controllers were im-
plemented digitally and several methods to avoid windup were presented
in the literature. In the following section we describe some of the methods
used to avoid windup.
Setpoint Limitation
One attempt to avoid integrator windup is to introduce limiters on the
setpoint variations so that the controller output never reaches the actua-
TU
tor limits. This frequently leads to conservative bounds and poor perfor-
mance. Furthermore, it does not avoid windup caused by disturbances.
Incremental Algorithms
In the early phases of feedback control, integral action was integrated
with the actuator by having a motor drive the valve directly. In this
case windup is handled automatically because integration stops when the
valve stops. When controllers were implemented by analog techniques,
JN
227

y
KT d s
Actuator
model Actuator
e = r y
K
K 1 +
Ti

s
1 es
Tt
ld
Figure 6.7 Controller with anti-windup where the actuator output is estimated
from a mathematical model.
and later with computers, many manufacturers used a configuration that

was an analog of the old mechanical design. This led to the so-called
velocity algorithms. A velocity algorithm first computes the rate of change
or
of the control signal which is then fed to an integrator. In some cases
this integrator is a motor directly connected to the actuator. In other
cases the integrator is implemented internally in the controller. With this
approach it is easy to avoid windup by inhibiting integration whenever
the output saturates. This method is equivalent to back-calculation, which
is described below. If the actuator output is not measured, a model that
computes the saturated output can be used. It is also easy to limit the
W
rate of change of the control signal.
Back-Calculation and Tracking

Back-calculation works as follows: When the output saturates, the inte-
gral term in the controller is recomputed so that its new value gives an
output at the saturation limit. It is advantageous not to reset the inte-
grator instantaneously but dynamically with a time constant Tt .
Figure 6.7 shows a block diagram of a PID controller with anti-windup
TU
based on back-calculation. The system has an extra feedback path that is

generated by measuring the actual actuator output and forming an error
signal ( es ) as the difference between the output of the controller (v) and
the actuator output (u). Signal es is fed to the input of the integrator
through gain 1/ Tt . The signal is zero when there is no saturation. Thus,
it will not have any effect on the normal operation when the actuator does
not saturate. When the actuator saturates, the signal es is different from
zero. The normal feedback path around the process is broken because the
JN
228

6.5 Windup
ysp
1
y
0.5
0
0 10 20 30
0.15
u
0.05
0.05
0 10 20 30
ld
I
0.4
0.8
0 10 20 30
or
Figure 6.8 Controller with anti-windup applied to the system of Figure 6.6. The
diagrams show process output y, setpoint ysp, control signal u, and integral part I.
process input remains constant. There is, however, a feedback path around
the integrator. Because of this, the integrator output is driven towards a
value such that the integrator input becomes zero. The integrator input
W
is
1 K
es + e
Tt Ti
where e is the control error. Hence,
K Tt
es = e
Ti
TU
in steady state. Since es = u v, it follows that
K Tt
v = ulim + e
Ti
where ulim is the saturating value of the control variable. This means that
the signal v settles on a value slightly out side the saturation limit and the
control signal can react as soon as the error changes time. This prevents
JN
229

ysp Tt = 3
Tt = 2
1
Tt = 0.1, Tt = 1
0
0 10 20 30
0.1 Tt = 3
Tt = 0.1 Tt = 2
0 Tt = 1
0.1
0 10 20 30
ld
Figure 6.9 The step response of the system in Figure 6.6 for different values of
the tracking time constant Tt . The upper curve shows process output y and setpoint
ysp, and the lower curve shows control signal u.
the integrator from winding up. The rate at which the controller output is
or
reset is governed by the feedback gain, 1/ Tt , where Tt can be interpreted
as the time constant, which determines how quickly the integral is reset.
We call this the tracking time constant.
It frequently happens that the actuator output cannot be measured.
The anti-windup scheme just described can be used by incorporating a
mathematical model of the saturating actuator, as is illustrated in Fig-
ure 6.7.
W
Figure 6.8 shows what happens when a controller with anti-windup is
applied to the system simulated in Figure 6.6. Notice that the output of
the integrator is quickly reset to a value such that the controller output
is at the saturation limit, and the integral has a negative value during
the initial phase when the actuator is saturated. This behavior is drasti-
cally different from that in Figure 6.6, where the integral has a positive
value during the initial transient. Also notice the drastic improvement in
performance compared to the ordinary PI controller used in Figure 6.6.
TU
The effect of changing the values of the tracking time constant is il-
lustrated in Figure 6.9. From this figure, it may thus seem advantageous
to always choose a very small value of the time constant because the
integrator is then reset quickly. However, some care must be exercised
when introducing anti-windup in systems with derivative action. If the
time constant is chosen too small, spurious errors can cause saturation
of the output, which accidentally resets the integrator. The tracking time
constant Tt should be larger than Td and smaller than Ti . A rule of thumb
JN
230

6.5 Windup
y sp P
b K
y sKTd D
1
1+ sTd / N
e K 1 I v
Ti s

1
Tt
ld
w +

y sp
SP v
y MV PID
w TR
that has been suggested is to choose Tt =
or
Figure 6.10 Block diagram and simplified representation of PID module with
tracking signal.

Ti Td .
W
Controllers with a Tracking Mode
A controller with back-calculation can be interpreted as having two modes:
the normal control mode, when it operates like an ordinary controller, and
a tracking mode, when the controller is tracking so that it matches given
inputs and outputs. Since a controller with tracking can operate in two
modes, we may expect that it is necessary to have a logical signal for
mode switching. However, this is not necessary, because tracking is auto-
matically inhibited when the tracking signal w is equal to the controller
TU
output. This can be used with great advantage when building up complex
systems with selectors and cascade control.
Figure 6.10 shows a PID module with a tracking signal. The module
has three inputs: the setpoint, the measured output, and a tracking signal.
The new input TR is called a tracking signal because the controller output
will follow this signal. Notice that tracking is inhibited when w = v. Using
the module the system shown in Figure 6.7 can be presented as shown in
Figure 6.11.
JN
231

A
SP
MV PID Actuator
TR
B
Actuator model
SP
v u
MV PID Actuator
TR
ld
Figure 6.11 Representation of the controllers with anti-windup in Figure 6.7 us-
ing the basic control module with tracking shown in Figure 6.10.
6.6 Tuning
or
All general methods for control design can be applied to PID control. A
number of special methods that are tailor-made for PID control have also
been developed, these methods are often called tuning methods. Irrespec-
tive of the method used it is essential to always consider the key elements
of control, load disturbances, sensor noise, process uncertainty and refer-
ence signals.
W
The most well known tuning methods are those developed by Ziegler
and Nichols. They have had a major influence on the practice of PID
control for more than half a century. The methods are based on character-
ization of process dynamics by a few parameters and simple equations for
the controller parameters. It is surprising that the methods are so widely
referenced because they give moderately good tuning only in restricted
situations. Plausible explanations may be the simplicity of the methods
and the fact that they can be used for simple student exercises in basic
control courses.
TU
The Step Response Method

One tuning method presented by Ziegler and Nichols is based on a process
information in the form of the open-loop step response obtained from a
bump test. This method can be viewed as a traditional method based on
modeling and control where a very simple process model is used. The step
response is characterized by only two parameters a and L, as shown in
JN
232

6.6 Tuning
Figure 6.12 Characterization of a step response in the Ziegler-Nichols step re-

sponse method.
Table 6.1 PID controller parameters obtained for the Ziegler-Nichols step response
ld
method.
Controller K Ti Td Tp
P 1/a 4L
PI 0.9/a 3L 5.7L
PID 1.2/a 2L L/ 2 3.4L
Figure 6.12.
or
The point where the slope of the step response has its maximum is
first determined, and the tangent at this point is drawn. The intersections
between the tangent and the coordinate axes give the parameters a and L.
W
The controller parameters are then obtained from Table 6.1. An estimate
of the period Tp of the closed-loop system is also given in the table.
The Frequency Response Method

A second method developed by Ziegler and Nichols is based on a simple
characterization of the the frequency response of the process process dy-
namics. The design is based on knowledge of only one point on the Nyquist
curve of the process transfer function P(s), namely the point where the
TU
Nyquist curve intersects the negative real axis. This point can be char-
acterized by two parameters the frequency 180 and the gain at that fre-
quency k180 = h P(i 180 )h. For historical reasons the point has been called
the ultimate point and characterized by the parameters K u = 1/ K 180 and
Tu = 2 / 180, which are called the ultimate gain and the ultimate pe-
riod. These parameters can be determined in the following way. Connect
a controller to the process, set the parameters so that control action is
proportional, i.e., Ti = and Td = 0. Increase the gain slowly until the
JN
233

0.5
0.5
1
0.5 0 0.5 1
Figure 6.13 Characterization of a step response in the Ziegler-Nichols step re-
ld
sponse method.
Table 6.2 Controller parameters for the Ziegler-Nichols frequency response

method.
Controller K Ti Td Tp
or
P 0.5K u Tu
PI 0.4K u 0.8Tu 1.4Tu
PID 0.6K u 0.5Tu 0.125Tu 0.85Tu
process starts to oscillate. The gain when this occurs is K u and the period
W
of the oscillation is Tu . The parameters of the controller are then given by
Table 6.2. An estimate of the period Tp of the dominant dynamics of the
closed-loop system is also given in the table.
The frequency response method can be viewed as an empirical tuning
procedure where the controller parameters are obtained by direct experi-
ments on the process combined with some simple rules. For a proportional
controller the rule is simply to increase the gain until the process oscil-
lates and then reduce it by 50%.
TU
Assessment of the Ziegler Nichols Methods

The Ziegler-Nichols tuning rules were developed to give closed loop sys-
tems with good attenuation of load disturbances. The methods were based
on extensive simulations. The design criterion was quarter amplitude de-
cay ratio, which means that the amplitude of an oscillation should be
reduced by a factor of four over a whole period. This corresponds to closed
loop poles with a relative damping of about = 0.2, which is too small.
JN
234

6.6 Tuning
Controllers designed by the Ziegler-Nichols rules thus inherently give

closed loop systems with poor robustness. It also turns out that it is not
sufficient to characterize process dynamics by two parameters only. The
methods developed by Ziegler and Nichols have been been very popular in
spite of these drawbacks. Practically all manufacturers of controller have
used the rules with some modifications in recommendations for controller
tuning. One reason for the popularity of the rules is that they are simple
and easy to explain. The tuning rules give ball park figures. Final tuning
is then done by trial and error. Another (bad) reason is that the rules
lend themselves very well to simple exercises for control education.
With the insight into controller design that has developed over the
years it is possible to develop improved tuning rules that are almost as
simple as the Zigler-Nichols rules. These rules are developed by starting
ld
with a solid design method that gives robust controllers with effective
disturbance attenuation. We illustrate with some rules where the process
is characterized by three parameters.
An Improved Step Response Method

This method characterizes the unit step response by three parameters
or
K , L and T for stable processes and K v = K / T and L for integrating
processes. This parameterization matches the transfer functions
kp
P1 (s) = esL
1 + sT
kv sL
P2 (s) = e
s
W
The transfer function P1 (s), which is called a first order system with time
delay or a K LT model. Parameter L is determined from the intercept
of the tangent with largest slope with the time axis as was described in
Figure 6.12. Parameter T is also determined as shown in the figure as
the difference between the time when the step response reaches 63% of
its steady state value. Parameter kp is the static gain of the system. The
parameter kv is the largest slope of the unit step response. Parameter
L is called the apparent time delay and parameter T the apparent time
TU
constant or the apparent lag. The adverb apparent is added to indicate

that parameters are based on approximations. The parameter
L
=
L+T
is called the relative time delay. This parameter is a good indicator of

process dynamics.
JN
235

To obtain improved tuning rules we use a design method that maxi-

mizes integral gain subject to the robustness constraint that the maximum
sensitivity is less than Ms = 1.4. The procedure has been applied to a a
large test batch representing many different processes. One tuning rule
is

0.3 T for + L < 2T
K = Kv L

0.15K p for 2T < L
(6.12)

8L for L < 0.1T

Ti = 0.8T for 0.1T < L < 2T

0.4L for 2T < L
ld
The properties of the improved tuning rules are illustrated by applying
them to systems with the transfer functions
1
P1 (s) =
(s + 1)(0.2s + 1)
1
P2 (s) =
or
(s + 1)4
1
P3 (s) = e1.2s
0.05s + 1)2
The process P1 (s) has lag dominated dynamics, process P3 (s) has delay
dominated dynamics and process P2 (s) has balanced dynamics.
Figure 6.14 shows the response to a step change in the reference at
W
time zero and a step change in a load disturbance at the process input
for PI control of the process P1 (s). The dashed lines show the responses
obtained by the Ziegler-Nichols step response method and the full line
shows the response obtained with the improved rule which restricted the
maximum sensitivity to 1.4. The oscillatory responses to obtained by the
Ziegler-Nichols method are clearly visible in the figure which reflects the
design choice of quarter amplitude damping. The response to load distur-
bances obtained by the Ziegler-Nichols method comes at a price of poor
TU
sensitivity. There is also a very large overshoot in the response to refer-

ence values. Figure 6.15 shows the corresponding responses for the system
P4 (s). The oscillatory character obtained with Ziegler Nichols tuning is
clearly visible. Figure 6.16 shows the response for a process that is delay
dominated. The figure shows that Ziegler-Nichols tuning performs very
poorly for this process. Overall we find that the improved tuning rules
work for a wide range of processes and that they give robust systems
with good responses.
JN
236

6.7 Computer Implementation
a
2
1.5
1
y
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
t
b
15
10
ld
u
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
t
or
Figure 6.14 Behavior of closed loop systems with PI controllers designed by the
Ziegler-Nichols rule (dashed) and the improved tuning rules (solid). The process
has lag dominated dynamics with the transfer function P(s) = (s+1)(10.2s+1) .

Most controllers are nowadays implemented in computers. In this section
W
we will discuss many practical issues related to computer implementation.
Sampling
When the controller is implemented in a computer, the analog inputs are
read and the outputs are set with a certain sampling period. This is a
drawback compared to the analog implementations, since the sampling
introduces dead-time in the control loop.
When a digital computer is used to implement a control law, the ideal
TU
sequence of operation is the following.

1. Wait for clock interrupt
2. Read analog input
3. Compute control signal
4. Set analog output
JN
237

a
2
1.5
1
y
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
t
b
2.5
1.5
ld
1
u
0.5
0.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
t
or
has balanced dynamics with the transfer function P(s) = (s+11)4 .
5. Update controller variables

6. Go to 1
W
With this implementation, the delay is minimized. If the analog input is
read with a sampling period h, the average delay of the measurement sig-
nal is h/2. The computation time is often short compared to the sampling
period. This means that the total delay is about h/2. However, most con-
trollers and instrument systems do not organize the calculation in this
way. Therefore, the delays introduced because of the sampling is often
several sampling periods.
Aliasing
TU
The sampling mechanism introduces some unexpected phenomena, which

must be taken into account in a good digital implementation of a PID
controller. To explain these, consider the signals
s(t) = cos(n s t t)
and
sa (t) = cos( t)
JN
238

1.5
y
1
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
t
b
1.2
0.8
0.6
ld
u
0.4
0.2
0.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
t
or
has delay dominated dynamics with the transfer function P(s) = 0.05s1+1)2 e1.2s .
where s = 2 / h [rad/s] is the sampling frequency. Well-known formulas

for the cosine function imply that the values of the signals at the sampling
instants [ kh, k = 0, 1, 2, ...] have the property
W
s( kh) = cos(nkh s kh) = cos( kh) = sa ( kh)
The signals s and sa thus have the same values at the sampling instants.
This means that there is no way to separate the signals if only their
values at the sampling instants are known. Signal sa is, therefore, called
an alias of signal s. This is illustrated in Figure 6.17. A consequence of the
aliasing effect is that a high-frequency disturbance after sampling may
TU
appear as a low-frequency signal. In Figure 6.17 the sampling period is

1 s and the sinusoidal disturbance has a period of 6/5 s. After sampling,
the disturbance appear as a sinusoid with the frequency
5
fa = 1 = 1/6 Hz
6
This low-frequency signal with time period 6 s is seen in the figure.

JN
239

sa
1
0 s
1
0 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 6.17 Illustration of the aliasing effect. The diagram shows signal s and its
alias sa .
ld
Prefiltering
The aliasing effect can create significant difficulties if proper precautions
are not taken. High frequencies, which in analog controllers normally
are effectively eliminated by low-pass filtering, may, because of aliasing,
appear as low-frequency signals in the bandwidth of the sampled control
or
system. To avoid these difficulties, an analog prefilter (which effectively
eliminates all signal components with frequencies above half the sampling
frequency) should be introduced. Such a filter is called an anti-aliasing
filter. A second-order Butterworth filter is a common anti-aliasing filter.
Higher-order filters are also used in critical applications. The selection of
the filter bandwidth is illustrated by the following example.
W
EXAMPLE 6.3SELECTION OF PREFILTER BANDWIDTH
Assume it is desired that the prefilter attenuate signals by a factor of
16 at half the sampling frequency. If the filter bandwidth is b and the
sampling frequency is s , we get
( s /2 b )2 = 16
Hence,
TU
1
b = s
8
Notice that the dynamics of the prefilter is often significant. It should

be accounted for in the control design by combining it with the process
dynamics.
JN
240

Discretization
To implement a continuous-time control law, such as a PID controller in
a digital computer, it is necessary to approximate the derivatives and the
integral that appear in the control law. A few different ways to do this
are presented below.
Proportional Action The proportional term is
P = K (bysp y)
This term is implemented simply by replacing the continuous variables

with their sampled versions. Hence,
P(tk ) = K (bysp (tk ) y(tk )) (6.13)
ld
where { tk } denotes the sampling instants, i.e., the times when the com-
puter reads the analog input.
Integral Action The integral term is given by

Zt
or
K
I (t) = e(s)ds
Ti
0
It follows that
dI K
= e (6.14)
dt Ti
The derivative is approximated by a forward difference gives
W
I (tk+1 ) I (tk ) K
= e(tk )
h Ti
This leads to the following recursive equation for the integral term
Kh
I (tk+1) = I (tk ) + e(tk ) (6.15)
Ti
Derivative Action The derivative term is given by Equation (6.2), i.e.
TU
Td dD dy
+ D = K Td (6.16)
N dt dt
This equation can be approximated in the same way as the integral
term. In this case we approximate the derivatives by a backward differ-
ence.
Td D (tk ) D (tk1 ) y(tk ) y(tk1 )
+ D (tk ) = K Td
N h h
JN
241

This can be rewritten as
Td K Td N
D (tk ) = D (tk1 ) ( y(tk ) y(tk1 )) (6.17)
Td + Nh Td + Nh
The advantage by using a backward difference is that the parameter

Td /(Td + Nh) is in the range of 0 to 1 for all values of the parameters.
This guarantees that the difference equation is stable.
Summarizing we find that the PID controller can be approximated by
p(tk ) = k (br(tk ) y(tk ))

e(tk ) = r(tk ) y(tk )
Td
ld
d(tk ) = d(tk1 ) kN y(tk ) y(tk1 )
Td + Nh
u(tk ) = p(tk ) + i(tk ) + d(tk )
kh
i(tk+1 ) = i(tk ) + e(tk )
Ti
or
Velocity Algorithms
The algorithms described so far are called positional algorithms because
the output of the algorithms is the control variable. In certain cases the
control system is arranged in such a way that the control signal is driven
directly by an integrator, e.g., a motor. It is then natural to arrange the
algorithm in such a way that it gives the velocity of the control variable.
The control variable is then obtained by integrating its velocity. An al-
W
gorithm of this type is called a velocity algorithm. A block diagram of a
velocity algorithm for a PID controller is shown in Figure 6.18.
Velocity algorithms were commonly used in many early controllers
that were built around motors. In several cases, the structure was re-
tained by the manufacturers when technology was changed in order to
maintain functional compatibility with older equipment. Another reason
is that many practical issues, like wind-up protection and bumpless pa-
rameter changes, are easy to implement using the velocity algorithm. This
is discussed further in Sections 6.5 and 6.7. In digital implementations
TU
velocity algorithms are also called incremental algorithms.
Incremental algorithm
The incremental form of the PID algorithm is obtained by computing the
time differences of the controller output and adding the increments.
u(tk ) = u(tk ) u(tk1 ) = P(tk ) + I (tk ) + D (tk )

JN
242

s2 KTd
ed
1+ sTd / N
External
du integrator
dt
ep sK 1
s
u
e K
Ti
ld
Figure 6.18 Block diagram of a PID algorithm in velocity form.
In some cases integration is performed externally. This is natural when a

stepper motor is used. The output of the controller should then represent
the increments of the control signal, and the motor implements the inte-
or
grator. The increments of the proportional part, the integral part, and the
derivative part are easily calculated from Equations 6.13, 6.15 and 6.17:
P(tk ) = P(tk ) P(tk1 ) = K (bysp(tk ) y(tk ) bysp(tk1 ) + y(tk1 ))

I (tk ) = I (tk ) I (tk1 ) = bi1 e(tk ) + bi2 e(tk1 )
D (tk ) = D (tk) D (tk1) = ad D (tk1) bd ( y(tk ) 2 y(tk1 ) + y(tk2 ))
W
One advantage with the incremental algorithm is that most of the com-
putations are done using increments only. Short word-length calculations
can often be used. It is only in the final stage where the increments are
added that precision is needed.
Velocity algorithms for controllers without integral action

A velocity algorithm cannot be used directly for a controller without in-
tegral action, because such a controller cannot keep the stationary value.
TU
This can be understood from the block diagram in Figure 6.19A, which
shows a proportional controller in velocity form. Stationarity can be ob-
tained for any value of the control error e, since the output from the
derivation block is zero for any constant input. The problem can be avoided
with the modification shown in Figure 6.19B. Here, stationarity is only
obtained when u = K e + ub .
If a sampled PID controller is used, a simple version of the method
illustrated in figure 6.19B is obtained by implementing the P controller
JN
243

A
e 1 u
K s
s
B
e u
K s 1
s
ld
+

+
ub
Figure 6.19 Illustrates the difficulty with a proportional controller in velocity
or
form (A) and a way to avoid it (B).
as
u(t) = u(t) u(t h) = K e(t) + ub u(t h)
where h is the sampling period.
W
Feedforward control
In feedforward control, the control signal is composed of two terms,
u = uF B + uF F
Here u F B is the feedback component and u F F is the feedforward compo-

nent, either from a measurable disturbance or from the setpoint.
To avoid integrator windup, it is important that the anti-windup mech-
TU
anism acts on the final control signal u, and not only on the feedback
component u F B .
Unfortunately, many of the block-oriented instrument systems avail-
able today have the anti-windup mechanisms inside the feedback con-
troller blocks, without any possibility to add feedforward signals to these
blocks. Hence, the feedforward signals must be added after the controller
blocks. This may lead to windup. Because of this, several tricks, like feed-
ing the feedforward signal through high-pass filters, are used to reduces
JN
244

the windup problem. These strategies do, however, lead to a less effective
feedforward.
Incremental algorithms are efficient for feedforward implementation.
By first adding the increments of the feedback and feedforward compo-
nents,
u = uF B + uF F
and then forming the control signal as
u(t) = u(t h) + u(t)
windup is avoided. This requires that the feedback control blocks have
inputs for feedforward signals.
ld
Operational Aspects
Practically all controllers can be run in two modes: manual or automatic.
In manual mode the controller output is manipulated directly by the
operator, typically by pushing buttons that increase or decrease the con-
troller output. A controller may also operate in combination with other
controllers, such as in a cascade or ratio connection, or with nonlinear
elements, such as multipliers and selectors. This gives rise to more oper-
or
ational modes. The controllers also have parameters that can be adjusted
in operation. When there are changes of modes and parameters, it is es-
sential to avoid switching transients. The way the mode switchings and
the parameter changes are made depends on the structure chosen for the
controller.
Bumpless Transfer Between Manual and Automatic

W
Since the controller is a dynamic system, it is necessary to make sure that
the state of the system is correct when switching the controller between
manual and automatic mode. When the system is in manual mode, the
control algorithm produces a control signal that may be different from
the manually generated control signal. It is necessary to make sure that
the two outputs coincide at the time of switching. This is called bumpless
transfer.
Bumpless transfer is easy to obtain for a controller in incremental
TU
form. This is shown in Figure 6.20. The integrator is provided with a

switch so that the signals are either chosen from the manual or the au-
tomatic increments. Since the switching only influences the increments
there will not be any large transients.
A similar mechanism can be used in the series, or interacting, imple-
mentation of a PID controller shown in Figure 6.22. In this case there
will be a switching transient if the output of the PD part is not zero at
the switching instant.
JN
245

+
MCU

M 1 u
A s
y sp
Inc PID
y
Figure 6.20 Bumpless transfer in a controller with incremental output. MCU

stands for manual control unit.
ld
+
MCU

M u

A
y sp
PD
or
y 1
1+ sTi
Figure 6.21 Bumpless transfer in a PID controller with a special series imple-
mentation.
W
PD
A
M
A
I u
1
+

s

TU
M
+

Figure 6.22 A PID controller where one integrator is used both to obtain integral
action in automatic mode and to sum the incremental commands in manual mode.
JN
246

1

Tt +

+ 1 1
Tm
s
y sp
PD
y
M
e K 1 u
Ti
s
A
+

ld
1
Tt
Figure 6.23 PID controller with parallel implementation that switches smoothly
between manual and automatic control.
or
For controllers with parallel implementation, the integrator of the PID
controller can be used to add up the changes in manual mode. The con-
troller shown in Figure 6.22 is such a system. This system gives a smooth
transition between manual and automatic mode provided that the switch
W
is made when the output of the PD block is zero. If this is not the case,
there will be a switching transient.
It is also possible to use a separate integrator to add the incremental
changes from the manual control device. To avoid switching transients
in such a system, it is necessary to make sure that the integrator in the
PID controller is reset to a proper value when the controller is in manual
mode. Similarly, the integrator associated with manual control must be
reset to a proper value when the controller is in automatic mode. This can
TU
be realized with the circuit shown in Figure 6.23. With this system the
switch between manual and automatic is smooth even if the control error
or its derivative is different from zero at the switching instant. When
the controller operates in manual mode, as is shown in Figure 6.23, the
feedback from the output v of the PID controller tracks the output u. With
efficient tracking the signal v will thus be close to u at all times. There
is a similar tracking mechanism that ensures that the integrator in the
manual control circuit tracks the controller output.
JN
247

Bumpless Parameter Changes

A controller is a dynamical system. A change of the parameters of a dy-
namical system will naturally result in changes of its output. Changes in
the output can be avoided, in some cases, by a simultaneous change of
the state of the system. The changes in the output will also depend on the
chosen realization. With a PID controller it is natural to require that there
be no drastic changes in the output if the parameters are changed when
the error is zero. This will hold for all incremental algorithms because
the output of an incremental algorithm is zero when the input is zero,
irrespective of the parameter values. For a position algorithm it depends,
however, on the implementation.
Assume that the state is chosen as
ld
Zt
xI = e( )d
when implementing the algorithm. The integral term is then
K
I= xI
or
Ti
Any change of K or Ti will then result in a change of I. To avoid bumps

when the parameters are changed, it is essential that the state be chosen
as
Zt
K ( )
xI = e( )d
Ti ( )
W
when implementing the integral term.
With sensible precautions, it is easy to ensure bumpless parameter
changes if parameters are changed when the error is zero. There is, how-
ever, one case where special precautions have to be taken, namely, if set-
point weighting is used. To have bumpless parameter changes in such
a case it is necessary that the quantity P + I is invariant to parame-
ter changes. This means that when parameters are changed, the state I
should be changed as follows
TU
Inew = Iold + K old (bold ysp y) K new (bnew ysp y)
To build automation systems it is useful to have suitable modules. Fig-

ure 6.24 shows the block diagram for a manual control module. It has two
inputs, a tracking input and an input for the manual control commands.
The system has two parameters, the time constant Tm for the manual
control input and the reset time constant Tt . In digital implementations
JN
248

Track

1
Tt
Manual 1 1
Tm

s
ld
TR
M
M
Figure 6.24 Manual control module.
or
it is convenient to add a feature so that the command signal accelerates
as long as one of the increase-decrease buttons are pushed. Using the
module for PID control and the manual control module in Figure 6.24, it
is straightforward to construct a complete controller. Figure 6.25 shows a
PID controller with internal or external setpoints via increase/decrease
buttons and manual automatic mode. Notice that the system only has two
switches.
W
Computer Code
As an illustration, the following is a computer code for a PID algorithm.
The controller handles both anti-windup and bumpless transfer.
"Compute controller coefficients
bi=K*h/Ti "integral gain
ad=(2*Td-N*h)/(2*Td+N*h)
bd=2*K*N*Td/(2*Td+N*h) "derivative gain
TU
a0=h/Tt
"Bumpless parameter changes

I=I+Kold*(bold*ysp-y)-Knew*(bnew*ysp-y)
"Control algorithm
r=adin(ch1) "read setpoint from ch1
y=adin(ch2) "read process variable from ch2
JN
249

TR M
Manual M
input
Manual TR
M
set point M
External
M
set point SP
Measured MV PID
value TR A
ld
Figure 6.25 A reasonable complete PID controller with anti-windup, automatic-
manual mode, and manual and external setpoint.
P=K*(b*ysp-y) "compute proportional part
or
D=ad*D-bd*(y-yold) "update derivative part
v=P+I+D "compute temporary output
u=sat(v,ulow,uhigh) "simulate actuator saturation
daout(ch1) "set analog output ch1
I=I+bi*(ysp-y)+ao*(u-v) "update integral
yold=y "update old process output
The computation of the coefficients should be done only when the con-
W
troller parameters are changed. Precomputation of the coefficients ad, ao,
bd, and bi saves computer time in the main loop. The main program must
be called once every sampling period. The program has three states: yold,
I, and D. One state variable can be eliminated at the cost of a less readable
code. Notice that the code includes derivation of the process output only,
proportional action on part of the error only (b = 1), and anti-windup.
TU
6.8 Summary
In this Section we have given a detailed treatment of the PID controller,
which is the most common way controller. A number of practical issues
have been discussed. Simple controllers like the PI and PID controller
are naturally not suitable for all processes. The PID controller is suit-
able for processes with almost monotone step responses provided that the
JN
250

6.8 Summary
requirements are not too stringent. The quantity

Rt
g(t)dt
m = R t0
0 hg(t)hdt
where g(t) is the impulse response can be used as a measure of monotonic-

ity. PID control is not suitable for processes that are highly oscillatory or
when the requirements are extreme.
The PI controller has no phase advance. This means that the PI con-
troller will not work for systems which have phase lag of 180 or more.
The double integrator is a typical example. Controller with derivative ac-
tion can provide phase advance up to about 50 . Simple processes can
be characterized by the relative time delay introduced in the Ziegler-
ld
Nichols tuning procedure. PI control is often satisfactory for processes that
are lag dominated, i.e. when close to one. Derivative action is typically
beneficial for processes with small relative delay .
or
W
TU
JN
251

7
Specifications
ld
7.1 Introduction
In this chapter we will discuss how the properties of a control system can
be specified. This is important for control design because it gives the goals.
It is also important for users of control so that they know how to specify,
or
evaluate and test a system so that they know it will have the desired
properties. Specifications on a control systems typically include: stability
of the closed loop system, robustness to model uncertainty, attenuation of
measurement noise, injection of measurement noise, and ability to follow
reference signals. From the results of Chapter 5 it follows that these
properties are captured by six transfer functions called the Gang of Six.
The specifications can be expressed in terms of these transfer functions.
W
Essential features of the transfer functions can be expressed in terms of
their poles and zeros or features of time and frequency responses.
7.2 Stability and Robustness to Process Variations
Stability and robustness to process uncertainties can be expressed in

terms of the loop transfer function L = PC, the sensitivity function and
TU
the complementary sensitivity function
1 1 PC L
S= = , T= = .
1 + PC 1+ L 1 + PC 1+ L
Since both S and T are functions of the loop transfer function specifica-
tions on the sensitivities can also be expressed in terms of specifications on
the loop transfer function L. Many of the criteria are based on Nyquists
JN
252

ld
Figure 7.1 Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function L with indication of gain,
phase and stability margins.
or
stability criterion, see Figure 7.1. Common criteria are the maximum val-
ues of the sensitivity functions, i.e.
Ms = max h S(i )h, Mt = max hT (i )h

Recall that the number 1/ Ms is the shortest distance of the Nyquist curve
of the loop transfer function to the critical point, see Figure 7.1. Also recall
W
that the closed loop system will remain stable for process perturbations
P provided that
h P(i )h 1
,
h P(i )h hT (i )h
see Section 5.5. The largest value Mt of the complementary sensitivity
function T is therefore a simple measure of robustness to process varia-
tions.
TU
Typical values of the maximum sensitivities are in the range of 1 to 2.

Values close to one are more conservative and values close to 2 correspond
to more aggressive controllers.
Gain and Phase Margins

The gain margin gm and the phase margin m are classical stability cri-
teria. Although they can be replaced by the maximum sensitivities it is
useful to know about them because they are still often used practically.
JN
253

Chapter 7. Specifications
The gain margin tells how much the gain has to be increased before the
closed loop system becomes unstable and the phase margin tells how much
the phase lag has to be increased to make the closed loop system unstable.
The gain margin can be defined as follows. Let 180 be the lowest
frequency where the phase lag of the loop transfer function L(s) is 180 .
The gain margin is then
1
gm = (7.1)
h L(i 180 )h
The phase margin can be defined as follows. Let gc denote gain

crossover frequency, i.e. the lowest frequency where the loop transfer
function L(s) has unit magnitude. The phase margin is then given by
ld
m = + arg L(i gc ) (7.2)
The margins have simple geometric interpretations in the Nyquist dia-

gram of the loop transfer function as is shown in Figure 7.1. Notice that
an increase of controller gain simply expands the Nyquist curve radially.
An increase of the phase of the controller twists the Nyquist curve clock-
or
wise, see Figure 7.1.
Reasonable values of the margins are phase margin m = 30 60 ,
gain margin gm = 2 5. Since it is necessary to specify both margins to
have a guarantee of a reasonable robustness the margins gm and m can
be replaced by a single stability margin, defined as the shortest distance
of the Nyquist curve to the critical point 1, this distance is the inverse
of the maximum sensitivity Ms . It follows from Figure 7.1 that both the
W
gain margin and the phase margin must be specified in order to ensure
that the Nyquist curve is far from the critical point. It is possible to
have a system with a good gain margin and a poor phase margin and
vice versa. It is also possible to have a system with good gain and phase
margins which has a poor stability margin. The Nyquist curve of the loop
transfer function of such a system is shown in Figure 7.2. This system has
infinite gain margin, a phase margin of 70 which looks very reassuring,
but the maximum sensitivity is Ms = 3.7 which is much too high. Since
it is necessary to specify both the gain margin and the phase margin to
TU
endure robustness of a system it is advantageous to replace them by a

single number. A simple analysis of the Nyquist curve shows that the
following inequalities hold.
Ms
gm
Ms 1
(7.3)
1
m 2 arcsin
2Ms
JN
254

ld
Figure 7.2 Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function for a system with good gain
and phase margins but with high sensitivity and poor robustness. The loop transfer
0.38(s2 +0.1s+0.55)
function is L(s) = s(s+1)(s2 +0.06s+0.5
.
m 45 .
Delay Margin
or
A controller with Ms = 2 thus has a gain margin of at least 2 and a phase
margin of at least 30 . With Ms = 1.4 the margins are gm 3.5 and
The gain and phase margins were originally developed for the case when
W
the Nyquist curve only intersects the unit circle and the negative real axis
once. For more complicated systems there may be many intersections and
it is more complicated to find suitable concepts that capture the idea of a
stability margin. One illustration if given in Figure 7.3. In this case the
Nyquist curve has a large loop and the Nyquist curve intersects the circle
h Lh = 1 in three points corresponding to the frequencies 0.21, 0.88 and
1.1. If there are variations in the time delay the Nyquist curve can easily
enclose the critical point. In the figure it is shown what happens when
TU
the time delay is increased from 3 to 4.5 s. This increase corresponds to a

phase lag of 0.3 rad at the crossover frequency 0.21 rad/s, the phase lag
is however 1.6 rad at the frequency 1.1 rad/s which is marked A in the
figures. Notice that the point A becomes very close to the critical point.
A good measure of the stability margin in this case is the delay margin
which is the smallest time delay required to make the system unstable.
For loop transfer functions that decay quickly the delay margin is closely
related to the phase margin but for systems where the amplitude ratio of
JN
255

y
4
10
6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10
ld
x
0.2
Figure 7.3 Nyquist curve of the loop transfer function L(s) = s(s2 +0.025s+1)
e3s .
the loop transfer function has several peaks at high frequencies the delay
or
margin is a much more relevant measure.
7.3 Disturbances
In the standard system, Figure 5.1, we have used in this book there are
two types of disturbances, the load disturbances that drive the system
W
away from its desired behavior and the measurement noise that corrupts
the information about the process obtained by the sensors.
Response to Load Disturbances

The response of the process variable to a load disturbance is given by the
transfer function
P T
G xd = = PS = (7.4)
1 + PC
TU
C
Since load disturbances typically have low frequencies it is natural that
the specifications should emphasize the behavior of the transfer function
at low frequencies. The loop transfer function L = PC is typically large
for small s and we have the approximation
T 1
G xd = . (7.5)
C C
JN
256

7.3 Disturbances
0
10
1
10
2
10
2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10
Figure 7.4 Typical gain curve for the transfer function Gxd from load disturbance
to process output. The gain curve is shown in full lines and the transfer function
ki /s in dotted lines and the process transfer function in full lines.
ld
If P(0) = 0 and the controller with integral action control we have the
following approximation for small s
s
G xd .
ki
or
Since load disturbances typically have low frequencies this equation im-
plies that integral gain ki is a good measure of load disturbance atten-
uation. Figure 7.4 shows the magnitude curve of the transfer function
(7.4) for a PI control of the process P = (s + 1)4 . The transfer function
G xd has typically the form shown in Figure 7.4. The curve can typically
be characterized by the low frequency asymptote ( ki ), the peak ( Mxd ),
the frequency ( xd )where the peak occurs and the high frequency roll-
W
off. It follows from (7.4) that the high frequency behavior is essentially
determined by the process and the maximum sensitivity.
Attenuation of load disturbances can also be characterized in the time
domain by showing the time response due to a representative disturbance.
This is illustrated in 7.5 which shows the response of the process output to
a unit step disturbance at the process input. The figure shows maximum
error emax , the steady state error ess , the error of the open loop system eol ,
the time to maximum tmax and the settling time ts .
TU
Measurement Noise
An inevitable consequence of using feedback is that measurement noise is
fed into the system. Measurement noise thus causes control actions which
in turn generate variations in the process variable. It is important to keep
these variations of the control signal at reasonable levels. A typical re-
quirement is that the variations are only a fraction of the span of the
control signal. The variations in the control variable are also detrimental
JN
257

ld
Figure 7.5 Errors due to a unit step load disturbance at the process input and
or
some features used to characterize attenuation of load disturbances. The curves
show the open-loop error (dashed lines) and the error (full lines) obtained using a
controller without integral action (upper) and with integral action (lower).
by themselves because they cause wear of actuators. Since measurement

noise typically has high frequencies the high high frequency gain of the
W
controller is a relevant measure. Notice however that the low frequency
gain of the controller is not essential since measurement noise is high fre-
quency. Frequencies above the gain crossover frequency will be regarded
as high.
To get a feel for the orders of magnitude consider an analog system
where the signal levels are 10V. A measurement noise of 1 mV then satu-
rates the input if the gain is 104 . If it is only permitted that measurement
noise gives control signals of 1V the high frequency gain of the controller
TU
must be less than 103 .

As an other illustration we consider a digital control system with 12
bit AD- and DA-converters. A change of the input of one bit saturates
the DA-converter if the gain is 4096. Assume that we permit one bit to
give a variation of 0.4% of the output range. The high frequency gain of
the controller must then be less than 500. With converters having lower
resolution the high frequency gain would be even lower.
High precision analog systems with signal ranges of 1 to 104 have been
JN
258

designed. For digital systems the signal ranges are limited by the sensors
and the actuators. Special system architectures with sensors and actua-
tors having multiple signal ranges are used in order to obtain systems
with a very high signal resolution. In these cases it is possible to have
signal ranges up to 1 to 106 .
The effects of measurement noise can be evaluated by the transfer
function from measurement noise to the control signal, i.e.,
C T
Gun = = CS = . (7.6)
1 + PC P
Recall that P and C and are the transfer functions of the process and
the controller, and that S is the sensitivity function. Notice that when
L = PC is large we have approximately Gun 1/ C. Since measurement
ld
noise typically has high frequencies and since the sensitivity function is
one for high frequencies we find that the response to measurement noise
is essentially determined by the high frequency behavior of the transfer
function C. A simple measure is given by
Mc = max h Gun (i )h Ms max h C (i )h
or
g c g c
where Mc is called the maximum high frequency gain of the controller.

When there is severe measurement noise it is advantageous to make sure
that the transfer function C goes to zero for large frequencies. This is
called high frequency roll-off.
W
The response to set point changes is described by the transfer functions
F PC FC
G yr = = FT , Gur = = FCS
1 + PC 1 + PC
Compare with (5.1). A significant advantage with controller structure

TU
with two degrees of freedom is that the problem of set point response can
be decoupled from the response to load disturbances and measurement
noise. The design procedure can then be divided into two independent
steps.
First design the feedback controller C that reduces the effects of
load disturbances and the sensitivity to process variations without
introducing too much measurement noise into the system
JN
259

1.2
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
2.5
1.5
ld
1
0.5
0.5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Figure 7.6 Specifications on reference following based on the time response to a
or
unit step in the reference.
Then design the feedforward F to give the desired response to set

points.
Specifications on reference following are typically expressed in the time

domain. They may include requirements on rise time, settling time, de-
W
cay ratio, overshoot, and steady-state offset for step changes in reference.
These quantities are defined as follows, see 7.6. These quantities are de-
fined in different ways and there are also different standards.
The rise time tr is either defined as the inverse of the largest slope
of the step response or the time it takes the step to pass from 10%
to 90% of its steady state value.
The settling time ts is the time it takes before the step response
TU
remains within p percent of its steady state value. The value p = 2

% is commonly used.
The delay time is the time required for the step response to reach
50 % of its steady state value for the first time.
The decay ratio d is the ratio between two consecutive maxima of the
error for a step change in reference or load. The value d = 1/4, which
JN
260

is called quarter amplitude damping, has been used traditionally.

This value is, however, too high as will be shown later.
The overshoot o is the ratio between the difference between the first
peak and the steady state value and the steady state value of the
step response. In industrial control applications it is common to spec-
ify an overshoot of 8%10%. In many situations it is desirable, how-
ever, to have an over-damped response with no overshoot.
The steady-state error ess is the value of control error e in steady
state. With integral action in the controller, the steady-state error
is always zero.
Classical specifications have been strongly focused on the behavior of the
ld
process output. It is however important to also consider the control signal.
Analogous quantities can be defined for the control signal. The overshoot
of the control signal is of particular importance, see Figure 7.4.
Step signals are often used as reference inputs In motion control sys-
tems it is often more relevant to consider responses to ramp signals or
jerk signals. Specifications are often given in terms of the the value of the
first non-vanishing error coefficient.
or
Tracking Slowly Varying Signals - Error Coefficients
Step signals is one prototype of reference signals. There are however sit-
uations when other signals are more appropriate. One example is when
the reference signal has constant rate of change, i.e.
r(t) = v0 t
W
The corresponding Laplace transform is R(s) = v0 / s2 .
For a system with error feedback the error e = r y has the Laplace
transform
v0
E ( s) = S ( s) V ( s) = S ( s) 2 (7.7)
s
The steady state error obtained depends on the properties of the sensitiv-
ity function at the origin. If S(0) = e0 the steady state tracking error is
TU
asymptotically e(t) = v0 e0 t. To have a constant tracking error it must be

required that S(0) = 0. With S(s) e1 s for small s we find that the steady
state error is e(t) = v0 e1 as t goes to infinity. To have zero steady state
error for a ramp signal the function S(s) must go to zero faster than s for
small s. If S(s) e2 s2 for small s we find that the error is asymptotically
zero. Since
1
L(s) = 1
S ( s)
JN
261

it follows that the condition S(s) e2 s2 implies that L(s) s2 for small
s. This implies that there are two integrations in the loop. Continuing
this reasoning we find that in order to have zero steady state error when
tracking the signal
t2
r(t) =
2
it is necessary that s(s) e3 s3 for small s. This implies that there are
three integrals in the loop.
The coefficients of the Taylor series expansion of the sensitivity s(s)
function for small s,
S(s) = e0 + e1 s + e2 s2 + . . . + en sn + . . . (7.8)
ld
are thus useful to express the steady state error in tracking low frequency
signals. The coefficients ek are called error coefficients. The first non van-
ishing error coefficient is the one that is of most interest, this is often
called the error coefficient.
or
7.5 Specifications Based on Optimization
The properties of the transfer functions can also be based on integral
criteria. Let e(t) be the error caused by reference values or disturbances
and let u(t) be the corresponding control signal. The following criteria are
commonly used to express the performance of a control system.
Z
W

IE = e(t)dt
Z0
I AE = h e(t)hdt
Z0
IT AE = th e(t)hdt
0
Z
IQ = e2 (t)dt
TU
0
Z
WQ = ( e2 (t) + u2 (t))dt
0
They are called, IE integrated error, IAE integrated absolute error, ITAE
integrated time multiplies absolute error, integrated quadratic error and
WQ weighted quadratic error. The criterion WQ makes it possible to
trade the error against the control effort required to reduce the error.
JN
262

7.6 Properties of Simple Systems

It is useful to have a good knowledge of properties of simple dynamical
systems. In this section we have summarize such data for easy reference.
First Order Systems

Consider a system where the transfer function from reference to output
is
a
G ( s) = (7.9)
s+a
The step and impulse responses of the system are
h(t) = 1 eat = 1 et/T
ld
1
g(g) = aeat = et/T
T
where the parameter T is the time constant of the system. Simple calcu-
lations give the properties of the step response shown in Table 7.1. The
2% settling time of the system is 4 time constants. The step and impulse
or
responses are monotone. The velocity constant e1 is also equal to the time
constant T. This means that there will be a constant tracking error of
e1 v = v0 T when the input signal is a ramp r = v0 t.
This system (7.9) can be interpreted as a feedback system with the
loop transfer function
a 1
L( s ) = =
s sT
This system has a gain crossover frequency gc = a. The Nyquist curve
W
is the negative imaginary axis, which implies that the phase margin is
90 . Simple calculation gives the results shown in Table 7.1. The load
disturbance response of a first order system typically has the form
s
G xd =
s+a
The step response of this transfer function is

TU
h xd = eat
The maximum thus occurs when the disturbance is applies and the set-
tling time is 4T. The frequency response decays monotonically for increas-
ing frequency. The largest value of the gain is a zero frequency.
Some characteristics of the disturbance response are given in Table 7.2.
JN
263

Table 7.1 Properties of the response to reference values for the first order system
Gxr = a/(s + a).
Propety Value
Rise time Tr = 1/ a = T
Delay time Td = 0.69/ a = 0.69T
Settling time (2%) Ts = 4/ a = 4T
Overshoot o=0
Error coefficients e0 = 0, e1 = 1/ a = T
Bandwidth b = a
Resonance peak r = 0
ld
Sensitivities Ms = Mt = 1
Gain margin gm =
Phase margin m = 90
Crossover frequency gc = a
Sensitivity frequency sc =
Property
Peak time or
Table 7.2 Properties of the response to disturbances for the first order system
Gxd = s/(s + a).
Value
Tp = 0
W
Max error emax = 1
Settling time Ts = 4T
Error coefficient e1 = T
Largest norm hh G xd hh = 1
Integrated error I E = 1/ a = T
Integrated absolute error I AE = 1/ a = T
TU
Second Oder System without Zeros

Consider a second order system with the transfer function
02
G ( s) = (7.10)
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
JN
264

The system has two poles, they are complex if < 1 and real if > 1.
The step response of the system is

e 0 t

1 p sin( d t + ) for h h < 1

12

h(t) = 1 (1 + 0 t) e 0 t for = 1

sinh d t e d t
1 cosh d t + p 2 for h h > 1
1
p
where d = 0 h1 2 h and = arccos . Whenp < 1 the step response
is a damped oscillation, with frequency d = 0 1 2 . Notice that the
step response is enclosed by the envelopes
ld
e 0 t h(t) 1 e 0 t
This means that the system settles like a first order system with time
constant T = 1 0 . The 2% settling time is thus Ts 4 0 . Step responses
for different values of are shown in Figure 4.9.
or
The maximum of the step response occurs approximately at Tp / d ,
i.e. half a period of the oscillation. The overshoot depends on the damping.
The largest overshoot is 100% for = 0. Some properties of the step
response are summarized in Table 7.3.
The system (7.10) can be interpreted as a feedback system with the
loop transfer function
02
L(s) =
W
s(s + 2 0 )
This means that we can compute quantities such as sensitivity functions
and stability margins. These quantities are summarized in Table 7.3.
Second Oder System with Zeros

The response to load disturbances for a second order system with integral
action can have the form
0s
TU
G ( s) =
s2 + 2 0 s + 02
The frequency response has a maximum 1/(2 ) at = 0 . The step

response of the transfer function is
e 0 t
h(t) = sin d t
sqrt1 2
JN
265

Table 7.3 Properties of the response to reference values of a second order system.
Property Value
Rise time Tr = 0 e / tan 2.2Td
Delay time Td
Peak time Tp / D = Td /2
Settling time (2%) Ts 4/( 0 )
2
Overshoot o = e / 1
Error coefficients e = 0, e1 = 2 / 0
q0 p
Bandwidth b = 0 1 2 2 + (1 2 2 )2 + 1
r
8 2 +1+(4 l2
+1) 8 2 +1
ld
Maximum sensitivity Ms = 2
8 2 +1+(4 l2
2 1) 8 +1

1+ 8 +1
Frequency
( wmsp= 0
2
1/(2 1 2 ) if 2/2
Max. comp. sensitivity Mt =
1( p if 2/2
0 1 2 2 if 2/2
mt =
or
Frequency
1 if 2/2
Gain margin gm =
Phase margin m = 90 arctan c /(2 0 )

qp
Crossover frequency gc = 0 4 4 + 1 2 2

Sensitivity frequency sc = 0 / 2
W
This could typically represent the response to a step in the load distur-
bance. Figure 7.7 shows the step response for different values of . The
step response has its maximum
max h(t) = 0 e //sqrt1

2
(7.11)
TU
for
arccos
t = tm =
0
JN
266

7.7 Poles and Zeros
0.5
h 0
0.5
1
0 5 10 15
0t
Figure 7.7 Step responses of the transfer function (7.11) for = 0 (dotted), 0.1,
0.2, 0.5, 0.7 (dash-dotted), 1, 2, 5, 10 (dashed).
ld
or
Figure 7.8 Typical configuration of poles and zeros for a transfer function describ-
ing the response to reference signals.
W
Systems of Higher Order
7.7 Poles and Zeros

Specifications can also be expressed in terms of the poles and zeros of
TU
the transfer functions. The transfer function from reference value to the
output of a system typically has the pole zero configuration shown in
Figure 7.8. The behavior of a system is characterized by the poles and
zeros with the largest real parts. In the figure the behavior is dominated
by a complex pole pair p1 and p2 and real poles and zeros. The dominant
poles are often characterized by the relative damping and the distance
from the origin 0 . Robustness is determined by the relative damping and
the response speed is inversely proportional to 0 .
JN
267

Dominant poles
Zeros
Dipoles
7.8 Relations Between Specifications

A good intuition about the different specifications can be obtained by in-
vestigating the relations between specifications for simple systems as is
given in Tables 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3.
The Rise Time Bandwidth Product
ld
Consider a transfer function G (s) for a stable system with G (0) = 0.
We will derive a relation between the rise time and the bandwidth of a
system. We define the rise time by the largest slope of the step response.
G (0)
Tr = (7.12)
maxt g(t)
or
where g is the impulse response of G, and let the bandwidth be defined
as R
h G (i )h
b = 0 (7.13)
G (0)
This implies that the bandwidth for the system G (s) = 1/(s + 1) is equal

to 1, i.e. the frequency where the gain has dropped by a factor of 1/ 2.
The impulse response g is related to the transfer function G by
W
Z i Z
1 1
g(t) = e G (s)ds =
st
ei t G (i )d
2 i i 2
Hence
Z Z
1 i t 1
max g(t) e G (i )d = h G (i )hd
t 2 0
TU
Equations (7.12) and (7.13) now give
Tr b 1
This simple calculation indicates that the product of rise time and band-
width is approximately constant. For most systems the product is around
2.
JN
268

7.9 Summary
7.9 Summary
It is important for both users and designers of control systems to un-
derstand the role of specifications. The important message is that it is
necessary to have specifications that cover properties of the Gang of Six,
otherwise there is really no guarantee that the system will work well.
This important fact is largely neglected in much of the literature and in
control practice. Some practical ways of giving reasonable specifications
are summarized.
ld
or
W
TU
JN
269

8
Feedforward Design
ld
8.1 Introduction
Feedforward is a powerful technique that complements feedback. It can
be used both to reduce the effect of measurable disturbances and to im-
prove set-point responses. Uses of feedforward was already discussed in
or
connection with systems having two degrees of freedom in Section 6.3.
We will now give a systematic treatment of feedforward and also discuss
design of model-following systems.
8.2 Disturbance attenuation

W
Disturbances can be eliminated by feedback. With a feedback system it
is, however, necessary that there be an error before the controller can
take actions to eliminate disturbances. In some situations it is possible
to measure disturbances before they have influenced the processes. It is
then natural to try to eliminate the effects of the disturbances before they
have created control errors. This control paradigm is called feedforward.
The principle is illustrated in Figure 8.1.
TU
In Figure 8.1 process transfer function P is composed of two factors,

P = P1 P2 . A measured disturbance d enters at the input of process sec-
tion P2 . The measured disturbance is fed to the process input via the
feedforward transfer function G f f .
The transfer function from load disturbance to process output is
Y ( s) P2 (1 P1 G f f )
= = P2 (1 P1 G f f ) S (8.1)
D ( s) 1 + PC
JN
270

8.2 Disturbance attenuation
d
F
r u y
C P1 P2
Figure 8.1 Block diagram of a system where measured disturbance d is reduced

by a combination of feedback and feedforward.
ld
where S = 1/(1 + PC ) is the sensitivity function. This equation shows
that there are two ways of reducing the disturbance. We can try to make
1 P1 G f f small by a proper choice of the feedforward transfer function
G f f or we can make the loop transfer function PC large by feedback.
Feedforward and feedback can also be combined.
Notice that with feedforward we are trying to make the difference
or
between two terms small but with feedback we simply multiply with a
small number. An immediate consequence is that feedforward is more
sensitive than feedback. With feedback there is risk of instability, there
is no such risk with feedforward. Feedback and feedforward are therefore
complementary and it is useful to combine them.
An ideal feedforward compensator is given by
P yd
W
G f f = P11 = . (8.2)
P yu
where P yd is the transfer function from d to y and P yu = P is the transfer
function from u to y.
The ideal feedforward compensator is formed by taking the inverse of
the process dynamics P1 . This inverse is often not realizable, but approx-
imations have to be used. This problem is treated in the next section.
Feedforward is most effective when the disturbance d enters early in
TU
the process. This occurs when most of the dynamics are in process section
P2 . When P1 = 1, and therefore P2 = P, the ideal feedforward compensator
is realizable and the effects of the disturbance can be eliminated from the
process output y. On the other hand, when the dynamics enter late in
the process, so that P1 P, the effects of the disturbance are seen in the
process output y at the same time as they are seen in the feedforward
signal. In this case, there is no advantage of using feedforward compared
to feedback.
JN
271

Chapter 8. Feedforward Design
Steam valve
Feed F F
water
L Drum
Oil Turbine
Air
Raiser Down comer
Figure 8.2 Schematic diagram of a drum boiler with level control.
ld
Applications
In many process control applications there are several processes in series.
In such cases it is often easy to measure disturbances and use feedfor-
ward. Typical applications of feedforward control are: drum-level control
in steam boilers, control of distillation columns and rolling mills. An ap-
or
plication of combined feedback and feedforward control follows.
EXAMPLE 8.1DRUM LEVEL CONTROL

A simplified diagram of a steam boiler is shown in Figure 8.2. The water
in the raiser is heated by the burners. The steam generated in the raiser,
which is lighter than the water, rises toward the drum. This causes a
circulation around the loop consisting of the raisers, the drum, and the
W
down comers. The steam is separated from the water in the drum. The
steam flow to the turbine is controlled by the steam valve.
It is important to keep the water level in the drum constant. Too low a
water level gives insufficient cooling of the raisers, and there is a risk of
burning. With too high a water level, water may move into the turbines,
which may cause damage. There is a control system for keeping the level
constant. The control problem is difficult because of the so-called shrink
and swell effect. It can be explained as follows: Assume that the system is
TU
in equilibrium with a constant drum level. If the steam flow is increased

by opening the turbine valve, the pressure in the drum will drop. The
decreased pressure causes generation of extra bubbles in the drum and
in the raisers. As a result the drum level will initially increase. Since
more steam is taken out of the drum, the drum level will of course finally
decrease. This phenomena, which is called the shrink and swell effect,
causes severe difficulties in the control of the drum level. Mathematically
it also gives rise to right half plane zero in the transfer function.
JN
272

8.3 System inverses
The problem can be solved by introducing the control strategy shown

in Figure 8.2. It consists of a combination of feedback and feedforward.
There is a feedback from the drum level to the controller, but there is also
a feedforward from the difference between steam flow and feed-water flow
so that the feedwater flow is quickly matched to the steam flow.
8.3 System inverses

It follows from (8.2) that the feedforward compensator contains an inverse
of the process model P1 . A key issue in design of feedforward compensators
is thus to find inverse dynamics. It is easy to compute the inverse formally.
ld
There are, however, severe fundamental problems in system inversion
that are illustrated by the following examples.
EXAMPLE 8.2INVERSE OF KLT SYSTEM

The system
1
P ( s) = esL
1 + sT
or
has the formal inverse.
P1 (s) = (1 + sT ) esL
This system is not a causal dynamical system because the term esL repre-
sents a prediction. The term (1 + sT ) requires and ideal derivative which
also is problematic as was discussed in Section 6.3. Implementation of
W
feedforward thus requires approximations.
EXAMPLE 8.3INVERSE OF SYSTEM WITH RHP ZERO

The system
s1
P ( s) =
s+1
has the inverse
s+2
P1 (s) =
s1
TU
Notice that this inverse is an unstable system.

Use of system inverses and feedforward often gives rise to pole-zero
cancellations. The canceled poles and zeros must be stable and sufficiently
fast otherwise there will be signals in the system that will grow exponen-
tially or decay very slowly.
To design feedforward we thus have to compute approximate system in-
verses with suitable properties. Since feedforward is frequently combined
JN
273

with feedback we can take that into account when finding approximate
inverses.
Let P denote the approximate inverse of the transfer function P. A
common approximation in process control is to neglect all dynamics and
simply take the inverse of the static gain, i.e.
P (s) = P(0)1
A number of results on more accurate system inverses have been de-

rived in system theory. Some of these will be shown here. Note that it
follows from (8.2) that the inverse transfer function only has to be small
for those frequencies where the sensitivity function is large.
ld
EXAMPLE 8.4APPROXIMATE INVERSE OF KLT SYSTEM
The system
1
P ( s) = esL
1 + sT
has the approximate inverse.
or
1 + sT
P ( s) =
1 + sT / N
where N gives the frequency range where inversion is valid.
EXAMPLE 8.5APPROXIMATE INVERSE OF SYSTEM WITH RHP ZERO

The system
W
s1
P ( s) =
s+2
has the inverse
s+2
P ( s) =
s+1
Notice that the unstable zero in P gives rise to a pole in P which is the
mirror image of the unstable zero.
TU
8.4 Response to Reference Inputs

Feedforward can be used very effectively to improve the set point response
of the system. This was has been discussed in connection with systems
having two degrees of freedom in Section 5.3. Here we will go a little
deeper into the design of feedforward compensators.
JN
274

8.4 Response to Reference Inputs
a
d n
r e u x y
F C P
b
d n
r e u x y
ld
F CI P
CR
r
P M
ym u or uf f
y
W
M C P
Figure 8.3 Block diagram of three system with two degrees of freedom.
TU
We will start with a system having two degrees of freedom. It is as-

sumed that a feedback controller which gives good rejection of distur-
bances and good robustness has been designed an we will consider the
problem of designing feedforward compensators that give good response
to set point changes. There are many possible configurations of a system
with two degrees of freedom. Three examples are shown in in Figure 8.3.
The block diagram in the top of the figure (a) is the system that was dis-
cussed in the previous chapters. The process has the transfer function P
JN
275

and the feedback controller has the transfer function C. The system in the
middle (b) is a slight modification where the controller transfer function
is written as
C = CI + CR
where CI is the term of the controller function that contains integral
action and CR is the rest of the controller transfer function. For the PID
controller
ki
C = k+ + kd s
s
we have
ki
CI =
s
ld
CR = k + kd s
The block diagram at the bottom of the figure (c) is yet another config-
uration. In this system there is an explicit feedforward signal u f f that
generates an input to the process that gives the ideal response ym to a
reference input r. This input is generated by the transfer function M . The
feedback operates on the error ym y. It can be shown that all configu-
or
rations are equivalent if all systems are linear and the transfer functions
are chosen properly.
There are however some differences between the systems from a prac-
tical point of view. Assume for example that the transfer function M that
gives the ideal response to reference inputs is such that the transfer func-
tion P1 M is stable with the same number of poles and zeros. It then
follows that the scheme c) in Figure 8.3 will give the ideal response to
W
reference signals for all controllers C that stabilize the system. There is
thus a clean separation between feedback and feedforward. The scheme
a) in Figure 8.3 will give the ideal response if
P1 M + CM = C F
which implies that in a) the transfer function F must be chosen as
1 + PC
F=M
TU
PC
The transfer function F thus depends on C. This means that if the feed-
back controller C is changed it is necessary to also change the feedforward
F. Notice that the feedforward F must cancel zeros in PC that are not
zeros of M . The corresponding equation for scheme b) is
1 + PC
F=M
PCI
JN
276

8.5 Summary
The transfer function CI = ki / s does not have any zeros. With this scheme
the feedforward F must cancel zeros in P that are not zeros of M .
Notice that in all cases it is necessary to have an invertible process
transfer function P. Approximate inverses must be used if this transfer
function has RHP zeros or time delays. In scheme c) the process inverse
appears in the combination P M . This transfer function will not contain
derivatives if the pole excess of P is not larger than the pole excess of M .
For example, if
1
P ( s) =
s(s + 1)
1
M ( s) = 2
s +s+1
ld
then
s(s + 1)
P1 (s) M (s) =
s2 + s + 1
Notice also that in this case the steady state gain of the transfer function
P1 (s) M (s) is zero.
8.5 Summary
or
Design of feedforward has been discussed in this chapter. Feedforward can
be used to reduce the effect of measurable disturbances. Design of feedfor-
ward is essentially a matter of finding inverse process models. Different
techniques to do this have been discussed. The major part of the chapter
W
has been devoted to set point response. A structure with two degrees of
freedom has been used. This gives a clean separation of regulation and set
point response and of feedback and feedforward. It has been assumed that
the feedback controller has been designed. A simple way to modify the set
point response is to use set point weighting. If the desired results cannot
be obtained by zero set point weighting a full fledged two degree of free-
dom can be used. This makes is possible to make a complete separation
between load disturbance response and set point response. The crucial
TU
design issue is to decide the achievable response speed. For systems with
monotone set point responses the notion of neutral feedforward has been
proposed. Many other variants have also been discussed. Finally it has
been demonstrated that very fast set point responses can be obtained by
using nonlinear methods.
Special care must be taken when implementing feedforward control,
otherwise integrator windup may occur.
JN
277

9
State Feedback
ld
9.1 Introduction
The state of a dynamical system is a collection of variables that permits
prediction of the future development of a system. It is therefore very natu-
ral to base control on the state. This will be explored in this chapter. It will
or
be assumed that the system to be controlled is described by a state model.
Furthermore it is assumed that the system has one control variable. The
technique which will be developed may be viewed as a prototype of an
analytical design method. The feedback control will be developed step by
step using one single idea, the positioning of closed loop poles in desired
locations.
The case when all the state variables are measured is first discussed
in Section 9.2. It is shown that if the system is reachable then it is always
W
possible to find a feedback so that the closed loop system has prescribed
poles. The controller does not have integral action. This can however be
provided by a hack using state augmentation.
In Section 9.3 we consider the problem of determining the states from
observations of inputs and outputs. Conditions for doing this are estab-
lished and practical ways to do this are also developed. In particular it is
shown that the state can be generated from a dynamical system driven by
the inputs and outputs of the process. Such a system is called an observer.
TU
The observer can be constructed in such a way that its state approaches
the true states with dynamics having prescribed poles. It will also be
shown that the problem of finding an observer with prescribed dynamics
is mathematically equivalent to the problem of finding a state feedback.
In Section 9.4 it is shown that the results of Sections 9.2 and 9.3 can be
combined to give a controller based on measurements of the process output
only. The conditions required are simply that the system is reachable and
JN
278

9.1 Introduction
observable. This result is important because the controller has a very

interesting structure. The controller contains a mathematical model of the
system to be controlled. This is called the internal model principle. The
solution to the pole placement problem also illustrates that the notions
of reachability and observability are essential. The result gives a good
interpretation of dynamic feedback. It shows that the dynamics of the
controller arises from the need to reconstruct the state of the system.
The controller obtained in Section 9.4 is compared with a PID con-
troller in Section 9.5. The comparison shows that one difference is that
the prediction by derivative action in the PID controller is replaced by
a better prediction using a mathematical model in the controller in the
controller with output feedback. The comparison also shows that the con-
troller with output feedback does not have integral action. The lack of
ld
integral action is due to assumptions made when modeling the system.
Once this is understood it is easy to modify the model so that integral
action is obtained. The modification requires modeling of disturbances
which is discussed in Section 9.6. This shows that integral action is ob-
tained when there are constant disturbances. The theory also make it
possible to deal with other types of disturbances in a similar way. The
approach is based on the idea of state augmentation. This means that the
or
model of the system is augmented by mathematical models that describe
disturbances acting on the system.
Following reference signals is discussed in Section 9.7. It is shown
that following of reference signals can be completely decoupled from dis-
turbance attenuation by a design which gives a controller having two
degrees of freedom. Finally in Section 9.8 we give an example that illus-
trates the design technique.
W
The details of the designs in this chapter are carried out for systems
with one input and one output. It turns out that the structure of the
controller and the forms of the equations are exactly the same for systems
with many inputs and many outputs. There are also many other design
techniques that give controllers with the same structure. A characteristic
feature of a controller with state feedback and an observer is that the
complexity of the controller is given by the complexity of the system to
be controlled. The controller actually contains a model of the system, the
TU
internal model principle.

JN
279

Chapter 9. State Feedback
u x R x y
B C
Figure 9.1 Block diagram of the process described by the state model in Equa-
tion (9.1).
9.2 State Feedback

Consider a system described by the linear differential equation
ld
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt (9.1)
y = Cx
A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 9.1. The output is the
variable that we are interested in controlling. To begin with it is assumed
or
that all components of the state vector are measured. Since the state at
time t contains all information necessary to predict the future behavior
of the system, the most general time invariant control law is function of
the state, i.e.
u(t) = f ( x)
If the feedback is restricted to be a linear, it can be written as
W
u = Lx + Lr r (9.2)
where r is the reference value. The negative sign is simply a convention

to indicate that negative feedback is the normal situation. The closed loop
system obtained when the feedback (9.1) is applied to the system (9.2) is
given by
dx
= ( A B L) x + B Lr r (9.3)
TU
dt
It will be attempted to determine the feedback gain L so that the closed
loop system has the characteristic polynomial
p(s) = sn + p1 sn1 + . . . + pn1 s + pn (9.4)
This control problem is called the pole assignment problem or the pole
placement problem.
JN
280

9.2 State Feedback
The transfer function from reference r to output y of the closed loop

system is
G yr (s) = C (sI A + B L)1 B Lr (9.5)
Requiring that the static gain from reference r to output y should be equal
to one gives
1 1 + LA1 B
Lr = = (9.6)
C ( A + B L)1 B C A1 B
The static gain given by (9.6) critically depends on the parameter values.
We express this by saying that the system is calibrated. This is different
from a system with integral action where the static gain does not depend
on the parameter values.
ld
Examples
We will start by considering a few examples that give insight into the
nature of the problem.

The double integrator is described by

or
dx 0 1 0
=
x+ u
dt 0 0 1

y = 1 0x
Introducing the feedback
u = l1 x1 l2 x2 + Lr r
W
the closed loop system becomes

dx 0 1 0
=
x +
r
dt l1 l2 Lr (9.7)

y = 1 0 x
The closed loop system has the characteristic polynomial

TU

s 1

det
= s 2 + l2 s + l1
l 1 s + l2
Assume it is desired to have a feedback that gives a closed loop system

with the characteristic polynomial
p(s) = s2 + 2 0 s + 02
JN
281

Comparing this with the characteristic polynomial of the closed loop sys-
tem we fin the following values of the We find that the feedback gains
should be chosen as
l1 = 02 , l2 = 2 0
The closed loop system which is given by Equation (9.7) has the transfer
function
s
1 1 0

G yr (s) = 1 0
l 1 s + l2 Lr
Lr Lr
= 2 = 2
s + l2 s + l1 s + 2 0 0 s + 02
To have unit steady state gain the parameter Lr must be equal to l1 = 02 .
ld
The control law can thus be written as
u = l1 (r x1 ) l2 x2 = 02 (r x1 ) 2 0 0 x2
In the next example we will encounter some difficulties.
EXAMPLE 9.2AN UNREACHABLE SYSTEM

Consider the system
dx
dt
=

0 1

0 0

x +

1

y = Cx = 1 0 x
0
u
or
W
with the control law
u = l1 x1 l2 x2 + Lr r
The closed loop system is

dx l 1 l2 Lr
= 1
x+ r
dt 0 0 0
TU
This system has the characteristic polynomial

s + l1 1 + l2

det
= s 2 + l1 s = s ( s + l1 )
0 s
This polynomial has zeros at s = 0 and s = l1 . One closed loop pole is

thus always equal to s = 0 and it is not possible to obtain an arbitrary
characteristic polynomial.
JN
282

9.2 State Feedback
This example shows that the pole placement problem cannot be solved.
An analysis of the equation describing the system shows that the state x2
is not reachable. It is thus clear that some conditions on the system are
required. The reachable and observable canonical forms have the property
that the parameters of the system are the coefficients of the characteristic
equation. It is therefore natural to consider systems on these forms when
solving the pole placement problem. In the next example we investigate
the case when the system is in reachable canonical form.
EXAMPLE 9.3SYSTEM IN REACHABLE CANONICAL FORM

Consider a system in reachable canonical form, i.e,

a1 a2 . . . an1 an 1

0
ld

1 0 ... 0 0

dz =
+ Bu ... 0
0
= Az

0 1 0
z +

u
dt
..

..
(9.8)

.
.

0 0 ... 1 0 0

= b1 b2 bn z
y = Cz

Dn (s) = det

s + a1
1
0
..
a2
s
1
or
The open loop system has the characteristic polynomial
... an1
0
0
0
0

an

W

.

0 0 1 s
Expanding the determinant by the last row we find that the following
recursive equation for the determinant.
Dn (s) = sDn1(s) + an
TU
It follows from this equation that
Dn (s) = sn + a1 sn1 + . . . + an1 s + an
A useful property of the system described by (9.8) is thus that the co-
efficients of the characteristic polynomial appear in the first row. Since
the all elements of the B-matrix except the first row are zero it follows
that the state feedback only changes the first row of the A-matrix. It is
JN
283

thus straight forward to see how the closed loop poles are changed by the
feedback. Introduce the control law
+ Lr r = l1 z1 l2 z2 . . . ln zn + Lr r
u = Lz (9.9)
The closed loop system then becomes

a1 l1 a2 l2 . . . an1 ln1 an ln Lr

1 0 0 0

0

dz

=

0 1 0 0

z +

0

r
dt
..
..

.
.

0 0 1 0 0
ld

y = b1 b2 bn z
(9.10)
The feedback thus changes the elements of the first row of the A matrix,
which corresponds to the parameters of the characteristic equation. The
closed loop system thus has the characteristic polynomial
or
sn + (al + l1 )sn1 + (a2 + l2 )sn2 + . . . + (an1 + ln1 )s + an + ln
Requiring this polynomial to be equal to the desired closed loop polynomial

(9.4) we find that the controller gains should be chosen as
l1 = p1 a1
W
l2 = p2 a2
..
.
ln = pn an
This feedback simply replace the parameters ai in the system (9.10) by

pi . The feedback gain for a system in reachable canonical form is thus

TU
= p1 a1
L p2 a2 pn an (9.11)
The system (9.10) has the following transfer function from reference to
output from
(b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + bn1 s + bn ) Lr

G yr (s) =
sn+ p1 sn1 + p2 sn2 + . . . + pn1 s + pn
JN
284

9.2 State Feedback
Notice that the system has the same zeros as the open loop system. To
have unit steady state gain the parameter Lr should be chosen as
an + ln pn
Lr = = (9.12)
bn bn
Notice that it is essential to know the precise values of parameters an

and bn in order to obtain the correct steady state gain. The steady state
gain is thus obtained by precise calibration. This is very different from
obtaining the correct steady state value by integral action. We thus find
that it is easy to solve the pole placement problem when the system has
the structure given by (9.8).
ld
The General Case
To solve the problem in the general case, we simply change coordinates
so that the system is in reachable canonical form. Consider the system
(9.1). Change the coordinates by a linear transformation
z = Tx
feedback
+ Lr r = LT
u = Lz x + Lr r
or
so that the transformed system is in observable canonical form (9.8). For
such a system the feedback is given by (9.9) where the coefficients are
given by (9.11). Transforming back to the original coordinates gives the
W
It now remains to find the transformation. To do this we observe that the
reachability matrices have the property.

r = B
W A B ... A n1 B = T B AB ... An1 B = T Wr
The transformation matrix is thus given by
r W 1
T=W (9.13)
r
TU
and the feedback gain can be written as
=L
L = LT W r W 1 (9.14)
r
Notice that the matrix W r is given by (3.47). The feedforward gain Lr is

given by Equation (9.12).
The results obtained can be summarized as follows.
JN
285

THEOREM 9.1POLE-PLACEMENT BY STATE FEEDBACK

Consider the system given by Equation (9.1)
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx
with one input and one output which has the transfer function
(b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + bn1 s + bn ) Lr

G ( s) =
sn+ a1 sn1 + a2 sn2 + . . . + an1 s + an
If the system is reachable there exits a feedback
ld
u = Lx + Lr r
that gives a closed loop system with the characteristic polynomial
p(s) = sn + p1 sn1 + . . . + pn1 s + pn
The feedback gain is given by
or

= p1 a1
L = LT p2 a2 ... pn an W
r W 1
r
pn
Lr =
an
where ai are the coefficients of the characteristic polynomial of the matrix

A and the matrices Wr and W r are given by
W

Wr = B AB . . . An1

1 a1 a2 . . . an1 1

0 1 a1 . . . an2

Wr =

..

.

0 0 0 ... 1
TU
REMARK 9.1A MATHEMATICAL INTERPRETATION

Notice that the pole-placement problem can be formulated abstractly as
the following algebraic problem. Given an n n matrix A and an n 1
matrix B, find a 1 n matrix L such that the matrix A B L has prescribed
eigenvalues.
JN
286

9.2 State Feedback
Computing the Feedback Gain

We have thus obtained a solution to the problem and the feedback has
been described by a closed form solution.
For simple problems is is easy to solve the problem by the following
simple procedure: Introduce the elements li of L as unknown variables.
Compute the characteristic polynomial
det(sI A + B L)
Equate coefficients of equal powers of s to the coefficients of the desired

characteristic polynomial
p(s) = sn + p1 sn1 + . . . + pn1 + pn
ld
This gives a system of linear equations to determine li . The equations
can always be solved if the system is observable. Example 9.1 is typical
illustrations.
For systems of higher order it is more convenient to use Equation 9.14,
this can also be used for numeric computations. However, for large sys-
tems this is not sound numerically, because it involves computation of the
or
characteristic polynomial of a matrix and computations of high powers
of matrices. Both operations lead to loss of numerical accuracy. For this
reason there are other methods that are better numerically. In Matlab the
state feedback can be computed by the procedures acker or place.
ACKER Pole placement gain selection using Ackermanns formula.
K = ACKER(A,B,P) calculates the feedback gain matrix K such that

W
the single input system
.
x = Ax + Bu
with a feedback law of u = -Kx has closed loop poles at the

values specified in vector P, i.e., P = eig(A-B*K).
Note: This algorithm uses Ackermanns formula. This method

is NOT numerically reliable and starts to break down rapidly
TU
for problems of order greater than 10, or for weakly controllable

systems. A warning message is printed if the nonzero closed-loop
poles are greater than 10\% from the desired locations specified
in P.
See also PLACE.
PLACE Pole placement technique

JN
287

K = PLACE(A,B,P) computes a state-feedback matrix K such that

the eigenvalues of A-B*K are those specified in vector P.
No eigenvalue should have a multiplicity greater than the
number of inputs.
[K,PREC,MESSAGE] = PLACE(A,B,P) returns PREC, an estimate of how

closely the eigenvalues of A-B*K match the specified locations P
(PREC measures the number of accurate decimal digits in the actual
closed-loop poles). If some nonzero closed-loop pole is more than
10\% off from the desired location, MESSAGE contains a warning
message.
See also ACKER.
ld
Notice that the program acker does not give the static gain Lr , com-
pare (9.6), and that the notation is different from the one we use in the
book. This is easily dealt with by writing a new Matlab function sfb which
computes the gain matrices for the state feedback problem.
function [L Lr]=sfb(A,B,C,p)
% Compute gains L Lr for state feedback
or
% A, B and C are the matrices in the state model
% p is a vector of desired closed loop poles
L=acker(A,B,p);
Lr=1/(C*((-A+B*L)\B);
This program also computes the gain Lr .
Integral Action
W
The controller (9.2) does not have integral action. The correct steady state
response to reference values was obtained by a proper choice of the gain
Lr , i.e. a calibrated procedure. Compare with (9.6). This means that the
controller is not useful practically. One way to ensure that the output will
equal the reference in steady state is enforce integral action. One way to
do this is to introduce the integral of the error as an extra state, i.e.
Z
xn+1 = ( y r)dt
TU
Differentiating this equation gives
dxn+1
= y r = Cx r
dt
Augmenting the state by considering xn+1 as an extra state variable we

JN
288

9.2 State Feedback
find that the augmented system can be described by the equation

d d
x

=
dt dt xn+1

A 0 x B (9.15)
=

+
u + 0 I r
C 0 xn+1 0
= A + Br

This equation has the same form as the original system (9.1). The reach-
ability matrix of the augmented system is

B AB ... An B
Wr =

... C An1 B
ld
0 CB
To find the conditions for Wr to be of full rank the matrix will be trans-
formed by making column operations. Let ak be the coefficients of the
characteristic polynomial of the matrix A. Multiplying the first column by
an , the second by an1 and the (n-1)th column by a1 and adding to the
last column the matrix Wr it follows from the Cayley-Hamilton theorem
or
that the transformed matrix becomes

B AB . . . 0
Wr =

0 C B . . . bn
where
bn = C ( An1 B + a1 An2 B + . . . + an1 B ) (9.16)
W
Notice that bn can be identified with a coefficient of the transfer function
of the original system
b1 sn1 + b2 sn2 + . . . + bn
G ( s) =
sn + a1 sn1 + . . . + an
Notice that bn = an G (0) = an C A1 B. Compare with Section 3.7.

The state feedback for the augmented system (9.15) is
TU
x

= L
u = L LI

+ Lr r (9.17)
xn+1
and the closed loop system becomes

d x A BL B L I x B Lr

=

+

r
dt xn+1 C 0 xn+1 1
JN
289

If the reference is constant r0 and the closed loop system is stable it follows
that
y0 = Cx0 = r0
The steady state output is thus equal to the reference for all values of the
gain Lr . This is no surprise because the control law (9.17) can be written
as
Z t Z t
u(t) = Lx(t) L I ( y( )r( ))d + Lr r(t) = Lr r(t)+ L I e( )d Lx(t)
0 0
(9.18)
and it clearly has integral action. Compare with Equation (2.4). This com-
parison also shows that the term Lx(t) is a generalization of derivative
action.
ld
Summary
It has been found that the control problem is simple if all states are
measured. The most general feedback is a static function from the state
space to space of controls. A particularly simple case is when the feedback
is restricted to be linear, because it can then be described as a matrix or a
or
vector in the case of systems with only one control variable. A method of
determining the feedback gain in such a way that the closed loop system
has prescribed poles has been given. This can always be done if the system
is reachable. A method of obtaining integral action was also introduced.
A comparison with the PID controller showed that state feedback can
be interpreted as a PID controller where the derivative is replaced by a
better prediction based on the state of the system.
W
9.3 Observers
In Section 9.2 it was shown that the pole it was possible to find a feedback
that gives desired closed loop poles provided that the system is reachable
and that all states were measured. It is highly unrealistic to assume that
all states are measured. In this section we will investigate how the state
TU
can be estimated by using the mathematical model and a few measure-

ments. Before reading this section it is recommended to refresh the mate-
rial on observability in Section 3.7. In that section it was shown that the
state could be computed from the output if the the system is observable.
In this Section we will develop some practical methods for determining
the state of the system from inputs and outputs. It will be shown that
the computation of the states can be done by dynamical systems. Such
systems will be called observers.
JN
290

9.3 Observers
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt (9.19)
y = Cx
where x is the state, u the input, and y the measured output. The problem
of determining the state of the system from its inputs and outputs will
be considered. It will be assumed that there is only one measured signal,
i.e. that the signal y is a scalar and that C is a vector.
Observers Based on Differentiation
ld
An observer based on differentiation will first be given. The construction
is an extension of the derivation of the criterion for observability in Sec-
tion 3.7.
First observe that the output equation
y = Cx
equation gives
dy
dt
=C
dx
dt
= C Ax + C Bu
or
gives the projection of the state on the vector C. Differentiation of this
The derivative of the output together with C Bu thus gives the projection
W
of the state vector on the vector C A. Proceeding in this way and taking
higher derivatives give the projections of the state vector on the vectors
C , C A, . . . , C An1 . If these vectors are linearly independent, the projec-
tions of the state on n linearly independent vectors are obtained and the
state can thus be determined. Carrying out the details, we get
y = Cx
dy
TU
= Cdxdt = C Ax + C Bu
dt
d2 y dx du du
= CA + CB = C A2 x + C ABu + C B
dt2 dt dt dt
..
.
dn1 y n1 n2 n3 du dn2 u
= C A x + C A Bu + C A B + . . . + C B
dtn1 dt dtn2
JN
291

This equation can be written in matrix form as

C y

dy
C Bu

C A

dt

.
x=

.

..

.

.

n1
dn1 y
dn2 u
CA
dtn1
C An2 Bu C An3 B du
dt . . . C B dtn2
Notice that the matrix on the left-hand side is the observability matrix
Wo . If the system is observable, the equation can be solved to give
u
y 0 0
0

du

0
d y

CB 0

1
dt dt
x = Wo
ld

.
W 1
o ..

.

.

.

.

.
.
dn1
n2 n3

n 1
CA B CA B CB d n
n

2
2
dt dt
(9.20)
This is an exact expression for the state. The state is obtained by differ-
entiating inputs and outputs. Notice that it has been derived under the
assumption that there is no measurement noise. Differentiation can give
or
very large errors when there is measurement noise and the method is
therefore not very practical particularly when derivatives of high order
appear.
Using a Dynamical Systems to Observe the State

For a system governed by Equation (9.19), it can be attempted to deter-
mine the state simply by simulating the equations with the correct input.
W
An estimate of the state is then given by
d x
= A x + Bu (9.21)
dt
To find the properties of this estimate, introduce the estimation error
x = x x
TU
It follows from (9.19) and (9.21) that
d x
= A x
dt
If matrix A has all its eigenvalues in the left half plane, the error x will
thus go to zero. Equation (9.21) is thus a dynamical system whose output
converges to the state of the system (9.19).
JN
292

9.3 Observers
The observer given by (9.21) uses only the process input u, the mea-
sured signal does not appear in the equation. It must also be required that
the system is stable. We will therefore attempt to modify the observer so
that the output is used and that it will work for unstable systems. Con-
sider the following
d x
= A x + Bu + K ( y C x ) (9.22)
dt
observer. This can be considered as a generalization of (9.21). Feedback
from the measured output is provided by adding the term K ( y C x ).
Notice that C x = y is the output that is predicted by the observer. To
investigate the observer (9.22), form the error
ld
x = x x
It follows from (9.19) and (9.22) that
d x
= ( A K C ) x
dt
If the matrix K can be chosen in such a way that the matrix A K C has
or
eigenvalues with negative real parts, error x will go to zero. The conver-
gence rate is determined by an appropriate selection of the eigenvalues.
The problem of determining the matrix K such that A K C has pre-
scribed eigenvalues is very similar to the pole placement problem that
was solved in Section 3.7. In fact, if we observe that the eigenvalues of
the matrix and its transpose are the same, we find that could determine
K such that AT C T K T has given eigenvalues. First we notice that the
W
problem can be solved if the matrix

C T AT C T . . . A(n1)T C T
is invertible. Notice that this matrix is the transpose of the observability

matrix for the system (9.19).

C

CA
TU

Wo =
..

.

n1

CA
of the system. Assume it is desired that the characteristic polynomial of

the matrix A K C is
p(s) = sn + p1 sn1 + . . . + pn
JN
293

It follows from Remark 9.1 of Theorem 9.1 that the solution is given by

K T = p1 a1 p2 a2 . . . pn an W
T W T
o o
o is the observability matrix

where Wo is the observability matrix and W
of the system of the system

a1 1 0 ... 0 b1

a 0 1 ... 0
b2
2
dz
..

..

=
.

z +

u
.

dt

a n1 0 0 ... 1

b
n1

an 0 0 ... 0 bn
ld

y = 1 0 0 ... 0
which is the observable canonical form of the system (9.19). Transposing

the formula for K we obtain

p1 a1

or

p2 a2

1
K = Wo Wo

.

.
.

pn an
The result is summarized by the following theorem.

W
THEOREM 9.2OBSERVER DESIGN BY POLE PLACEMENT
Consider the system given by
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx
where output y is a scalar. Assume that the system is observable. The

dynamical system
TU
d x
= A x + Bu + K ( y C x )
dt
with K chosen as
p1 a1

p2 a2

1

K = Wo Wo .
(9.23)

.

.

pn an
JN
294

9.3 Observers
o are given by
where the matrices Wo and W

1 0 0 ... 0
C

a1 1 0 ... 0

CA

Wo =

, Wo =
1
a2 a1 1 ... 0

..

.

..

.

C An1

an1 an2 an3 ... 1
Then the observer error x = x x is governed by a differential equation

having the characteristic polynomial
p(s) = sn + p1 sn1 + . . . + pn
ld
REMARK 9.2
The dynamical system (9.22) is called an observer for (the states of the)
or
system (9.19) because it will generate an approximation of the states of
the system from its inputs and outputs.
REMARK 9.3
The theorem can be derived by transforming the system to observable
canonical form and solving the problem for a system in this form.
W
REMARK 9.4
Notice that we have given two observers, one based on pure differentiation
(9.20) and another described by the differential equation (9.22). There are
also other forms of observers.
Interpretation of the Observer

The observer is a dynamical system whose inputs are process input u
TU
and process output y. The rate of change of the estimate is composed of

two terms. One term A x + Bu is the rate of change computed from the
model with x substituted for x. The other term K ( y y ) is proportional
to the difference e = y y between measured output y and its estimate
y = C x.
The estimator gain K is a matrix that tells how the error e is
weighted and distributed among the states. The observer thus combines
measurements with a dynamical model of the system. A block diagram of
the observer is shown in Figure 9.2.
JN
295

u x R x y
B C
Figure 9.2 Block diagram of the observer. Notice that the observer contains a
copy of the process.
ld
Duality
Notice the similarity between the problems of finding a state feedback and
finding the observer. The key is that both of these problems are equivalent
to the same algebraic problem. In pole placement it is attempted to find
L so that A B L has given eigenvalues. For the observer design it is
or
instead attempted to find K so that A K C has given eigenvalues. The
following equivalence can be established between the problems
A 1 AT
B 1 CT
L 1 KT
W
Wr 1 WoT
The similarity between design of state feedback and observers also means
that the same computer code can be used for both problems. To avoid
mistakes it is however convenient to have a special code for computing
the observer gain. This can be done by the following Matlab program.
function K=obs(A,C,p)
% Compute observer gain K
TU
% A and C are the matrices in the state model

% p is a vector of desired observer poles
K=acker(A,B,p);
Computing the Observer Gain

The observer gain can be computed in several different ways. For simple
problems it is convenient to introduce the elements of K as unknown pa-
rameters, determine the characteristic polynomial of the observer det ( A K C )
JN
296

9.3 Observers
and identify it with the desired characteristic polynomial. Another alter-

native is to use the fact that the observer gain can be obtained by inspec-
tion if the system is in observable canonical form. In the general case the
observer gain is then obtained by transformation to the canonical form.
There are also reliable numerical algorithms. They are identical to the al-
gorithms for computing the state feedback. The procedures are illustrated
by a few examples.

The double integrator is described by

dx

0 1
0
=
x+ u
dt 0 0 1

ld
y = 1 0
The observability matrix is

1 0

Wo =
0 1
or
i.e. the identity matrix. The system is thus observable and the problem
can be solved. We have

k 1
A KC = 1

k2 0
It has the characteristic polynomial

s + k1 1
W
det A K C = det
= s2 + k1 s + k2
k2 s
Assume that it is desired to have an observer with the characteristic
polynomial
s2 + p1 s + p2 = s2 + 2 s + 2
The observer gains should be chosen as
k1 = p1 = 2
TU
k2 = p2 = 2
The observer is then

d x 0 1 0 k1
=

x + u +
( y x 1 )
dt 0 0 1 k2
JN
297

9.4 Output Feedback

In this section we will consider the same system as in the previous sec-
tions, i.e. the nth order system described by
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt (9.24)
y = Cx
where only the output is measured. As before it will be assumed that u

and y are scalars. It is also assumed that the system is reachable and
observable. In Section 9.2 we had found a feedback
u = Lx + Lr r
ld
for the case that all states could be measured and in Section 9.3 we have
presented developed an observer that can generate estimates of the state
x based on inputs and outputs. In this section we will combine the ideas
of these sections to find an feedback which gives desired closed loop poles
for systems where only outputs are available for feedback.
If all states are not measurable, it seems reasonable to try the feedback
d x
dt
u = L x + Lr r
or
where x is the output of an observer of the state (9.22) ,i.e.
= A x + Bu + K ( y C x )
Since the system (9.24) and the observer (9.26) both are of order n, the
(9.25)
(9.26)
W

closed loop system is thus of order 2n. The states of the system are x and x.
The evolution of the states is described by equations (9.24), (9.25)(9.26).
To analyze the closed loop system, the state variable x is replace by
x = x x (9.27)
Subtraction of (9.24) from (9.24) gives

d x
TU
= Ax A x K ( y C x ) = A x K C x = ( A K C ) x
dt
Introducing u from (9.25) into this equation and using (9.27) to eliminate
x gives
dx
= Ax + Bu = Ax B L x + B Lr r = Ax B L( x x ) + B Lr r
dt
= ( A B L) x + B L x + B Lr r
JN
298

9.4 Output Feedback
The closed loop system is thus governed by

d x A BL BL x B Lr

=

+
r (9.28)
dt x 0 A KC x 0
Since the matrix on the right-hand side is block diagonal, we find that
the characteristic polynomial of the closed loop system is
det (sI A + B L) det (sI A + K C )
This polynomial is a product of two terms, where the first is the charac-
teristic polynomial of the closed loop system obtained with state feedback
and the other is the characteristic polynomial of the observer error. The
ld
feedback (9.25) that was motivated heuristically thus provides a very
neat solution to the pole placement problem. The result is summarized as
follows.
THEOREM 9.3POLE PLACEMENT BY OUTPUT FEEDBACK

Consider the system
or
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx
The controller described by
u = L x + Lr r
W
d x
= A x + Bu + K ( y C x )
dt
gives a closed loop system with the characteristic polynomial
det (sI A + B L) det (sI A + K C )
This polynomial can be assigned arbitrary roots if the system is observable

TU
and reachable.
REMARK 9.5
Notice that the characteristic polynomial is of order 2n and that it can
naturally be separated into two factors, one det (sI A + B L) associated
with the state feedback and the other det (sI A + K C ) with the ob-
server.
JN
299

r u x R x y
Lr B C
A
Process
y
R x
B C
ld
A
Observer
or
Figure 9.3 Block diagram of a controller which combines state feedback with an
observer.
REMARK 9.6
The controller has a strong intuitive appeal. It can be thought of as com-
posed of two parts, one state feedback and one observer. The feedback
gain L can be computed as if all state variables can be measured.
W
The Internal Model Principle
A block diagram of the controller is shown in Figure 9.3. Notice that
the controller contains a dynamical model of the plant. This is called the
internal model principle. Notice that the dynamics of the controller is due
to the observer. The controller can be viewed as a dynamical system with
input y and output u.
d x
= ( A B L K C ) x + K y
TU
dt
u = L x + Lr r
The controller has the transfer function
C (s) = L[sI A + B L + K C ]1 K (9.29)

This can be compared with the controller obtained by the frequency re-
sponse method. Notice that the order of the controller is equal to the order
JN
300

9.4 Output Feedback
of the system. A complex model thus gives a complex controller. Also no-
tice that it follows from (9.29) that the transfer function of the controller
has the property that C (s) goes to zero at least as fast as s1 for large
s. The approach thus results in controllers which have high frequency
roll-off. Compare with the discussion of frequency response in Section 5.5
where it was found that controllers with high frequency roll-off were de-
sirable in order to make systems less sensitive to model uncertainty at
high frequencies.
Properties of the Closed Loop System

To get insight into the properties of the closed loop system we will calculate
the transfer functions of the gang of four. For this purpose we introduce
a load disturbance d at the process input and measurement noise n at
ld
the process output, see the block diagram in Figure 9.3. The closed loop
system is then described by the equations
dx
= Ax + B (u + d)
dt
u = L x + Lr r = Lx + L x + Lr r
d x
or
= A x + Bu + K ( Cx + n C x )
dt
Introducing the error x = x x this equation can be written as
dx
= ( A B L) x + B L x + Bd + B Lr r = As x + B L x + Bd + B Lr r
dt
d x
= ( A K C ) x + Bd K n = Ao x + Bd K n
dt
W
u = Lx + L x + Lr r
y = Cx + n
Notice that this equation has a triangular structure since the equation
for x does not depend on x. Also notice that the reference signal does
This makes a lot of sense because it would be highly
not influence x.
undesirable to have a system where reference inputs generate observer
errors.
TU
EXAMPLE 9.5OUTPUT FEEDBACK OF DOUBLE INTEGRATOR


dx 0 1 0
=
x +
u
dt 0 0 1

y = 1 0x
JN
301

A state feedback was determined in Example 9.1 and and observer was
computed in Example 9.4. Assume that it is desired to have a closed loop
system with the characteristic polynomial
(s2 + 2 c c s + 2c )(s2 + 2 o o s + 2o )
Assuming that the first factor is chosen as the characteristic polynomial

associated with the state feedback, i.e. A B L, and the second with the
observer, i.e. A K C, it follows from the results of the previous examples
that the controller

d x 0 1 0 k1
=

x +
u +
( y x 1 )
dt 0 0 1 k2
ld
u = l1 x 1 l2 x 2 + Lr r
gives the desired closed loop polynomial, provided that
l1 = 2c , k1 = 2 o o
l2 = 2 c c , k2 = 2o
or
It follows from (9.29) that the transfer function from y to u of the con-
troller is
C (s) = L[sI A + B L + K C ]1 K
c o (2( c o + o c )s + c o )
=
s2 + 2s( c c + o o ) + 2c + 2o + 4 1 2 1 2
W
Notice that this transfer function is invariant to permutations of the in-
dices 1 and 2. This means that the controller is the same if the state
feedback was designed to give the characteristic polynomial
s2 + 2 2 2 s + 2
and the observer was designed to give the characteristic polynomial

TU
s2 + 2 1 1 s + 12
It can be shown that the observation about the association of poles to state
feedback and observers is true in general and we can draw the following
important conclusion: Although it is convenient to split the design prob-
lem into two parts, design of a state feedback and design of an observer,
JN
302

9.5 Comparison with PID Control
the controller transfer function is uniquely given by all the specified closed
loop poles. It does not matter if a pole is allocated by the state feedback
or the observer, all assignments will give the same transfer function from
y to u! Transfer functions between other signal pairs do however depend
on which poles are associated with the observer and the state feedback. If
reference values are introduced as described by (9.25) the transfer func-
tion from reference r to output y is uniquely determined by the poles
assigned to the state feedback.
ld
The controller obtained by combining an observer with state feedback will
now be compared with a PID controller. This gives a perspective on what
has been done and it also reveals a significant drawback of the controller
which is caused by assumptions made when modeling the system. With
this insight it is possible to make a simple modification which gives a
much more practical controller.
or
The input-output relation for an ideal PID controller can be written as
Z t
dy
u = k(br y) + ki (r( ) y( ))d Td
o dt
in Section 2.2 the derivative term was interpreted as a prediction of the

output based on linear extrapolation, see Figure 2.2. From Equation (9.20)
W
it also follows that the derivative term can be interpreted as an estimate
of one state variable. The first three terms of the PID controller can thus
be interpreted as a controller with feedback from two states y and d y/ dt
and the reference signal r.
The controller obtained by feedback from the observed states has the
form
u = L x + Lr r = l1 x 1 l2 x 2 . . . ln x n + Lr r (9.30)
TU
The differences between this controller and a PID controller are that there
are more terms and there is no integral action in (9.30). The estimates x i
in (9.30) are filtered through the estimator.
We can thus conclude that a PD controller can be interpreted as a
controller with feedback from two states where the first state is the output
and the second state is an estimate of the derivative of the output. We
can also conclude that the controller based on feedback from estimated
states lacks integral action.
JN
303

A Calibrated System
The controller based on state feedback achieves the correct steady state
response to reference signals by careful calibration of the gain Lr and
that it lacks the nice property of integral control. It is then natural to
ask why the the beautiful theory of state feedback and observes does not
automatically give controllers with integral action. This is a consequence
of the assumptions made when deriving the analytical design method
which we will now investigate.
When using an analytical design method, we postulate criteria and
specifications, and the controller is then a consequence of the assumptions.
In this case the problem is the model (9.1). This model assumes implicitly
that the system is perfectly calibrated in the sense that the output is zero
when the input is zero. In practice it is very difficult to obtain such a
ld
model. Consider, for example, a process control problem where the output
is temperature and the control variable is a large rusty valve. The model
(9.1) then implies that we know exactly how to position the valve to get
a specified outlet temperatureindeed, a highly unrealistic assumption.
Having understood the difficulty it is not too difficult to change the
model. By modifying the model to
or
dx
= Ax + B (u + v)
dt (9.31)
y = Cx
where v is an unknown constant we can can capture the idea that the
model is no longer perfectly calibrated. This model is called a model with
an input disturbance. Another possibility is to use the model
W
dx
= Ax + Bu
dt
y = Cx + v
where v is an unknown constant. This is a model with an output distur-

bance. It will now be shown that a straight forward design of an output
feedback for this system does indeed give integral action
TU
Integral Action by Disturbance Estimation

Both disturbance models will produce controllers with integral action. We
will start by investigating the case of an input disturbance. This is a
little more convenient for us because it fits the control goal of finding a
controller that drives the state to zero.
The model with an input disturbance can conveniently be brought into
the framework of state feedback. To do this, we first observe that v is an
JN
304

unknown constant which can be described by

dv
=0
dt
To bring the system into the standard format we simply introduce the
disturbance v as an extra state variable. The state of the system is thus

x
z=
v
This is also called state augmentation. Using the augmented state the
model (9.31) can be written as

d

x
=
A B x B

+ u
dt v 0 0 v 0
ld
x (9.32)

y = C 0
v
Notice that the disturbance state is not reachable. If the disturbance can
be measured, the state feedback is then
+ L r r = L x x Lv v + L r r
u = Lz (9.33)
or
h The disturbance state v is not reachable. The the effect of the distur-
bance on the system can, however, be eliminated by choosing Lv = 1. If
the disturbance v is known the The control law above can be interpreted
as a combination of feedback from the system state and feedforward from
a measured disturbance. It is not realistic to assume that the disturbance
can be measured and we will instead replace the states by estimates. The
feedback law then becomes
W
u = L x z + Lr r = L x x v + Lr r
This means that feedback is based on estimates of the state and the dis-
turbance.
Observability of Augmented Model

Before attempting to estimate the state we will investigate if the system
is observable. To do this we form the observability matrix
TU

C 0

C A C B

CA

2
C AB

Wo =

..

.

n 1 n 2

C A C A B

n n1

CA CA B
JN
305

The first n rows of this matrix are linearly independent if the original
system is observable. Let a1 , a2 , . . . , an be the coefficients of the character-
istic polynomial of A. To find out if the last row is linearly independent,
we multiply the rows of the matrix with an , an1 , an2 , . . . , a1 and add to
the last row. It follows from Cayley-Hamilton Theorem that

C 0

CA CB

C A 2
C AB

Wo =

.
.

.

n1 n2

C A C A B

0 bn
ld
where
bn = C An1 B + a1 C An2 B + . . . + an2 C AB + an1 C B = an G (0)
The last row is linearly independent of the first n rows if the parameter bn
is different from zero. We can thus conclude that the state can be observed
or
if the original system is observable and if parameter bn is different from
zero. Notice that the condition for observability of the input disturbance is
the same as the condition (9.16) for reachability of the augmented system
used to introduce integral action in Section 9.2.
Observer and Control Law

The observer of the system (9.32) is given by
W

d x A B x B Kx

=
+ u +
( y C x )
dt v 0 0 v 0 Kv

A K x C B x B Kx
=
+ u +
y
Kv 0 v 0 Kv
where matrix K can be chosen to give arbitrary eigenvalues to the matrix

A Kx C B
TU

Kv 0
The controller can be written as
u = L x x v + Lr r

d x A B L x K x C 0 x K x B

=
+
y+ r
dt v Kv C 0 v Kv 0
JN
306

Notice that the system matrix of this equation has zero as an eigenvalue,
which implies that the controller has integral action. The transfer function
of the controller is given by
sI A + B L + K C 0 1 K
x
1
C ( s) = L x

x x

Kv s Kv
1 1
= K v + ( L x K v C )(sI A + B L x + K x C )1 K x
s s
The controller has integral action and the integral gain is

K i = K v 1 + C ( A B L x K x C )1 K x
ld
We thus find that integral action can be obtained by introducing a
constant but unknown disturbance at the process input. This state is be
observable under very natural conditions. The control law then obtained
by the feedback from the estimated states. In this way integral action can
thus be interpreted as an estimate from an estimated disturbance. The
observer gives an explicit estimate of the disturbance. Notice that the
augmented system (9.32) is not reachable because the disturbance states
or
are unreachable, the effect of the disturbance on the state can however
be reduced.

Consider the double integrator. The following model is obtained by aug-
menting the model by an input disturbance

x1 0 1 0 0
W
d

dx

=
x2 =
0 0 1
x +
1u
dt dt
x3 0 0 0 0
The observer becomes

0 1 0 0 k1
d x

= 0 0 1 x + 1 u+ k2
( y x 1 )
dt

TU
0 0 0 0 k3
(9.34)
k1 1 0 0 k1

= k2 0 1
x +
1u + k2
y

k3 0 0 0 k3
and the feedback law is
u = l1 x 1 l2 x 2 x 3 + Lr r (9.35)
JN
307

The characteristic polynomial of the observer is
s3 + k1 s2 + k2 s + k3
Requiring this to be equal to
(s + )(s2 + 2 s + 2 )
gives the following expressions for the components of the observer gain K
k1 = ( + 2 )
k2 = (1 + 2 ) 2
k3 = 3
ld
Eliminating u between Equations (9.34) and (9.35) gives the following
expression for the controller
u = l1 x 1 l2 x 2 x 3

k1 1 0 k1
d x

= k2 l1 l2 0
x+
k2
y
dt

or
k3 0 0 k3
Straightforward calculations give the following transfer function
s2 ( k1 l1 + k2 l2 + k3 ) + s( k2 l1 + k3 l2 ) + l1 k3
C ( s) = (9.36)
s(s2 + s( k1 + l2 ) + k1 l2 + k2 + l1 )
The transfer function has two zeros and three poles, where one pole is at
W
the origin.
9.6 Disturbance Models
The results will now be generalized. Before doing this we will discuss the
problem formulation that has been used. When a pole placement controller
is designed the chosen closed loop characteristic polynomial determines
TU
the way the state goes to zero. It seems intuitively reasonable that the
controller also would react well to disturbances of short duration provided
that the disturbances are so widely spaced that the state goes to zero
between them. The modification of the controller done in Section 9.5 shows
that integral action is obtained when an input disturbance of constant
but unknown amplitude is introduced in the model. In this section it the
results for constant disturbances will be generalized to different types of
disturbances.
JN
308

Pulse Step Ramp Sinusoid
Figure 9.4 Classical disturbance models.
Examples of Disturbances
A suitable characterization of disturbances will first be given. To do this
we will first give some simple example of disturbances and their mathe-
matical models.
ld
Some prototype disturbances like pulses, steps, ramps and sinusoids,
see Figure 9.4 , have traditionally been used to model disturbances. These
disturbances can all be described by simple dynamical systems as is il-
lustrated by the following examples.
EXAMPLE 9.7STEP DISTURBANCE
or
Consider a constant disturbance v = c,where a is a constant. Taking the
derivative gives
dv
= 0, v(0) = c
dt
W
EXAMPLE 9.8RAMP DISTURBANCE
Consider a disturbance that is affine, i.e. v = c1 + c2 t Differentiating twice
gives
d2 v
=0
dt2
The disturbance is thus represented by a second order differential equa-
tion. It can also be represented by
TU

d 0 1 c1
=

,
(0) =
dt 0 0 c2

v= 1 0
JN
309

EXAMPLE 9.9SINUSOIDAL DISTURBANCE

Consider a sinusoidal disturbance with known frequency , i.e
v(t) = c1 sin t + c2 cos t
Differentiation twice gives
d2 v
= 2 a sin t = 2 v
dt2
This differential equation can also be written as

d 0 c1
=
,
(0) =
ld
dt 0 c2

v = 1 0
These examples show that simple disturbances can be represented as
or
differential equations with initial conditions. In all examples the shape of
the disturbance is given by the differential equation and the amplitude is
determined by the initial conditions.
A general approach is to model disturbances as
d
= Av
dt (9.37)
v = Cv
W
It is natural that eigenvalues of A are on the imaginary axis or in the
right half plane, because this will represent disturbances that do not go
to zero as time goes to infinity.
Assuming that the disturbances act on the process input the system
can be described by
dx
= Ax + B (u + v)
dt
TU
d (9.38)
= Av
dt
v = Cv
This system can be brought to standard form by introducing the aug-
mented state

x

z=

JN
310

The system equations then become

dz A B B
=

z+ u
dt 0 Av 0
This system is in standard form. Assuming that all states are measurable
it is natural to use the feedback
u = Lx v + Lr r
Notice that the disturbance state is not reachable. This is natural because
the disturbance model (9.37) is not influenced by the control signal. In
ld
spite of this the effect of the disturbances on the process can be elimi-
nated by proper choice of the gain Lv . Combining the control law with the
feedback law we obtain the following closed loop system
dx
= Ax + B (u + v) = ( A B L) x + B (1 Lv )v + Lr r
dt
or
and it is clear that the disturbance can be eliminated by choosing Lv =
1. The term L can be interpreted as a feedforward from a measured
disturbances.
It is not realistic to assume that the disturbance can be measured. In
this case we can use an observer to obtain an estimate of the disturbance.
The control law then becomes
W
u = L x v + Lr r

d x A B x B Kx (9.39)

=
+ u +
( y C x )
dt v 0 Av v 0 Kv
Eliminating the control signal u the controller becomes

d x A B L K x C 0 x B Lr Kx

=

+
r+
y
dt v Kv C v
TU
Av 0 Kv
u = L x v + Lr r
The transfer function from measured signal y to control u is
C (s) = Cv (sI Av)1 K v

+ L Cv (sI Av )1 K v (sI A + B L + K v C )1 K x
JN
311

uff
r Model and
Feedforward
xm State ufb u y
Generator Process
Feedback
- x
Observer
Figure 9.5 Block diagram of a controller based on a structure with two degrees
of freedom. The controller consists of a command signal generator, state feedback
and an observer.
ld
So far we have only introduced the reference signals in a very primitive
way by adding it to the state feedback. When discussing simple control
or
system in Sections 4.4 and 8.4 we found that response to command sig-
nals could be completely decoupled from disturbance rejection by using a
controller structure having two degrees of freedom. In this section we will
present such a structure for a system with state feedback.
A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 9.5. Notice that the
system admits independent specification of response to command signals
and disturbances. The response to command signals is given by the re-
W
sponse model which can be represented by a transfer function M . The
response to disturbances is given by the state feedback and the observer.
The system in Figure 9.5 is a natural version of the two-degree of
freedom structure for systems with state feedback. To get some insight
into the behavior of the system let us reason through what happens when
the command signal is changed. To fix the ideas let us assume that the
system is in equilibrium with the observer state equal to the process state.
When the command signal is changed a feedforward signal is generated.
TU
This signal has the property that the process output gives the desired
output when the feedforward signal is applied. The process state naturally
changes in response to the feedforward signal. The observer will track the
state perfectly because the initial state was correct. This means that the
estimated state will be equal to the desired model state which implies
the feedback signal L( xm x ) is zero. If there are some disturbances or
some modeling errors the feedback signal will be different from zero and
attempt to correct the situation.
JN
312

Details
Having described the key idea we will now consider the details. Let the
process be described by (9.1) and let P(s) denote the process transfer
function, Furthermore let M (s) denote the transfer function defining the
ideal response to the reference signal. The feedforward signal is then given
by
U f f ( s ) = M ( s ) P ( s ) R( s ) (9.40)
where P (s) is an inverse or a generalized inverse of P(s). Approximate

process models can often be used to determine P (s), see Section 8.3.
To generate the feedforward signals a system with the transfer function
M (s) P1 (s) must be realized. Notice that this transfer function can be
implemented even if P1 is not realizable. Also notice that since the feed-
ld
forward signal is most useful for the rapid response it is possible to make
several approximations, compare with Section 8.3.
The ideal response of the states to the signal uff can be generated from
the process model, (9.1) hence
dxm
= Axm + Buff
or
dt (9.41)
ym = Cxm
The control signal then becomes
u = uff + L( xm x ) (9.42)
W
and the complete controller is given by
u = uff + L( xm x )
dxm
= Axm + Buff
dt
ym = Cxm
TU
d x
= A x + Bu + K ( y C x )
dt
The dynamics required to generate u f f from the reference input is also

requred. This dynamics which has the transfer function P M can often
be generated from the states xm as will be illustrated by the examples in
the following.
This controller given above has the state vectors xm and x. Replacing
JN
313

uff
r Model and ym
e ufb u y
Feedforward
Observer L Process
Generator
Controller
ld
Figure 9.6 Block diagram of a controller based on a structure with two degrees
of freedom. The controller consists of a command signal generator, state feedback
and an observer which estimates the error e = xm x,
between the ideal states and
the estimates states.
the state x by error e = xm x gives the following controller
or
u = uff + Le
dxm
= Axm + Buff
dt
ym = Cxm (9.43)
de
= ( A K C ) e + B (uff u) + K ( ym y)
dt
= ( A K C B L) e + K ( ym y)
W
This equation for e is driven by the output error y ym . The model and
feedforward generator only have to provide the feedforward signal uff and
the ideal output ym . A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 9.6.
Notice that this system has the same structure as the feedforward con-
troller in Figure 8.3C. The controller has integral actions the state feed-
back or the observer is designed so that the transfer function
C (s) = L(sI A + K C + B L)1 K
TU
has integral action. Since integral action is in the error path, the steady
state error will always be zero if a steady state exists.
In some situations like in path following for robots or for numerically
controlled machine tools it may be natural to generate the desired behav-
ior of the state in other ways instead of generating it in real time as we
have described here.
We will illustrate with an example.
JN
314


Consider the double integrator which has the transfer function
1
P ( s) =
s2
Assume that it is desired to have a response characterized by the transfer

function
2m
M ( s) =
s2 + 2 m m + 2m
The transfer function which generates the feedforward signal uff is given
ld
by
s2 2m
G f f (s) = M (s) P1 (s) =
s2 + 2 m m + 2m
Notice that this transfer function is realizable without using derivatives

even if P1 (s) is not realizable. To find a realization of the transfer func-
tion we rewrite it as
M (s) P1 (s) =
s2 +
s2 2m
2 m m + 2m
This transfer function can be realized as

or
= 2m 1
s2
2 m m s + 2m
+ 2 m m + 2m
W
dz1
= 2 m m z1 m z2 + m r
dt
dz2
= m z1
dt
ym = m z2
uff = 2m (r 2 m z1 z2 )
TU
Notice that the same dynamical system generates both the desired model
output ym and the feedforward signal uff . Also notice that the gain in-
creases as the square of m . Fast responses can thus be obtained but
large control signals are required.
Combining the feedforward generator with the determination of an
output feedback in Example 9.5 we can obtain a complete controller based
on command following, state feedback and an observer for the double
integrator. The controller is a dynamical system of fifth order which is
JN
315

described by the following equations by
u = uff + ufb
uff = 2m (r 2 m z1 z2 )
ufb = l1 e1 + l2 e2 + e3
ym = m z2
dz1
= 2 m m z1 + m z2 + m r
dt
dz2
= m z1
dt
de1
= e2 + k1 ( ym y e1 )
dt
ld
de2
= e3 + u + k2 ( ym y e1 )
dt
de3
= k3 ( y e1 )
dt
The states z1 and z2 represent the feedforward generator, the states e1 =
or
xm1 x 1 and e2 = xm2 x 2 represent the components of the deviations
of the estimated state x from its ideal values xm and the state e3 is an
estimate of the load disturbance.
This controller can be represented as
U (s) = G f f (s) R(s) + G f b (s)( M (s) R(s) Y (s))
where G f f is given by Equation (9.36) and

W
s2 2m
G f f ( s) =
s2 + 2 m m + 2m
2m
M ( s) =
s2 + 2 m m + 2m
( k1 l1 + k2 l2 + k3 )s2 + ( k2 l1 + l2 )s + k3 l1
G f b ( s) =
s(s2 + ( k1 + l1 )s + k1 l2 + k2 + l1 )
TU
( k1 l1 + k2 l2 + k3 )s2 + ( k2 l1 + l2 )s + k3 l1
L(s) =
s3 (s2 + ( k1 + l1 )s + k1 l2 + k2 + l1 )
JN
316

9.8 An Example
1 2
I
Motor
1 2
J1 J2
Figure 9.7 Schematic diagram of the system
9.8 An Example
The design procedure will be illustrated by an example.
The Process
ld
Consider the system shown in Figure 9.7. It consists of a motor that drives
two wheels connected by a spring. The input signal is the motor current
I and the output is the angle of the second wheel 2 . It is assumed that
friction can be neglected. The torque constant of the motor is k I , the
moments of inertia are J1 and J2 and the damping in the spring is kd .
The system is a representative example of control of systems with
or
mechanical resonances. Such systems are common in many different con-
texts, industrial drive systems, robots with flexible arms, disk drives and
optical memories. If the requirements on the control system are modest
it is possible to use a PID controller but the achievable performance is
limited by the controller. The PID controller will work quite well as long
as the rotors move in essentially the same way. When the system is driven
in such a way that the angles 1 and 2 starts to deviate substantially
the PID controller is not working well and superior performance can be
W
obtained by using a more complex controller.
The equations of motion of the system are given by momentum bal-
ances for the rotors
d 1
J1 = k I I + k( 2 1 ) + kd ( 2 1 )
dt
d 1
J2 = k( 1 2 ) + kd ( 1 2 )
dt (9.44)
d 1
TU
= 1
dt
d 2
= 2
dt
Choose the state variables as
x1 = 1 , x2 = 2
x3 = 1 / 0 , x4 = 2 / 0
JN
317


p
where 0 = k( J1 + J2 )/( J1 J2 ), which is the undamped natural fre-
quency of the system when the control signal is zero. The state equations
of the system are

0 0 1 0 0 0

1 dx
0 0 0 1
0

0
=

x +

u +

d
0 dt
1 1 1 1
1

0

2 2 2 2 0 2
where the parameters are given by
J2 J1 kd kd
1 = , 2 = 1 = , 2 =
J1 + J2 J1 + J2 0 J1 0 J2
ld
kI 1
1 = 2 , 2 =
0 J1 0 J2
The parameters have the following numerical values J1 = 10/9, J2 = 10,

k = 1, kd = 0.1, and k I = 5, which gives 0 = 1.
It is convenient to use Matlab to for analysis and design and we will
or
simply describe the procedure through Matlab scripts. First we create the
model by the following script.
%The robot arm model
%Parameters
J1=10/9;J2=10;k=1;kd=0.1;ki=5;
w0=sqrt(k*(J1+J2)/J1/J2);a1=J2/(J1+J2);a2=J1/(J1+J2);
W
b1=kd/(w0^2*J1);b2=kd/(w0^2*J2);g1=ki/(w0^2*J1);g2=1/(w0^2*J2);
%System matrices
A=[0 0 1 0;0 0 0 1;-a1 a1 -b1 b1;a2 -a2 b2 -b2]*w0;
B1=[0;0;g1;0];B2=[0;0;0;g2];C1=[1 0 0 0];C2=[0 1 0 0];D1=0;
B=[B1 B2];C=[C1;C2];D=zeros(2,2);
%SISO system where output is angle of first rotor
sys1=ss(A,B1,C1,D1);
%SISO system where output is angle of second rotor
sys2=ss(A,B2,C2,D1);
TU
%Complete system
sys=ss(A,B,C,D);
%Compute transfer function from current to angle
%of second wheel
[num,den]=ss2tf(A,B1,C2,0);P=tf(num,den);
As a first assessment of the system we compute its poles, which is
done in the following Matlab dialog:
JN
318

9.8 An Example
2
10
0
10
g
2
10
1 0 1
10 10 10
150
200
250
p
ld
300
350
1 0 1
10 10 10
w
or
Figure 9.8 Bode plot for the open loop transfer function from current to angle of
the second rotor.
robarmdata
eig(sys.A)
ans =
-0.0500 + 0.9987i
W
-0.0500 - 0.9987i
0.0000 + 0.0000i
0.0000 - 0.0000i
The system thus has two poles at the origin corresponding to the rigid
body motion and two complex poles corresponding to the relative motion
of the wheels. The relative damping of the complex poles is = 0.05 which
means that there is very little damping. The transfer function from motor
current to the angle of the second rotor is
TU
0.045s + 0.45
P ( s) =
s4 + 0.1s3 + s2
The Bode diagram of this transfer function is shown in Figure 9.8.
PD Control
For low frequencies process dynamics can be approximated by the transfer
JN
319

function
0.45
P ( s)
s2
Such a system can conveniently be controlled by a a PD controller. Requir-
ing that the closed loop system should have the characteristic polynomial
s2 + 2 1 1 s + 12
we find that the PD controller becomes
C (s) = 12 + 2 1 1 s = k + kd s = k(1 + sTd )
We add high frequency roll-off by modifying the controller to
ld
1 + sTd
C ( s) = k (9.45)
(1 + sTd / N )2
where N is a parameter that is chosen empirically, a good choice is typ-

ically in the range of 4 to 20. The approximate model is very poor for
frequencies close to 1 rad/s because of the phase lag caused by the res-
or
onant poles. Notice in Figure 9.8 that the phase drops very rapidly for
frequencies around 1 rad/s. The frequency 1 should thus be chosen well
below 1 rad/s. Using the standard rule of thumb we choose 1 = 0.2. It
is essential to have high-frequency roll-off in the controller to make sure
that the loop gain drops rapidly after the crossover frequency.
To evaluate the controller we compute the maximum sensitivity, Ms =
2.2, which occurs at = 0.93, i.e. close to the resonance. To reduce the
W
sensitivity we reduce the parameter 1 to 0.15 and the maximum sen-
sitivity reduces to Ms = 1.6 at = 0.13. The frequency responses of
the gang of four, see Figure 9.9. The figure shows that the sensitivity
functions are reasonable, the maximum sensitivities are Ms = 1.6 and
Mt = 1.8. The disturbance rejection is quite poor, the largest value of the
transfer function G xd is 60. There are no problems with measurement
noise because the largest value of the transfer function Gun is only 0.16.
The resonance peak is noticeable in several of the frequency responses,
TU
because of the high frequency roll-off of the controller the peak is kept at a
low level for the chosen parameters. It is essential that the controller has
high frequency roll-off, without this the controller with the parameters
in Figure 9.9 actually gives an unstable closed loop system. The choice of
the parameter 1 is sensitive, increasing the value to 1 = 0.2867 makes
the closed loop system unstable. The step responses of the gang of four
are shown in Figure 9.10. The time responses look quite reasonable, they
represent what can be achieved with PD control. The overshoot indicated
JN
320

9.8 An Example
g11 g12
2
10
0
10
1
10
0
1
10
10
1
10
2 2
10 10
2 1 0 1 2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
g21 g22
1 0
10 10
ld
2 1
10 10
3 2
10 10
2 1 0 1 2 1 0 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
or
Figure 9.9 Gain curve of the frequency responses of the gang of four for PD
control of the system. The controller is given by (9.45) with parameters 1 = 0.15,
1 = 0.707 and N = 10.
by the response of P(s) C (s)/(1 + P(s) C (s)) can be reduced by set point
weighting. The load disturbance response can be improved at low fre-
quencies by introducing integral action. The peak in the response to load
W
disturbances can be reduced a little by further tuning of the parameters.
Notice that the high frequency resonant mode is traceable in the graphs
although the amplitude is small. The mode becomes very visible if the
parameter 1 is increased towards 0.3.
Design of State Feedback

We will first design a state feedback that gives a closed loop system with
poles in -2 -1 and 1 i. This choice implies that the oscillatory poles are
TU
damped and that the integrating poles are move well into the left half
plane. The design is executed with the following Matlab script.
%Design of State feedback for robotarm
%Get process model
robarmdata;B=B1;C=C2;
%Desired closed loop poles
P=[-1 -2 -1+i -1-i];
JN
321

g11 g12
1.5 60
50
1 40
30
0.5 20
10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
g21 g22
1 1
0.5 0.5
ld
0 0
0.5 0.5
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
or
Figure 9.10 Time responses of the gang of four for PD control of the system. The
controller is given by (9.45) with parameters 1 = 0.15, 1 = 0.707 and N = 10.
L=acker(A,B,P);Acl=A-B*L;
Lr=-1/(C*inv(Acl)*B);
disp(Feedback gain L=);disp(L)
W
disp(Refererence gain Lr=);disp(Lr)
%Check the results
n=size(A);disp(Specified closed loop poles)
disp(P);
disp(Closed loop poles obtained)
disp(eig(Acl));
%Compute Closed loop transfer function
[num,den]=ss2tf(Acl,B*Lr,C,0);Gcl=tf(num,den);
disp(Closed loop transfer function:)
TU
Gcl
We find that the control law is
u = l1 x1 l2 x2 l3 x3 l4 x4 + Lr xr
where l1 = 1.78 l2 = 7.10 l3 = 1.09 and l4 = 20.24 and Lr = 8.89. The

JN
322

9.8 An Example
closed loop transfer function is
0.4s + 4
G ( s) =
s4 + 5s3 + 10s2 + 20s + 4
Notice that when using Matlab a few small terms appear because of in-
accuracies in the computations.
To find the stiffness of the system we calculate the transfer function
from a a disturbance torque on the second rotor to the deflection of the
rotor. This can be done by the Matlab script
%Computation of impedance
%This script computes the transfer function
%from a disturbance on the second rotor to
ld
%the angle of that rotor
%Compute state feedback
robarmsfb;
%Compute the transfer function
A=sys2.A;B=sys2.B;C=sys2.C;
[num,den]=ss2tf(Acl,B,C,0);Gcl=tf(num,den);
disp(Closed loop impedance function:)
or
Gcl
%Compute stiffness at second rotor
ks=den(5)/num(4);
disp(Stiffness=)
disp(ks)
Executing the script we find that the transfer function from a torque
W
on the second mass to deflection is
0.1s2 + 0.499s + 0.894

G ( s) =
s4+ 5s3 + 10s2 + 10s + 4
The steady state gain of this transfer function is G (0) = 0.894/4 = 0.22.
The stiffness is thus 1/ G (0) = 4.5 which can be compared with the stiff-
ness of the uncontrolled system which is 1. The stiffness can be increased
by choosing faster closed loop poles.
TU
Simulation of the Closed Loop System

To illustrate the properties of the closed loop system further we will sim-
ulate the system. A Simulink block diagram of the system is shown in
Figure 9.11. In the simulation we will first apply a unit step in the refer-
ence signal and we will then apply a disturbance torque of 2 units at the
second rotor. The results of the simulation are shown in Figure 9.12. The
simulation is executed using the following Matlab script.
JN
323

2 3
Out2 Out3
x = Ax+Bu x = Ax+Bu 1
y = Cx+Du y = Cx+Du
Step Out1
StateSpace1 StateSpace
Step1
ld
Figure 9.11 Simulink block diagram of the system with a controller.
1
y
or
0
2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
8
W
6
4
u
2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
t
Figure 9.12 Simulation of the closed loop system with state feedback. The angle
TU
1 of the first rotor is shown in dashed curves, and the motion of the second rotor
in solid lines.
%Simlation of robot arm with state feedback

robarmsfb; %Execute controller design
%Set procees parameters
Ap=A;Bp=[B B2];Cp=eye(n);Dp=zeros(4,2);
JN
324

9.8 An Example
%Set controller parameters

Ac=0;Bc=zeros(1,5);Cc=0;Dc=[Lr -L];
%Execute simulation
r=1;d=2;ts=20;[t,x,y]=sim(robarmblk,[0 ts]);
subplot(2,1,1);
plot(t,y(:,1),r--,t,y(:,2),b,t,ones(size(t)),r:,linew,2);
ylabel(y)
subplot(2,1,2);plot(t,y(:,6),t,zeros(size(t)),r--,linew,2);
ylabel(u)
The simulation shows that the second rotor responds very nicely to the
reference signal. To achieve the fast response the first rotor has a large
overshoot. This is necessary because the only way to exert a force on the
second rotor is to turn the first rotor so that a large force is obtained. To
ld
execute effective control it is necessary to coordinate the motion of both
rotors accurate. This is done very efficiently by the controller based on
state feedback. To obtain the response to a unit step command shown in
the figure the initial value of the control signal is 8.9. The value is propor-
tional to the magnitude of the step. To judge if the value is reasonable it
it necessary to know the numerical values of typical steps and the signal
or
level when the control signal saturates. If the a larger value of the control
signal can be permitted the specified closed loop poles can be chose to be
faster. If the value is too large the desired closed loop poles should have
smaller magnitude.
The response to a torque disturbance at the second rotor shows that
there is a steady state error. The reason for this is that the controller does
not have integral action. Also notice that the angle 1 of the first rotor is
W
negative. This is necessary because the only way to exert a torque on the
second rotor is by turning the first rotor.
Controller with Integral Action

To avoid the steady state error for a load disturbance we will introduce
integral action as described in Section 9.2. This gives the control law
Z t
u = l1 x1 l2 x2 l3 x3 l4 x4 l5 ( x2 r)dt + Lr r
TU
With a controller having integral action the closed loop system is of fifth
order and it is necessary to specify five poles. They are chosen as -3, -2,
-1, and 1 i. The design is executed with the following Matlab script.
%Design of State feedback for robotarm
%Get process model
robarmdata;A=sys2.A;B=sys1.B;C=sys2.C;
JN
325

%Form augmented system

A=[A;C];A=[A,zeros(5,1)];B=[B;0];C=[C 0];
%Desired closed loop poles
P=[-0.5 -1 -2 -1+i -1-i];
L=acker(A,B,P);Acl=A-B*L;
Lr=-1/(C*inv(Acl)*B);
disp(Feedback gain L=);disp(L)
disp(Refererence gain Lr=);disp(Lr)
%Check the results
n=size(A);disp(Specified closed loop poles)
disp(P);
disp(Closed loop poles obtained)
disp(eig(Acl));
ld
%Compute Closed loop transfer function
%using the same value of Lr as for regular
%state feedback Lr=8.89
Ba=B*8.89+[zeros(4,1);-1]
[num,den]=ss2tf(Acl,Ba,C,0);Gcl=tf(num,den);
disp(Closed loop transfer function:)
Gcl
or
Executing the script we find that the following controller parameters
l1 = 3.61, l2 = 47.95, l3 = 1.53, l4 = 59.98, l5 = 17.78
The transfer function from reference to angle of the second rotor for the
closed loop system is
W
0.4001s2 + 4.801s + 8
G ( s) =
s5 + 7s4 + 20s3 + 30s2 + 24s + 8
The transfer function from torque on the second rotor to its displacement
can be computed using the following Matlab script.
%Computation of impedance
%This script computes the transfer function
TU
%from a disturbance on the second rotor to

%the angle of that rotor for a state feedback
%with integral action
%Compute state feedback
robarmsfbi;
%Compute the transfer function
B=[sys2.B;0];C=[sys2.C 0];
[num,den]=ss2tf(Acl,B,C,0);Gcl=tf(num,den);
JN
326

9.8 An Example
0
10
2
g 10
4
10
3 2 1 0 1 2
10 10 10 10 10 10
w
Figure 9.13 Gain curves for the open loop system (dotted), the system with state
feedback (dashed) and the system with state feedback and integral action (full).
ld
disp(Closed loop impedance function:)
Gcl
%Compute stiffness at second rotor
ks=den(6)/num(6);
The transfer function is
or
0.1s3 + 0.699s2 + 1.713s
G ( s) =
s5 + 7s4 + 20s3 + 30s2 + 24s + 8
In Figure 9.13 we show the gain curves of the transfer functions relating
angular deviation to disturbance torque for the open loop system and for
the system with state feedback and state feedback with integral action.
The figure shows clearly that the deflection caused by a given torque
W
can be reduced by feedback. With a regular state feedback the gain is
reduced by more than a factor of XXX. By introducing integral action in
the controller the deviation can be reduce more at low frequencies.
Simulation of the Controller with Integral Action

The simulink block shown in Figure 9.11 can also be used to simulate the
controller with integral action. The simulation is executed with the script
%Simlation of robot arm with state feedback
TU
%having integral action

%Get procees and controller parameters
robarmsfbi;
Ap=A;Bp=[B B2];Cp=eye(4);Dp=zeros(4,2);
%Set controller parameters
Lr=8.8;
Ac=0;Bc=[1 0 -1 0 0];Cc=L(5);Dc=[Lr -L(1:4)];
%Execute simulation
JN
327

1
y
2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
ld
4
u
2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
t
or
Figure 9.14 Simulation of the closed loop system with state feedback having in-
tegral action. The angle 1 of the first rotor is shown in dashed curves, and the
motion of the second rotor in solid lines.
r=1;d=2;ts=20;[t,x,y]=sim(robarmblk,[0 ts]);
W
subplot(2,1,1);
plot(t,y(:,1),r--,t,y(:,2),b,t,ones(size(t)),r:,linew,2);
ylabel(y)
axis([0 20 -2 4])
subplot(2,1,2);plot(t,y(:,6),t,zeros(size(t)),r--,linew,2);
ylabel(u)
axis([0 20 -2 10])
TU
The result of the simulation is shown in Figure 9.14. Compare this with
the simulation of the controller without integral action in Figure 9.14. The
responses to reference signals are quite comparable but the responses to
a disturbance torque are different. The controller with integral action
gives zero steady state error when a torque is applied. The first rotor
does however have a substantial deviation. This is necessary to create a
torque to oppose the disturbance.
JN
328

9.9 Summary
9.9 Summary
In this chapter we have presented a systematic method for design of a
controller. The controller has an interesting structure, it can be thought
of as composed of three subsystems: a system that generates the desired
output and a feedforward signals from the reference value, an estimator
and a feedback from estimated states. This structure has the property that
the response to reference signals can be decoupled from the response to
disturbances. The details are carried out only for systems with one input
and one output but it turns out that the structure of the controller is the
same for systems with many inputs and many outputs. The equations for
the controller have the same form, the only difference is that the feedback
gain L and the observer gain K are matrices instead of vectors for the
ld
single-input single-output case. There are also many other design methods
that give controllers with the same structure but the gains K and L are
computed differently. The analysis also gives an interesting interpretation
of integral action as a disturbance estimator. This admits generalizations
to many other types of disturbances.
or
W
TU
JN
329

Index
aeronautics, 18 characteristic polynomial, 68
ld
air-fuel ratio control, 383, 387 closed loop systems, 57
aliasing, 218, 219, 422, 423 communications, 23
anti-windup, 205 complementary sensitivity func-
antialiasing filter, 219, 423 tion, 179
apparent lag, 215 computing, 30
apparent time constant, 215 control error, 38, 197
apparent time delay, 215 control matrix, 110
or
Approximate Process Models, 303 control paradigms, 372
automotive, 27 controlled differential equation,
68
back propagation, 390
controller gain K , 40, 197
back-calculation, 207
controller gain: high frequency,
biology, 34
239
black box models, 63
controller outputs, 424
block diagram, 41
W
controllers:two degrees of free-
bump test, 71
dom, 48
bumpless transfer, 225, 227
crisp variable, 392
bumptest, 212
critical velocity, 146
Butterworth filter, 219, 423
crossover frequency, 233, 262
calibrated system, 321
calibration, 325 D-term, 39, 197
cascade control, 373 decay ratio, 240
TU
cascade control, applications, 378 defuzzification, 395

cascade control, control modes, delay margin, 87, 235
376 derivative time Td , 40, 197
cascade control, disturbance redesign parameters, 232
jection, 374 differential equation: controlled,
cascade control, tuning, 377 68
cascade control, use of, 375 direct term, 110
cascade control, windup, 377 direct tuning, 214
JN
330

9.9 Summary
distributed process control, 15 Gang of Six, 167, 168

disturbances, 67
dominant poles, 290, 293 Hall diagram, 264
double integrator, 110 high frequency roll-off, 183, 239
double integrator: pole placement history, 10
by state feedback, 321 hybrid control, 21
drum level control, 299
I-PD controller, 205
dynamics matrix, 110
I-term, 39, 197
electric motor, 112 impulse response, 66
electricity, 17 impulse response: experimental
electronics, 23 determination, 71
impulse response: odedef, 70
empirical tuning, 214
incremental algorithm, 222
ld
entertainment, 29
incremental algorithm, windup,
error coefficients, 188
206
error feedback, 47, 168
input disturbance, 347
experimental determination of
input-output models, 63
dynamic models, 83
integral action, 14, 325
external descriptions, 63
integral control, 39
or
feedback, 372 integral gain, 237
feedback amplifier, 45 integral time Ti , 40, 197
feedback beneficial properties, integral windup, SEE WINDUP,
418 205
feedback systems: definition in integrator windup, SEE WINDUP,
terms of block diagrams, 205
57 interacting loops, 397
W
feedback: reducing parameter vari- interaction, 402
ations, 14 interaction measures, 405
force balance, 415 internal descriptions, 63
force feedback, 418 internal model principle, 342
frequency response, 83 inverse response, 106, 152
frequency response: experimen- inverted pendulum, 111
tal determination, 83 jump- and rate limiter, 381
fuzzy control, 391
TU
fuzzy inference, 393 KLnT model, 303

fuzzy logic, 391
lag compensation, 250
gain, 51 leadcompensation, 253, 256
gain crossover frequency, 102, limitations: RHP zeros, 291
262 limiters, 380
gain margin, 85, 86, 233 linear static model, 51
Gang of Four, 168 linear system, 110
JN
331

linear systems, 65 parallel systems, 398

linearization, 51 phase crossover frequency, 101
load disturbance, 165 phase lag, 84
load disturbance attenuation, 237 phase margin, 86, 233
load disturbances, 236 physics, 34
loop gain, 51 PI control, 14
PI controller: analog circuit, 81
magic of integral control, 39 PI-D controller, 205
manufacturing, 15 PID control, 38
mathematics, 32 PID, discretization, 220
maximum high frequency con- PID, interacting form, 203
troller gain, 239 PID, non-interacting form, 203
maximum selector, 385 PIPD controller, 204
ld
maximum sensitivity, 174 pole placement, 161
measurement noise, 165, 236 pole placement: counterintuitive
median selector, 388 behavior, 291
membership functions, 391 pole placement: RHP process ze-
minimum phase, 103 ros, 291
minimum selector, 385 poles, 72
mode switches, 224 poles and zeros, 72
or
Model Predicitve Control, 405 predestination, 64
MPC, 405 prediction, ability of controllers,
40
neural network, 388
prediction, using derivative ac-
neural network, hidden layers,
tion, 40
389
prefiltering, 219, 423
neural network, learning, 390
principle of force balance, 418
W
neuron, 388
nonlinear elements, 380 process control, 11
notch, 257 process variable, 197
notch compensation, 257 proportional action, 14
proportional control, 14, 38
observability, 67, 132 pulse width modulation, 425
observers, 379 pure error feedback, 168
on-off control, 38
operational amplifier, 260 ramp unit, 381
TU
operational aspects, 224 rate limiter, 381

order, 68, 110 ratio control, 382
output disturbance, 347 ratio control, for air-fuel, 383
overshoot, 240 ratio controllers, 383
overshoot: control signal, 241 ratio PI controller, 383
reachability, 67
P-term, 39, 197 reachability matrix, 128
pairing, 402 reference variable, 197
JN
332

9.9 Summary
reference, specifications, 239 surge tank control, 381

relative gain array, 405 symbol: ms , 174
relative time delay, 215 symbol: sc , 174
resonant compensator, 258 symbol:Ms , 174
RGA, relative gain array, 405 system structuring, 406
rise time, 240 system: time-invariant, 110
robotics, 17
three-position pulse output, 425
Rosenbrocks system, 402
thyristors, 425
RPI controller, 383
time constant, 242
sampling, 217, 422 time-invariant system, 110
selector control, 385 tracking, 207, 226
selector control, applications, 387 tracking time constant, 209
trail, 145
ld
selector control, of air-fuel, 387
selector control, tuning, 386 transfer function, 72, 77
sensitivity crossover frequency, transfer function: laplace trans-
174 forms, 77
sensitivity function, 179 triacs, 425
sensor function, 110 tuning methods, 212
sensor matrix, 110 two degrees of freedom, 48, 156,
or
servo mechanism theory, 10 169
set point, 197 two degrees of freedom (2DOF),
set point weighting, 201 154
setpoint limitation, 206 uncertainty, 67
settling time, 240
simple models, 212 velocity algorithms, 221
split range control, 384, 412 velocity function, 110
W
stability, 56, 71 waterbed effect, 185
stability margin, 85, 86 white box models, 63
stability margins, 85 windup, 205
state, 64, 110 windup, back-calculation, 207
state augmentation, 347 windup, cascade control, 377
state feedback, 380 windup, incremental algorithm,
state feedback: unreachable sys- 206
tem, 322 windup, selector control, 387
TU
state models, 63 windup, setpoint limitation, 206

state:concept, 64 windup, tracking, 207
static model, 50
steady state gain, 72 zeros, 72
steady-state error, 240 Ziegler-Nichols, frequency response
step response, 66, 71 method, 213
step response: experimental de- Ziegler-Nichols, step response
termination, 71 method, 212
JN
333

Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.alljntuworld.

Control System Design

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

2.6 Open and Closed Loop Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

3.5 Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

7.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

of chemistry. This led to an organization of engineering schools based on

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

1.2 A Brief History

1.2 A Brief History

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

The Centrifugal Governor

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

1.2 A Brief History

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

where u is the opening of the steam valve, Vr is the desired speed, V

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

1.2 A Brief History

The Emergence of Control

were organized and journals on control started to appear. The Interna-

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

The Second Wave

cesses. Process control is an essential part of these industries, the pro-

Advances in Process Control

Keep essential quality variables at specified values.

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

1.3 Process Control

Minimize use of energy and raw material.

Controllers then appeared as special devices separated from sensors and

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Order Production Financial

Process Process Process

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

The Role of Sensors

positioning. A complete transfer line has a few hundred feedback loops.

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Manufacturer Supplier Wholesaler Retailer

Figure 1.6 Schematic diagram of a simple supply chain consisting of manufactur-

rapidly. It is then possible to produce a part when an order is obtained.

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

closed every evening to make new orders.

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Another aspect of robots

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

It is difficult to store energy and it is therefore necessary that pro-

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

High Voltage DC Transmission Systems

Control of Networked Power Systems

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)

Safety and Reliability

Downloaded From JNTU World (http://www.alljntuworld.in)